Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know
you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store®
or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
OWNER’S MANUAL
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_N
Second Edition
© 2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
2020 WRANGLER
2020 WRANGLER
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves
the right to make changes in design and specifications, and⁄or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s
Manual, Navigation⁄Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S.
residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement
kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using
any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a
convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can
be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or
use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your
reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................. 8
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................................................11
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ...................................................... 122
4 SAFETY .........................................................................................................................................144
5 STARTING AND OPERATING ..............................................................................................205
6 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY .................................................................................................... 275
7 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ..................................................................................... 304
8 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................ 358
9 MULTIMEDIA ..............................................................................................................................368
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE .....................................................................................................458
11 INDEX .............................................................................................................................................462
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
ROLLOVER WARNING ........................................... 9
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ................................. 9
Essential Information........................................9
Symbols .............................................................9
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ...............................10
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS ........10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED ...............11
KEYS ......................................................................12
Key Fob........................................................... 12
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................15
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition ....................... 15
Vehicle On Message ..................................... 16
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...17
How To Use Remote Start ............................. 17
Remote Start Cancel Message —
If Equipped ..................................................... 18
To Enter Remote Start Mode ........................ 18
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle .................................................... 18
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle ............................................................ 18
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped .................................................... 19
General Information....................................... 19
SENTRY KEY ..........................................................19
Replacement Keys......................................... 20
General Information....................................... 20
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED .... 21
To Arm The System ....................................... 21
To Disarm The System .................................. 21
Rearming Of The System............................... 22
DOORS .................................................................. 22
Manual Door Locks........................................ 22
Power Door Locks — If Equipped ................. 23
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
(If Equipped) .................................................. 23
Child-Protection Door Lock System —
Rear Doors ..................................................... 26
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped............ 27
Front Door Removal....................................... 27
Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models) ..... 29
SEATS .................................................................... 31
Manual Front Seats ....................................... 31
Heated Seats — If Equipped.......................... 33
Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat —
Two Door Models ........................................... 33
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four Door
Models ............................................................ 34
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat —
Two Door Models ........................................... 35
Rear Seat Armrest — If Equipped.................. 36
HEAD RESTRAINTS ............................................. 37
Front Head Restraints ................................... 37
Rear Head Restraints — Two Door Models .. 38
Rear Head Restraints — Four Door Models.. 38
STEERING WHEEL ................................................ 39
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column................. 39
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped.......... 40
MIRRORS ..............................................................40
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped ......... 40
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped ... 41
Outside Mirrors ............................................. 41
Power Mirrors — If Equipped......................... 41
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped ....................... 42
Vanity Mirrors ................................................ 42
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................42
Headlight Switch ............................................ 42
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped ........ 42
High/Low Beam Switch ................................. 43
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped ........... 43
Flash-To-Pass ................................................. 43
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ........... 43
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ..................... 44
Turn Signals ................................................... 44
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ............... 44
Lights-On Reminder ....................................... 44
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................44
Courtesy Lights .............................................. 44
Dimmer Controls............................................ 45
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS ............45
Windshield Wiper Operation ......................... 45
CLIMATE CONTROLS ............................................47
Manual Climate Control Overview ................ 47
Automatic Climate Controls Overview .......... 51
Climate Control Functions............................. 57
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped .................................................... 58
Operating Tips ............................................... 58
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED ..................60
Auto-Down Feature ....................................... 60
Wind Buffeting ............................................... 61
DUAL TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS —
IF EQUIPPED .........................................................61
Removing The Soft Top —
Four Door Models .......................................... 61
Installing The Soft Top —
Four Door Models .......................................... 63
FREEDOM TOP THREE-PIECE MODULAR HARD
TOP — IF EQUIPPED..............................................65
Front Panel(s) Removal ................................. 65
Freedom Top Storage Bag............................. 66
Front Panel(s) Installation ............................. 67
Rear Hard Top Removal ................................ 67
Rear Hard Top Installation ............................ 70
DOOR FRAME .......................................................70
Door Frame Removal..................................... 71
Door Frame Installation Four Door Models — If
Equipped ........................................................ 71
Door Frame Installation Two Door Models — If
Equipped ........................................................ 73
SOFT TOP TWO DOOR MODELS —
IF EQUIPPED .........................................................73
Lowering The Soft Top ................................... 75
Soft Top Window Storage Bag ...................... 82
Raising The Soft Top...................................... 84
SOFT TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS —
IF EQUIPPED .........................................................88
Lowering The Soft Top ................................... 90
Raising The Soft Top...................................... 96
POWER SLIDING TOP — IF EQUIPPED.............101
Opening The Power Top...............................102
Closing The Power Top ................................102
Wind Buffeting ............................................102
Pinch Protect Feature..................................102
Power Top Maintenance..............................102
Ignition Off Operation ..................................103
Relearn Procedure....................................... 103
Rear Quarter Window Removal...................103
FOLDING WINDSHIELD ....................................105
Lowering The Windshield ............................106
Raising The Windshield ............................... 108
HOOD ...................................................................109
Opening The Hood ....................................... 109
Closing The Hood .........................................109
REAR SWING GATE............................................109
Cargo Area Features....................................110
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED .......111
Before You Begin
Programming HomeLink®...........................111
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming ..... 113
Using HomeLink®........................................ 114
Security.........................................................114
Troubleshooting Tips ...................................114
General Information.....................................115
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT......................................115
Storage .........................................................115
Cupholders ................................................... 116
Electrical Power Outlets...............................117
Power Inverter — If Equipped ..................... 118
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped ................119
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ......... 121
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER .................................... 122
Instrument Cluster Descriptions................. 123
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY .................... 125
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls ........................................................ 125
Oil Change Reset — If Equipped..................126
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items .... 127
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode Message
— Electrical Load Reduction Actions — If
Equipped ..................................................... 131
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ............... 132
Red Warning Lights......................................132
Yellow Warning Lights.................................. 135
Yellow Indicator Lights................................. 138
Green Indicator Lights ................................. 139
White Indicator Lights.................................. 140
Blue Indicator Lights....................................141
Gray Indicator Lights.................................... 141
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II ... 141
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity................................................ 142
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ........................................................ 142
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ............................................ 144
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 144
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ..... 145
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ........................ 152
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped ..................................................152
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped..............................157
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ..........................................................160
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS .................. 165
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ......165
Important Safety Precautions .....................165
Seat Belt Systems .......................................166
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS).....173
Child Restraints............................................188
Transporting Pets ........................................201
SAFETY TIPS ...................................................... 201
Transporting Passengers.............................201
Exhaust Gas ................................................201
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .........................................................202
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle .....................................204
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE .................................... 205
Manual Transmission — If Equipped .........205
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped .....205
Normal Starting............................................205
Extreme Cold Weather
(Below –22°F Or −30°C) ...........................208
If Engine Fails To Start.................................208
After Starting ................................................208
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED .......209
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .......209
PARKING BRAKE................................................209
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED......211
Shifting..........................................................211
Downshifting ................................................212
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION............................214
Ignition Park Interlock.................................. 215
Brake/Transmission Shift
Interlock System ......................................... 215
Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission .......215
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION ..................220
Four-Position Transfer Case........................220
Five-Position Transfer Case ........................222
Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped ..............225
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) — Rubicon Models.......225
Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect —
If Equipped ..................................................226
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING ......227
STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)........................227
Automatic Mode...........................................228
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop .......................................................229
To Start The Engine While In
Autostop Mode.............................................229
To Manually Turn Off The
Stop/Start System .......................................230
To Manually Turn On The
Stop/Start System .......................................230
System Malfunction..................................... 230
STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED) ....................... 230
Automatic Mode........................................... 231
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop ....................................................... 232
To Start The Engine While In
Autostop Mode............................................. 232
To Manually Turn Off The
Stop/Start System ....................................... 233
To Manually Turn On The
Stop/Start System ....................................... 233
System Malfunction..................................... 233
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED ................... 233
To Activate....................................................234
To Set A Desired Speed............................... 234
To Vary The Speed Setting .......................... 234
To Accelerate For Passing .......................... 235
To Resume Speed ....................................... 235
To Deactivate .............................................. 235
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 236
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation ... 237
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ... 237
To Activate/Deactivate................................238
To Set A Desired ACC Speed ....................... 238
To Cancel...................................................... 239
To Turn Off....................................................239
To Resume ...................................................239
To Vary The Speed Setting ......................... 239
Setting The Following Distance In ACC....... 241
Overtake Aid.................................................242
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
ACC Operation At A Stop (Automatic
Transmission Only).......................................242
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu ..........243
Display Warnings And Maintenance...........243
Precautions While Driving With ACC ...........245
General Information.....................................247
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
Mode.............................................................247
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED....................................................... 249
ParkSense Sensors......................................250
ParkSense Warning Display ........................250
ParkSense Display .......................................250
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense.............252
Service The ParkSense Rear Park
Assist System ...............................................252
Cleaning The ParkSense System ................ 252
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ...... 253
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA ............. 254
REFUELING THE VEHICLE ................................ 255
Fuel Filler Cap ..............................................255
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ..................256
VEHICLE LOADING ............................................ 256
Certification Label........................................256
TRAILER TOWING ............................................. 257
Common Towing Definitions .......................258
Trailer Hitch Classification...........................260
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings) ................................261
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..........................261
Towing Tips...................................................263
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)...........................................264
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle ..........................................................264
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Models ..........................................................265
DRIVING TIPS......................................................266
On-Road Driving Tips ...................................266
Off-Road Driving Tips ...................................267
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS........................275
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ....275
General Information.....................................278
BULB REPLACEMENT ........................................279
Replacement Bulbs .....................................279
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 281
FUSES .................................................................283
General Information.....................................283
Power Distribution Center (PDC).................284
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING .......................290
Jack Location ..............................................291
Spare Tire Removal ....................................291
Preparations For Jacking ............................292
Jacking Instructions.....................................292
Road Tire Installation...................................295
MANUAL PARK RELEASE..................................295
JUMP STARTING ................................................296
Preparations For Jump Start .......................297
Jump Starting Procedure............................. 298
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS ......................... 299
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............................ 300
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE........................ 302
Four Wheel Drive Models ............................ 303
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped ........303
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ................................................................ 303
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....................... 303
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING .................................. 304
Maintenance Plan........................................ 305
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle ................... 309
ENGINE COMPARTMENT ................................. 310
2.0L Engine ................................................. 310
3.6L Engine ................................................. 311
Checking Oil Level .......................................312
Adding Washer Fluid.................................... 312
Maintenance-Free Battery .......................... 312
Pressure Washing........................................313
DEALER SERVICE .............................................. 313
Engine Oil ..................................................... 314
Engine Oil Filter............................................ 315
Engine Air Cleaner Filter .............................315
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection.................. 316
Air Conditioner Maintenance ......................317
Body Lubrication .......................................... 320
Windshield Wiper Blades ............................ 320
Exhaust System .......................................... 323
Cooling System ............................................ 324
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
Brake System ..............................................328
Front/Rear Axle Fluid ..................................328
Transfer Case ..............................................329
Manual Transmission .................................329
Automatic Transmission .............................329
RAISING THE VEHICLE ...................................... 331
TIRES .................................................................. 331
Tire Safety Information ...............................331
Tires — General Information .......................338
Tire Types .....................................................342
Spare Tires — If Equipped ...........................343
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .......................344
Tire Chains (Traction Devices) ...................345
Tire Rotation Recommendations ............... 346
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................. 346
Treadwear.....................................................347
Traction Grades............................................347
Temperature Grades....................................347
STORING THE VEHICLE .................................... 347
BODYWORK........................................................ 348
Protection From Atmospheric Agents .........348
Body And Underbody Maintenance ............349
Preserving The Bodywork ............................349
INTERIORS ......................................................... 351
Carpet Safety Information ...........................351
Carpet Removal ...........................................352
Seats And Fabric Parts ................................356
Plastic And Coated Parts .............................356
Leather Parts................................................357
Glass Surfaces ............................................357
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ...............358
BRAKE SYSTEM..................................................358
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................358
Torque Specifications ..................................358
FUEL REQUIREMENTS .......................................359
2.0L Engine .................................................. 359
3.6L Engine .................................................. 359
Reformulated Gasoline ............................... 360
Materials Added To Fuel.............................. 360
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends........................360
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel
Vehicles ........................................................361
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications.....361
MMT In Gasoline.......................................... 361
Fuel System Cautions..................................362
Carbon Monoxide Warnings ........................ 362
FLUID CAPACITIES .............................................363
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ................................364
Engine ..........................................................364
Chassis ........................................................367
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS .......................................368
CYBERSECURITY ...............................................368
UCONNECT SETTINGS........................................369
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 3 Settings ...................................369
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4 Settings ...................................380
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Settings.................... 392
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION .......... 405
Safety Guidelines.........................................405
UCONNECT 3 WITH 5-INCH DISPLAY .............. 406
Introduction..................................................406
Radio Mode..................................................407
Media Mode .................................................410
Phone Mode................................................. 412
UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY .............. 418
Introduction..................................................418
Radio Mode..................................................419
Media Mode .................................................427
Phone Mode................................................. 435
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED ................. 446
Off-Road Pages Status Bar ......................... 446
Drivetrain ..................................................... 447
Pitch & Roll .................................................. 447
Accessory Gauge ......................................... 447
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS ........... 448
Radio Operation........................................... 448
Media Mode .................................................448
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL ................................ 448
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE
PHONES .............................................................. 450
Regulatory And Safety Information............. 450
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
QUICK TIPS ......................................................... 452
Introducing Uconnect .................................. 452
Get Started................................................... 452
Basic Voice Commands............................... 453
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
Radio.............................................................453
Media............................................................453
Phone............................................................454
Voice Text Reply ...........................................454
Climate — If Equipped..................................455
Navigation (4C NAV) — If Equipped.............455
Siri® Eyes Free.............................................455
Using Do Not Disturb ..................................455
Android Auto™ — If Equipped .....................456
Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped ...................456
General Information.....................................457
Additional Information .................................457
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE ...................................................458
Prepare For The Appointment..................... 458
Prepare A List...............................................458
Be Reasonable With Requests ...................458
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...............................458
FCA US LLC Customer Center ..................... 458
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center ............. 459
In Mexico Contact ........................................459
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands ..............459
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)........................ 459
Service Contract ..........................................459
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................. 460
MOPAR® PARTS ............................................... 460
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 460
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .........................................460
In Canada ..................................................... 460
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ........................ 461
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
INTRODUCTION
Dear Customer, congratulations on selecting
your new vehicle. Be assured that it represents
precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and
high quality.
This is a specialized utility vehicle. It can go
places and perform tasks that are not intended
for conventional passenger vehicles. It handles
and maneuvers differently from many
passenger vehicles both on-road and off-road,
so take time to become familiar with your
vehicle. If equipped, the two-wheel drive version
of this vehicle was designed for on-road use
only. It is not intended for off-road driving or use
in other severe conditions suited for a
four-wheel drive vehicle. Before you start to
drive this vehicle, read this Owner’s Manual. Be
sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls,
particularly those used for braking, steering,
transmission, and transfer case shifting. Learn
how your vehicle handles on different road
surfaces. Your driving skills will improve with
experience. When driving off-road, or working
the vehicle, don’t overload the vehicle or expect
the vehicle to overcome the natural laws of
physics. Always observe federal, state,
provincial and local laws wherever you drive. As
with other vehicles of this type, failure to
operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss
of control or a collision. Refer to the “Driving
Tips” in “Starting and Operating” for further
information.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with
the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with the operation
and maintenance of your vehicle. It is
supplemented by Warranty Information, and
customer-oriented documents located online.
Within this information, you will find a
description of the services that FCA US LLC
offers to its customers, the vehicle's warranty
coverage, and the details of the terms and
conditions for maintaining its validity. Please
take the time to read all of these publications
carefully before driving your vehicle for the first
time. Following the instructions,
recommendations, tips, and important
warnings in this manual will help assure safe
and enjoyable operation of your vehicle
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of
this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated
to specific markets or versions are not expressly
indicated in the text. Therefore, you should only
consider the information which is related to the
trim level, engine, and version that you have
purchased. Any content introduced throughout
the Owner’s Information, that may or may not be
applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with
the wording “If Equipped”. All data contained in
this publication are intended to help you use
your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US
LLC aims at a constant improvement of the
vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves
the right to make changes to the model
described for technical and/or commercial
reasons. For further information, contact an
authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that
authorized dealers know your vehicle best, have
factory-trained technicians and genuine
MOPAR® parts, and care about your
satisfaction.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
INTRODUCTION 9
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher roll-
over rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a
higher center of gravity than many passenger
vehicles. It is capable of performing better in a
wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in
an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out of
control. Because of the higher center of gravity,
if this vehicle is out of control it may roll over
while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers,
or other unsafe driving actions that can cause
loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this
vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover
of the vehicle, and severe or fatal injury. Drive
carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat
belts provided is a major cause of severe or
fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes
that the universal use of existing seat belts
could cut the highway death toll by 10,000 or
more each year and could reduce disabling inju-
ries by two million annually. In a rollover crash,
an unbelted person is significantly more likely to
die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always
buckle up.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Consult the Table of Contents to determine
which section contains the information you
desire.
Since the specification of your vehicle depends
on the items of equipment ordered, certain
descriptions and illustrations may differ from
your vehicle's equipment.
The detailed Index at the back of this Owner's
Manual contains a complete listing of all
subjects.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored labels
whose symbols indicate precautions to be
observed when using this component. Refer to
“Warning Lights and Messages” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation on the symbols used in your vehicle.
1
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10 INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS
against operating procedures that could result
in a collision, bodily injury and/or death. It also
contains CAUTIONS against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may
miss important information. Observe all Warn-
ings and Cautions.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle
could seriously affect its roadworthiness and
safety and may lead to a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE — IF EQUIPPED
Access your Owner’s Information right through
your Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touchscreen
system (if equipped).
To access the Vehicle User Guide on your
Uconnect Touchscreen: Press the Uconnect
Apps button. From there, press the Vehicle User
Guide icon on your touchscreen. No Uconnect
registration is required.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Vehicle User
Guide Touchscreen Icon
NOTE:
Vehicle User Guide features are not available
while the vehicle is moving. If you try to access
while the vehicle is in motion, the system will
display: Feature not available while the vehicle
is in motion.
Pre-Installed Features
Your User Guide — Updated in real-time
Touchscreen convenience
Maintenance schedules and information
Comprehensive icon and symbol glossary
Available when and where you need it
Customizable interface
Multilingual
Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide, you
will be able to explore your warranty information
and radio manual when and where you need
them. Your Uconnect system displays the
Vehicle User Guide on your touchscreen radio to
assist in better understanding your vehicle.
There’s no app to download, no phone to
connect and no external device needed for play-
back. Plus, it’s updated throughout the year, in
real-time, so it never goes out of date.
Features/Benefits
Pre-installed on your Uconnect touchscreen
radio
Enhanced search and browsing capability
Robust NAV application (if equipped)
Add selected topics to a fast-access Favor-
ites category
Icon and symbol glossary
Warranty information
Crucial driver information and assistance:
Operating Instructions
Warranty Information
Fluid Level Standards
Maintenance Schedules
Emergency Procedures
911 Contact and More
TIP:
When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to add it
to your Favorites, for easy access in the future.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
Key Fob
Key Fob
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system. The
ignition system consists of a key fob with
Keyless Go and a START/STOP push button igni-
tion system. The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
system consists of a key fob with a mechanical
key and Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if equipped.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be detected by the vehicle
if it is located next to a mobile phone, laptop or
other electronic device; these devices may
block the key fob’s wireless signal.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the
doors and swing gate from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) by pressing the
appropriate button on the fob. The key fob does
not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate
the system.
NOTE:
With the ignition in ON/RUN position and with
the vehicle doors open, the lock button will be
disabled, and only the unlock button will be
enabled. All RKE commands will be disabled
once the vehicle begins moving at 2 mph
(4 km/h) or above.
Backup Mode Starting
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery
can be verified by referring to the instrument
cluster, which will display directions to follow.
NOTE:
A low key fob battery condition may be indicated
by a message in the instrument cluster display,
or by the LED light on the key fob. If the LED key
fob light no longer illuminates from key fob
button pushes, then the key fob battery requires
replacement.
1 — Mechanical Key Release Button
2 — Unlock Button
3 — Lock Button
4 — Remote Start Button
5 — Panic Button
WARNING!
Push the Mechanical Key Release Button only
with the key fob facing away from your body,
especially your eyes and objects that may be
damaged, such as clothing.
CAUTION!
The electrical components inside of the key
fob may be damaged if the key fob is
subjected to strong electrical shocks. In order
to ensure complete efficiency of the
electronic devices inside of the key fob, avoid
exposing the key fob to direct sunlight.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 13
In this situation, a back up method can be used
to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side
of the key fob against the START/STOP ignition
button, and push to operate the ignition switch.
Backup Starting Method
To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate
When “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks - Driver
Door” is selected within the Uconnect settings,
the first push and release of the key fob unlock
button will unlock the driver's door only, and a
second time will unlock all the doors and swing
gate. When the key fob unlock button is pushed,
the Illuminated Entry will initiate, and the turn
signal lights will flash twice. Refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate
Push and release the lock button on the key fob
to lock all doors. The turn signals will flash, and
the horn will chirp once to acknowledge the lock
signal.
Key Fob Battery Replacement
NOTE:
When a key fob battery is low, a warning will be
indicated on the vehicle’s instrument cluster,
and the fob LED will no longer illuminate with a
button press.
The recommended replacement battery is
CR2450.
NOTE:
Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/
perchlorate .
1. Remove the back cover of the fob by
inserting a flat-blade screw driver into the
slot on the bottom of the fob. Pry until the
cover unsnaps being careful not to
damage the seal. Proceed counter-clock-
wise to pry the remaining snaps until the
battery cover can be removed.
1-3 – Back Cover Pry Points
2. Remove the depleted battery by inserting a
small flat-blade screwdriver into the battery
removal slot and sliding the battery forward
and up being careful not to damage the
electronic board underneath.
Battery Replacement
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Install the new battery into the key fob,
making sure the positive (+) side is facing
up. Slide the battery until it is seated
securely below the tabs.
4. Reassemble the back cover making sure it
is properly aligned before snapping it back
in place.
Programming Additional Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Request For Additional Key Fobs
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with
you to an authorized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut
to match the vehicle locks.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
Always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF mode.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
(Continued)
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the igni-
tion switch with the push of a button as long as
the key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has several
operating modes that are labeled and will illumi-
nate when in position. These modes are OFF,
ACC, RUN, and START.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or depleted battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side of the key fob (side
with the mechanical key) against the START/
STOP ignition button and push to operate the
ignition switch.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped.
Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking,
alarm, etc.) are available.
ACC
Engine is not started.
Some electrical devices are available.
RUN
Driving position.
All electrical devices are available.
START
The engine will start.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
NOTE:
Refer to "Starting The Engine" in "Starting And
Operating" for further information.
Vehicle On Message
When opening the driver's door when the igni-
tion is in the ON/RUN position (engine not
running), a chime will sound to remind you to
place the ignition in the OFF position. In addition
to the chime, the message will display “Ignition
Or Accessory On” in the cluster.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active
up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed in
the OFF position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature. The time for this feature is
programmable.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Before exiting a vehicle, always come to a
complete stop, then shift the automatic trans-
mission into PARK (P), apply the parking
brake, place the engine in the OFF position,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and lock
your vehicle. If equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless
ignition is in “OFF” position, remove the key
fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
Never remove the mechanical key while the
vehicle is moving, as the steering wheel will
automatically lock as soon as the key is
turned. This also applies to vehicles that
are being towed.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside
the vehicle while still maintaining
security. The system has a range of
328 ft (100 m).
The Remote Starting System also activates the
Climate Control, vented seats (if equipped) in
temperatures above 80°F (26.7°C), and the
heated seats (if equipped), and heated steering
wheel (if equipped) in temperatures below
40°F (4.4°C). Refer to “Seats” in this chapter
for further information.
NOTE:
The vehicle must be equipped with an auto-
matic transmission to be equipped with
Remote Start.
Obstructions between the vehicle and key
fob may reduce this range.
How To Use Remote Start
Push Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. Pushing the
Remote Start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push unlock button, and
place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
With remote start, the engine will only run for
15 minutes (timeout) unless the ignition key
is placed in the ON/RUN position.
The vehicle must be started with the key after
two consecutive timeouts.
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
Gear Selector in PARK (P)
Doors closed
Hood closed
Swing Gate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
System not disabled from previous remote
start event
Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
Ignition in STOP/OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
All removable doors must not be removed
Malfunction indicator light not illuminated
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Remote Start Cancel Message — If Equipped
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster if the vehicle fails to remote
start or exits remote start prematurely:
Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low
Remote Start Cancelled — Swing Gate Open
Remote Start Cancelled — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To
Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the Remote Start button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
vehicle doors will lock, the turn signals will flash
twice, and the horn will chirp twice. Then the
engine will start, and the vehicle will remain in
the Remote Start mode for a 15 minute cycle.
NOTE:
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
in 10 seconds.
The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window operation is
disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote
Start mode.
The engine can be started two consecutive
times (two 15-minute cycles) with the key
fob. However, the ignition must be placed in
the ON/RUN position before you can repeat
the start sequence for a third cycle.
To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving
The Vehicle
Push and release the Remote Start button one
time or allow the remote start cycle to complete
the entire 15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the system
will disable for two seconds after receiving a
valid Remote Start request.
To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The
Vehicle
Before the end of 15-minute cycle, push and
release the unlock button on the key fob to
unlock the doors, or unlock the vehicle using
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry via the door
handles, and disarm the vehicle security alarm
(if equipped). Then, prior to the end of the
15-minute cycle, push and release the START/
STOP ignition button.
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
Button” will display in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP ignition
button.
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
Remote Start Comfort Systems — If
Equipped
When Remote Start is activated, the Climate
Controls may activate the heated seats (if
equipped) and heated steering wheel (if
equipped) in temperatures below 40°F (4.4°C).
These features will stay on through the duration
of Remote Start or until the ignition switch is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a RF receiver to prevent unautho-
rized vehicle operation. Therefore, only key fobs
that are programmed to the vehicle can be used
to start and operate the vehicle. The system
cannot reprogram a key fob obtained from
another vehicle.
After turning the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position, the vehicle security light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that
there is a problem with the electronics. In addi-
tion, if the light begins to flash after the bulb
check, it indicates that someone attempted to
start the engine with an invalid key fob. In the
event that a valid key fob is used to start the
engine but there is an issue with the vehicle elec-
tronics, the engine will start and shut off after two
seconds.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If the vehicle security light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than ten seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics.
Replacement Keys
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is
programmed to a vehicle, it cannot be
programmed to any other vehicle.
NOTE:
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you
to an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
CAUTION!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF position.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the vehicle
doors for unauthorized entry and the ignition
switch for unauthorized operation. When the
alarm is activated, the interior switches for door
locks are disabled. The vehicle security alarm
provides both audible and visible signals. If
something triggers the alarm, the vehicle secu-
rity alarm will provide the following audible and
visible signals: the horn will pulse, the park
lamps and/or turn signals will flash, and the
vehicle security light in the instrument cluster
will flash.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security
alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the OFF position. Refer to "Starting The
Engine" in "Starting And Operating" for
further information.
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
Push lock on the interior power door lock
switch with the driver and/or passenger
door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid
key fob available in the same exterior
zone. Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry" in "Getting To Know Your
Vehicle" for further information.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle
(if equipped). Refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry" in this chapter for further infor-
mation.
Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the
OFF position.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
When the vehicle security alarm is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will not
unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to protect
your vehicle. However, you can create condi-
tions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the vehicle security
alarm will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the vehicle security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle
security alarm will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
Rearming Of The System
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is
taken to disarm it, the vehicle security alarm will
turn the horn off after 29 seconds, 5 seconds
between cycles, up to 8 cycles if the trigger
remains active and then the vehicle security
alarm will rearm itself.
DOORS
Manual Door Locks
All doors are equipped with an interior
rocker-type door lock lever. To lock a door when
leaving your vehicle, push the rocker lever
forward to the lock position and close the door.
To unlock the door, push the rocker lever rear-
ward.
Manual Door Lock
NOTE:
The mechanical flip key can be used to lock or
unlock the doors, swing gate (if equipped with a
lock), glove compartment, and console storage.
CAUTION!
Careless handling and storage of the
removable door panels may damage the
seals, causing water to leak into the vehicle’s
interior.
WARNING!
For personal security reasons and safety in
a collision, lock the vehicle doors when you
drive, as well as when you park and exit the
vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always switch off
the ignition and remove the key from the
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
ment may cause severe personal injuries
and death.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle or in a location accessible to chil-
dren. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
(Continued)
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
The power door lock switch is located on each
front door panel. Push the switch forward to
unlock the doors, and rearward to lock the
doors.
Power Door Lock Switch
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry (If
Equipped)
The Passive Entry system is a feature that
allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) and swing gate without having to push
the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
for further information.
The key fob may not be detected by the
vehicle passive entry system if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other elec-
tronic device; these devices may interfere
with the key fob’s wireless signal and prevent
the passive entry system from locking/
unlocking the vehicle.
Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated
approach (low beams, license plate lamp,
position lamps) for whichever time duration
is set between 0, 30 (default), 60 or 90
seconds. Passive Entry Unlock also initiates
two flashes of the turn signal lamps.
If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has
been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be
affected, resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will arm
the security alarm.
1 — Lock Button
2 — Unlock Button
WARNING!
For personal security reasons and safety in
a collision, lock the vehicle doors when you
drive, as well as when you park and exit the
vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always switch off
the ignition and remove the key from the
vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
ment may cause severe personal injuries
and death.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle or in a location accessible to chil-
dren. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock From The Driver Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the
front driver door handle to unlock the driver's
door automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
NOTE:
If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlock” is programmed
all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the
front driver’s door handle. To select between
“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the
front passenger door handle to unlock all doors
and the swing gate automatically.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passenger
door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Unlock
Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st
Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry
Key Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which
will function only if the ignition switch is in the
OFF position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with a
START/STOP ignition. There are three situations
that trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any passive
entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will
be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob
inside the car, the car will unlock and alert the
customer. If Passive Entry is disabled using
Uconnect System, the key protection described
in “Preventing Inadvertent Locking of Passive
Entry Key Fob in Vehicle” remains active/func-
tional.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors during a
FOBIK-Safe operation when a valid Passive
Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle. The
vehicle will not unlock the doors when any of the
following conditions are true:
A second valid passive entry key fob is
detected outside of the vehicle (within 5ft
(1.5 m) of a passive entry door handle).
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then close
the doors.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Swing Gate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fob
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger
front door handles, pushing the passive entry
lock button will lock the vehicle doors and the
swing gate.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the lock button located on the vehicle’s interior
door panel.
To Unlock/Enter The Swing Gate
The swing gate Passive Entry unlock feature is
built into the swing gate handle. With a valid
Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the
swing gate handle, grab the swing gate handle
to unlock the swing gate automatically, and pull
the swing gate to open.
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed
all doors & the swing gate will unlock when you
grab hold of the swing gate handle. To select
between “Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and
“Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” for further informa-
tion.
Swing Gate Passive Entry Lock Button
To Lock The Swing Gate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the swing gate handle, pushing the
Passive Entry lock button will lock the vehicle
doors and the swing gate.
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or
unlock the doors, using any Passive Entry
door handle. This is done to allow you to
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle without the vehicle reacting and
unlocking.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect
System, the key protection described in
"Preventing Inadvertent Locking of Passive
Entry Key Fob in Vehicle" remains active/
functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is depleted.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors
To provide a safer environment for small chil-
dren riding in the rear seats, the rear doors are
equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a
flat blade screwdriver (or mechanical key) and
rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position.
Child Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system
is engaged, the door can be opened only by
using the outside door handle even though
the inside door lock is in the unlocked posi-
tion.
After engaging or disengaging the
Child-Protection Door Lock system, always
test the door from the inside to make certain
it is in the desired position.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
(Continued)
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock lever rearward (located on the
door trim panel), roll down the window and
open the door with the outside door handle.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children.
After engaging the child lock on both rear doors,
check for effective engagement by trying to
open a door with the internal handle. Once the
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged,
it is impossible to open the doors from inside
the vehicle. Before getting out of the car, be
sure to check that there is no one left inside.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The auto door lock feature default condition is
enabled. When enabled, the door locks will lock
automatically when the vehicle's speed exceeds
15 mph (24 km/h). The auto door lock feature
can be enabled or disabled by an authorized
dealer per written request of the customer.
Please see an authorized dealer for service.
Front Door Removal
Door Removal Warning Label
NOTE:
Doors are heavy; use caution when removing
them.
Hinge pin can break if overtightened during
door reinstall (Max Torque: 7.5 ft· lb /
10 N·m). Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in
“Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
When front doors are removed, the message
“Blind Spot Alert Temporarily Unavailable”
will display in the instrument cluster display.
Power Mirrors and Power Door Locks will also
be unavailable.
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any
damage.
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the
upper and lower outside hinges (using a
#T50 Torx head driver).
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a
collision. Remember that the rear doors can
only be opened from the outside when the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with
the doors removed as you will lose the protection
they can provide. This procedure is furnished for
use during off-road operation only.
WARNING!
All occupants must wear seat belts during
off-road operation with doors removed.
Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Do not store detached doors inside of the
vehicle, as they may cause personal injury
in the event of an accident.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in
the rear cargo tray located under the rear load
floor.
Hinge Pin Screw
3. Remove the plastic wiring access door
under the instrument panel by sliding the
plastic panel along the door frame toward
the seats until the tabs are detached.
Wiring Access Door
NOTE:
Do not pry back to open, as this will break the
plastic cover.
4. Pull up on the red locking tab to unlock the
wiring harness.
Closed Wiring Harness
1 – Locking Tab
2 – Wiring Harness
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
(Continued)
5. Push and hold down the black security tab
under the wiring harness, and lift the
harness into the open position.
Open Wiring Harness
6. With the wiring harness open, pull down-
ward on the wiring connector to unplug.
Store the wiring connector in the lower door
basket.
7. Remove the check screw from the center
door check (using a #T40 Torx head driver).
Door Check (Detached)
8. With the door open, lift the door with the
help of another person, to clear the hinge
pins from their hinges and remove the door.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous
steps in the reverse order.
NOTE:
The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be
used to assist in guiding the door into place
when reinstalling.
Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models)
Door Removal Warning Label
1 – Wiring Harness
2 – Security Tab
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads with
the doors removed as you will lose the
protection they can provide. This procedure is
furnished for use during off-road operation
only.
WARNING!
All occupants must wear seat belts during
off-road operation with doors removed.
Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Doors are heavy; use caution when removing
them.
Hinge pin can break if overtightened during door
reinstall (Max Torque: 7.5 ft· lb / 10 N·m). Refer
to “Off-Road Driving Tips” in “Starting And Oper-
ating” for further information.
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any
damage.
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the
upper and lower outside hinges (using a
#T50 Torx head driver).
NOTE:
The hinge pin screws and nuts can be stowed in
the rear cargo tray located under the rear load
floor.
Hinge Pin Screw
3. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.
4. Pry open and remove the plastic wiring
access door from the bottom of the B-Pillar.
Wiring Access Door
5. Unplug the wiring connector.
NOTE:
Squeeze the tab on the base of the wiring
harness. This will unlock the connector tab,
allowing the wiring connector to be unplugged.
Wiring Connector
Do not store detached doors inside of the
vehicle, as they may cause personal injury
in the event of an accident.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
6. Remove the check screw from the center
door check (using a #T40 Torx head driver).
Door Check (Attached)
7. With the door open, lift the door with the
help of another person, to clear the hinge
pins from their hinges and remove the door.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous
steps in the reverse order.
NOTE:
The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can be
used to assist in guiding the door into place
when reinstalling.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
Manual Front Seats
Front Seat Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted forward or rearward
by using a bar located by the front of the seat
cushion, near the floor. While sitting in the seat,
lift up on the bar located under the seat cushion
and move the seat forward or rearward.
Release the bar once you have reached the
desired position. Then, using body pressure,
move forward and rearward on the seat to be
sure that the seat adjusters have latched.
Adjustment Bar Location
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Seat Height Adjustment
The driver's seat height can be raised or
lowered by using the ratcheting handle, located
on the outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on
the handle to raise the seat, push downward on
the handle to lower the seat. Several strokes
may be necessary to achieve the desired posi-
tion.
Seat Height Adjustment
Front Seatback Recline
To recline the seat, pull on the recline strap and
lean forward or backward, depending on the
direction you would like the seatback to move.
Release the strap when the desired position is
reached and the seatback will lock into place.
Recline Strap
Lumbar Support
The lumbar control knob is located on the
outboard side of the front driver seat. Rotate
the control forward to increase and rearward to
decrease the desired amount of lumbar
support.
Lumbar Control Knob
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
(Continued)
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The heated seats control buttons are located on
the center instrument panel below the touch-
screen, and are also located within the climate
or controls screen of the touchscreen.
Heated Seat Buttons
Push the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Push the heated seat button a second
time to turn the MED setting on.
Push the heated seat button a third time
to turn the LO setting on.
Push the heated seat button a fourth time
to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
The level of heat selected will stay on until
the operator changes it.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the driver’s seat can be programmed to come
on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat — Two Door
Models
Pull upward on the easy entry lever located on
the outboard side of the seat back, and slide
the entire seat forward.
Easy Entry Lever
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
To return the seat to a sitting position, fold the
seatback upright until it locks and push the seat
rearward until the track locks.
NOTE:
The front passenger seats have a track
memory, which returns the seat to its original
position.
The recline strap and easy entry lever should
not be used during the automatic returning of
the seat to its sitting position.
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat — Four Door
Models
To provide additional storage area, each rear
seat can be folded flat to allow for extended
cargo space.
NOTE:
Be sure that the front seats are fully upright
and positioned forward. This will allow the
rear seat to fold down easily.
The center head restraints must be in the
lowest position to avoid contact with the
center console when folding the seat.
To Fold Down The Rear Seat
There are two release levers located on each
upper outboard side of the rear seat. The larger
of the two release levers folds down the seat
and the head restraint simultaneously. The
smaller lever folds down the head restraint
independently for improved visibility.
To fold the seat, lift upward on the large release
lever and slowly fold down the seatback. The
head restraint will fold automatically with the
seat when this lever is pulled.
Seatback Release Lever
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats
are left folded for an extended period of time.
This is normal. By simply opening the seats to
the open position, the seat cushion will return to
its normal shape over time.
To Raise The Rear Seat
Raise the seatback and lock it into place. Then,
raise the head restraint until it locks into place.
If interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have diffi-
culty returning the seat to its proper position.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat — Two Door
Models
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be neces-
sary to reposition the front seats.
Be sure that the front seats are fully upright
and positioned forward. This will allow the
rear seat to fold down easily.
Folding The Rear Seat
1. Lift the seatback release lever and fold the
seatback forward.
Rear Seatback Release Lever
2. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.
Using The Retention Straps
1. There are two retention straps located on
the back of the rear seat and two corre-
sponding wire loops located on the back of
each B-pillar. Open the hook-and-loop
fastener on the strap and thread through
the wire loop. Fold the hook-and-loop
fastener over to keep the seat in the folded
position. This should be done on both
sides.
Rear Seat Tumble Position Retention Strap
2. To return the seat to its normal upright posi-
tion, reverse these steps.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats
and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Removing The Rear Seat
1. Push down on the release bar on each
side, and pull the seat out and away from
the lower bracket.
Release Bar Location
2. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
3. To reinstall the rear seat, just reverse these
steps.
NOTE:
Do not drive the vehicle without reattaching the
rear seat latches.
Rear Seat Armrest — If Equipped
The center part of the rear seat can also be
used as a rear armrest with cupholders. To
unfold it, grab the pull strap under the head
restraint and pull it forward.
Rear Seat Armrest
NOTE:
The cupholder liner can be removed for
cleaning.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
In a collision, you or others in your vehicle
could be injured if seats are not properly
latched to their floor attachments. Always
be sure that the seats are fully latched.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats
and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button located on the
base of the head restraint, and push downward
on the head restraint. The release button does
not need to be pushed to adjust the head
restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as it
can go then push the adjustment button and
the release button at the base of each post
while pulling the head restraint up. To reinstall
the head restraint, put the head restraint posts
into the holes and push downward. Then adjust
it to the appropriate height.
Front Head Restraint
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180
degrees to the incorrect position in an attempt
to gain additional clearance to the back of the
head.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat
until the head restraints are placed in their
proper positions in order to minimize the risk
of neck injury in the event of a crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
WARNING!
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Head Restraints — Two Door Models
The rear seat is equipped with non-adjustable,
but foldable head restraints.
To fold the outboard head restraint, pull on the
release strap located on the upper outboard
side of each rear seat.
Rear Head Restraint Folding Strap Location
Rear Head Restraints Folded
To return the head restraint to its upward posi-
tion, lift up on the head restraint until it locks
into place.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for information on child seat tether
routing.
Rear Head Restraints — Four Door Models
The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable,
but foldable, outboard head restraints, as well
as an adjustable, removable center head
restraint.
To fold the outboard head restraint, pull on the
inner release lever, located on the upper part of
the rear seat.
Rear Head Restraint Lever
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle without the rear
seat head restraints installed while passen-
gers are occupying the rear seat. In a colli-
sion, people riding in this area without the
head restraints installed are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed.
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the reinstallation instruc-
tions above prior to operating the vehicle or
occupying a seat.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
Rear Head Restraint Folded
To return the head restraint to its upward posi-
tion, lift up on the head restraint until it locks
into place.
To raise the center head restraint, lift up on the
head restraint. To lower the center head
restraint, push the adjustment button, located
at the base of the head restraint, and push
down on the head restraint.
To remove the center head restraint, push the
release button, located on the base of the head
restraint, and pull upward on the head restraint.
To install the head restraint, hold the release
button while pushing downward on the head
restraint. Refer to “Occupant Restraint
Systems” in “Safety” for information on child
seat tether routing.
NOTE:
Lower the center head restraint to avoid contact
with the center console when folding the seat
down.
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows you
to lengthen or shorten the steering column. The
tilt/telescoping lever is located on the steering
column, below the turn signal lever.
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the control
handle downward (toward the floor). To tilt the
steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To
lock the steering column in position, push the
control handle upward until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle without the rear
seat head restraints installed while passen-
gers are occupying the rear seat. In a colli-
sion, people riding in this area without the
head restraints installed are more likely to
be seriously injured or killed.
A loose head restraint thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could cause serious
injury or death to occupants of the vehicle.
Always securely stow removed head
restraints in a location outside the occu-
pant compartment.
ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect the
occupants. Follow the reinstallation instruc-
tions above prior to operating the vehicle or
occupying a seat.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until
the operator turns it off. The heated steering
wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located on the center of the instrument panel
below the touchscreen and within the climate or
controls screen of the touchscreen.
Push the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
Push the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote start,
the heated steering wheel can be programmed
to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right for various drivers. The mirror should
be adjusted to center on the view through the
rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of
the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward the wind-
shield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column while
driving or driving with the steering column
unlocked, could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this
warning may result in serious injury or death.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-
ical conditions must exercise care when
using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
wheel heater to overheat.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left,
and right for various drivers. The mirror should
be adjusted to center on the view through the
rear window.
The mirror automatically adjusts to headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming feature is disabled
when the vehicle is in REVERSE to improve the
driver’s view.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
The Automatic Dimming feature can be turned
on or off through the touchscreen. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Outside Mirrors
To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside
mirror(s) to center on the adjacent lane of traffic
with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
Outside Rearview Mirror
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The power mirror controls are located on the
door panel next to the door handle.
Power Mirror Switch
The power mirror controls consist of mirror
select buttons and a four-way mirror control
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the
passenger side convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than they really are. Relying
too much on your passenger side mirror could
cause you to collide with another vehicle or
other object. Use your inside mirror when
judging the size or distance of a vehicle seen
in the passenger side mirror.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
switch. To adjust a mirror, push either the L
(left) or R (right) button to select the mirror that
you want to adjust.
Using the mirror control switch, push any of the
four arrows for the direction that you want the
mirror to move.
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Climate
Controls” in this chapter for further information.
Vanity Mirrors
Vanity mirrors are located on the sun visors. To
use the mirrors, rotate the sun visor down and
swing the mirror cover upward.
Vanity Mirror
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left side
of the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights, auto-
matic headlights (if equipped), instrument
panel lights, interior lights, and fog lights (if
equipped).
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the first
detent for parking light and instrument panel light
operation. Rotate the headlight switch to the
second detent for headlight, parking light, and
instrument panel light operation.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) are in a
dedicated position below the headlight
assembly. DRLs are active when the Low Beams
are not and when the vehicle is shifted into any
position other than PARK (P) (auto transmis-
sion), or when the vehicle begins to move
(manual transmission).
NOTE:
The Daytime Running Lights, on the same side
of the vehicle as the active turn signal, will turn
off automatically when a turn signal is in opera-
tion and turn on again when the turn signal is
not operating.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the instru-
ment panel to switch the headlights to high
beams. The lever will return to the centered
position. To return the headlights to low beam,
pull the lever toward the steering wheel, or push
the lever toward the instrument panel.
Multifunction Lever
Automatic High Beam — If Equipped
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at
night by automating high beam control through
the use of a digital camera mounted on the
vehicle’s header. This camera detects vehicle
specific light and automatically switches from
high beams to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off by selecting “ON”
under “Auto High Beam” within your
Uconnect settings, as well as turning the
headlight switch to the AUTO position and
placing the multifunction lever in the high
beam position. Refer to “Uconnect Settings”
in “Multimedia” for further information.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer
to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other
obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improp-
erly.
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your head-
lights by lightly pulling the multifunction lever
toward you. This will cause the high beam head-
lights to turn on, and remain on, until the lever
is released.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To
turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise to the last detent for automatic head-
light operation. When the system is on, the
headlight time delay feature is also on. This
means the headlights will stay on for up to 90
seconds after you place the ignition into the OFF
position. To turn the automatic system off,
move the headlight switch out of the AUTO posi-
tion.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or low beam headlights and push
in the center of the headlight switch control
knob. Pushing the headlight switch control knob
a second time will turn the front fog lights off.
Front Fog Light Switch
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation of the
front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash, or
there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defec-
tive outside light bulb. If an indicator fails to
light when the lever is moved, it would suggest
that the indicator bulb is defective.
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal (right or left) will flash three times then
automatically turn off.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights
are left on after the ignition is placed in the OFF
position, a chime will sound when the driver’s
door is opened.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy lights will turn on when the front
doors are opened, by rotating the dimmer
controls on the headlight switch fully upward,
or, if equipped, when the unlock button is
pushed on the key fob.
The interior courtesy lights are located in the
center of the vehicle’s sport bar, and consist of
one large center light and four smaller reading
lights. Each reading light can be turned on by
pushing the lens. Pushing the lens a second
time will turn the light off.
Dome Lights
When a door is open and the interior lights are
on, rotating the dimmer control to the extreme
bottom position will cause all the interior lights
to turn off. This is also known as “Party” mode
because it allows the doors to stay open for
extended periods of time without discharging
the vehicle’s battery.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Dimmer Controls
The dimmer controls are part of the headlight
switch and are located on the left side of the
instrument panel.
Dimmer Controls
With the parking lights or headlights on, rotating
the right dimmer control upward will increase
the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
Rotating the left dimmer control will adjust the
interior and ambient light levels.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is
located on the right side of the steering column.
The front wipers are operated by rotating a
switch, located at the end of the lever.
Refer to “Rear Window Wiper/Washer” in this
section for further information on using the rear
window wiper/washer.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever (If Equipped With
Rear Wipers)
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the first
detent past the intermittent settings for
low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end of the
lever upward to the second detent past the inter-
mittent settings for high-speed wiper operation.
Front Wiper Control
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper
switch and allow the wipers to return to the
park position before turning off the engine. If
the wiper switch is left on and the wipers
freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper
motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather condi-
tions make a single wiping cycle, with a variable
pause between cycles, desirable. Rotate the
end of the lever to the first detent position for
one of four intermittent settings. The delay cycle
can be set anywhere between 1 to 18 seconds.
Front Wiper Control
NOTE:
The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled
while in the delay range, the wiper will start and
continue to operate for two or three wipe cycles
after the lever is released. Then, the intermit-
tent interval previously selected will resume.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the
wipers will operate for two or three wipe cycles.
Then, the wipers will turn off.
Mist Feature
Push upward on the wiper lever to activate a
single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held
up, the wipers will continue to operate.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.
Mist Control
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the
windshield could lead to a collision. You might
not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To
avoid sudden icing of the windshield during
freezing weather, warm the windshield with
the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped
A rotary switch on the center portion of the wind-
shield wiper/washer lever controls the opera-
tion of the rear wiper/washer function.
Rear Wiper/Washer Control
Rotate the switch upward to the first
detent position for intermittent opera-
tion and to the second detent for
continuous rear wiper operation.
Push the wiper lever toward the
instrument panel to activate the rear
washer. The washer pump and wiper
will continue to operate as long as the
lever is held.
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is
placed in the OFF position, the wiper will auto-
matically return to the “park” position. When the
vehicle is restarted, the wiper will resume func-
tion at whichever position the switch is set at.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control System allows you to regu-
late the temperature, air flow, and direction of
air circulating throughout the vehicle. The
controls are located on the touchscreen (if
equipped) and on the instrument panel below
the radio.
Manual Climate Control Overview
Manual Climate Controls
Manual Climate Controls – Heater Only
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
A/C Button — If Equipped
Push the A/C button to engage the Air Conditioning (A/C). The A/C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
MAX A/C Setting — If Equipped
Set the temperature control knob to the MAX A/C setting to change the current setting to the coldest output of air. Moving
the temperature control knob away from the MAX A/C setting causes the MAX A/C operation to exit.
Recirculation Button
Push the recirculation button on the faceplate to change the system between recirculation mode and outside air mode. The
Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator (if equipped) illuminate when the Recirculation button is pressed.
Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recirculation
can be used in all modes except for Defrost. Recirculation may be unavailable if conditions exist that could create fogging
on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing the mode control selection.
Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of
this mode is not recommended.
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the Rear Defrost Control button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if
equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 15 minutes.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Heater Only
Temperature Control
Temperature Control regulates the temperature of the air forced through the climate system. The temperature increases as
you turn the temperature control knob clockwise. The temperature decreases as you turn the temperature control knob
counterclockwise.
Heater Only
Turning the temperature control knob clockwise increases the heating temperature and turning the temperature control
knob counterclockwise decreases the heating temperature.
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available.
The blower speeds increase as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower
speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Mode Control
Turn the mode control knob to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from
the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
Panel Mode Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
Icon Description
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the
floor outlets.
Floor Mode Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Front Defrost Setting
Turn the Mode Control knob to the Front Defrost mode setting. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist
outlets. When the Defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature
settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging.
Climate Control OFF
To turn the Climate Controls off, turn the blower control knob to the OFF (O) position.
Icon Description
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Automatic Climate Controls Overview
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button on the touchscreen to change the current setting to the coldest output of air. The
MAX A/C indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again will cause the MAX A/C operation to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate to change the current setting. The A/
C indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation can be used when outside conditions, such as smoke, odors, dust, or high
humidity are present. Recirculation can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen
greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected
manually without disturbing the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air
stuffy and window fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Faceplate AUTO Button
Touchscreen AUTO
Button
AUTO Button
Set your desired temperature and press AUTO. AUTO will achieve and maintain your desired temperature by automatically
adjusting the blower speed and air distribution. AUTO mode is highly recommended for efficiency. You can press and
release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to turn AUTO on. The AUTO indicator
illuminates when AUTO is on. Toggling this function will cause the system to switch between manual mode and automatic
mode.
Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the Front Defrost button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change
the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from
the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use
Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When
toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system returns to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the Rear Defrost button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to turn on
the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost indicator illuminates when the
rear window defroster is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after 15 minutes.
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or
touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer
temperature settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards
the blue arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
Icon Description
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator illuminates when SYNC is
on. SYNC synchronizes the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature setting. Changing the passenger’s
temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Faceplate Blower Knob
Touchscreen Blower
Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control regulates the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds available.
The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touchscreen.
Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The
blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower
setting. The blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Select one of the Mode buttons on the touchscreen or press the Mode button on the faceplate to adjust the airflow
distribution. The airflow distribution can be adjusted so air comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost
outlets, and demist outlets.
The Mode settings are as follows:
Icon Description
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Panel Mode Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow of
air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate airflow
direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from these
outlets.
Bi-Level Mode Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from the
floor outlets.
Floor Mode Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister outlets.
Mix Mode Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield.
Icon Description
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
Climate Control Functions
A/C (Air Conditioning)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the
air conditioning system. When the air condi-
tioning system is turned on, cool dehumidified
air will flow through the outlets into the cabin.
For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning and manu-
ally adjust the blower and airflow mode settings.
Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level, or
Floor modes.
NOTE:
For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is
in Mix, Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be
turned off, but the A/C system shall remain
active to prevent fogging of the windows.
If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
side glass, select Defrost mode, and increase
blower speed if needed.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the
A/C condenser (located in front of the radi-
ator), for an accumulation of dirt or insects.
Clean with a gentle water spray from the front
of the radiator and through the condenser.
MAX A/C
MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling
performance.
Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C
and the prior settings. The button illuminates
when MAX A/C is on.
In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position
can be adjusted to desired user settings.
Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C
operation to switch to the selected setting and
MAX A/C to exit.
Faceplate OFF Button
Touchscreen OFF
Button
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release the OFF button on the touchscreen, or push the OFF button on the faceplate to turn the Climate Control
ON/OFF.
Icon Description
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The Recircu-
lation feature may be unavailable (button on
the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions exist
that could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield.
On systems with Manual Climate Controls (if
equipped), the Recirculation mode is not
allowed in Defrost mode to improve window
clearing operation. Recirculation is disabled
automatically if this mode is selected.
Attempting to use Recirculation while in this
mode causes the LED in the control button to
blink and then turns off.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
the AUTO button on the touchscreen on the
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature that you would
like the system to maintain by adjusting the
driver and passenger temperature control
buttons. Once the desired temperature is
displayed, the system will achieve and auto-
matically maintain that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in US or
Metric units by selecting the US/Metric
customer-programmable feature. Refer to
the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for
further information.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The blower will increase in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system
is being used in the manual mode.
Operating Tips
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and
defroster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and the
proper amount, type, and concentration of
coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation
mode during Winter months is not recom-
mended, because it may cause window fogging.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
(Continued)
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for about
five minutes, in fresh air with the blower setting
on high. This will ensure adequate system lubri-
cation to minimize the possibility of compressor
damage when the system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to
have it replaced when needed.
Operating Tips Chart
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WEATHER CONTROL SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is
Very Hot
Set the mode control to
, on, and blower on
high. Roll down the
windows for a minute to
flush out the hot air.
Adjust the controls as
needed to achieve
comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn on and set the
mode control to the
position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in position.
Cool & Humid
Conditions
Set the mode control to
and turn on to
keep windows clear.
Cold Weather Set the mode control to
the position. If
windshield fogging starts
to occur, move the
control to the
position.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED
The power window switches are located on the
instrument panel below the climate controls.
Push the switch downward to open the window
and upward to close the window.
The top left switch controls the left front window
and the top right switch controls the right front
window.
Power Window Switches
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active
for up to 10 minutes after ignition is placed in
the OFF position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature.
Four-Door Models
The lower left switch controls the left rear
passenger window, and the lower right switch
controls the right rear passenger window.
NOTE:
There are window switches located on the rear
of the center console for the rear passenger
windows in the four-door model.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and the
passenger door power window switches have
an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch
down, for a short period of time, and release
and the window will go down automatically.
To partially open the window, push the window
switch down briefly and release it when you
want the window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the
switch briefly.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle,
and do not let children play with power
windows. Do not leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the
windows while operating the power window
switches. Such entrapment may result in
serious injury or death.
1 — Driver Side Front Window Switch
2 — Passenger Side Front Window Switch
3 — Window Lockout Switch
4 — Passenger Side Rear Window Switch
5 — Driver Side Rear Window Switch
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. Be sure to clear all
objects from the window before closing.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the percep-
tion of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type
sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind
buffeting with the windows down in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized by adjusting
the window opening.
DUAL TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS — IF
EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top, the
soft top system will be provided in a separate
box located in the rear of the vehicle for ship-
ping purposes only. The soft top and the hard
top are to be used independently. Your vehicle
warranty will not cover damage resulting from
both tops being installed at the same time.
For your convenience, a tool kit is provided with
your vehicle located in the center console. This
kit includes the necessary tools required for the
operations described in the following sections.
All pieces fit into the ratchet for easy use.
Provided Tools
Removing The Soft Top — Four Door Models
1. Fully lower the soft top. Refer to “Soft Top
— Four Door Models” in this section.
2. Make sure the lift assist mechanism on
both the left and right sides are in the “lock”
position, and an audible “click” is heard
when pushing down on the #1 bow from
each of the lift assist mechanisms before
removing.
Lock Position
1 — #50 Torx Head Driver
2 — #40 Torx Head Driver
3 — 15mm Socket
4 — Ratchet
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in
damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver
and ratchet, unscrew the two Torx head
screws on each lift assist mechanism, then
lift the mechanism up and away from the
vehicle.
Lift Assist Mechanism
4. Pull the release lever on top of the rail rear-
ward to release the side link from the track.
Release Lever Location
Pull To Release Top From Track
5. Repeat on the opposite side.
6. Utilizing two people, lift the soft top up and
away from the vehicle, careful to avoid the
vehicle’s sport bar, trim, and tire carrier.
Store the soft top in a safe, clean, and dry
location.
Utilize Two People To Remove Soft Top
1 — Lock Position
2 — Torx Head Screw
3 — Torx Head Screw
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
7. Using the provided #50 Torx head driver
and ratchet, unscrew the Torx screw on both
rear corners of the vehicle, removing the
retainers.
Remove Rear Retainers
Installing The Soft Top — Four Door Models
NOTE:
The following procedures are for first time set
up only. For future soft top procedures, refer to
“Soft Top” in this section.
1. Locate and remove the following items
prior to hard top removal:
Right and left side door rails
Eight door frame attachment Torx head
screws
Right and left side quarter windows
Rear window
Swing gate bar
2. Remove the hard top. Refer to “Rear Hard
Top Removal” in this section.
3. Install the door rails, starting with the front,
followed by the rear on each side. Refer to
“Door Frame Installation — Four Door
Models” in this section for instructions and
appropriate torque specifications for the
door rail Torx screws.
4. Install the rear retainers on each side of the
rear of the vehicle using the provided
#50 Torx head driver and ratchet. Refer to
the table below for recommended torque
specifications.
Installing Rear Retainers
CAUTION!
Do not over tighten Torx screws. Damage to
the retainers will occur.
Torque
Specification
For Torx
Screw
Maximum Minimum
119.5 in-lbs 150.5 in-lbs 106.2 in-lbs
13.5 N·m 17.0 N·m 12.0 N·m
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. Making sure the lift assist mechanism is in
the “lock” position, lift the soft top into the
rear of the vehicle with the side links
pointing toward the front. Lower the lift
assist mechanisms onto its retainers on
both sides (on the inside of the sport bar).
Lock Position
Soft Top In Place
6. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver
and ratchet, tighten the Torx screws by
turning them clockwise. Secure them until
they are snug (refer to the table below for
recommended torque specifications), being
careful not to cross-thread the screws or
overtighten. Repeat on the opposite side.
Lift Assist Mechanism In Place
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in
damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
1 — Lock Position
2 — Torx Head Screw
3 — Torx Head Screw
Torque
Specification
For Torx
Screws
Maximum Minimum
119.5 in-lbs 150.5 in-lbs 106.2 in-lbs
13.5 N·m 17.0 N·m 12.0 N·m
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip
the screws if they are overtightened.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 65
(Continued)
7. While pulling the release lever on the top of
the rail rearward, place the side link into the
guide track on the top of the rail then
release the lever.
Step Seven
8. Unsnap and remove the black boot cover. This
cover should be discarded. It was intended as
a protective cover for shipping only.
NOTE:
A visual instruction sheet is included with the
vehicle.
9. Raise the soft top. Refer to “Raising The
Soft Top” in this section.
NOTE:
Be sure the wire harness in the left rear corner
is not tangled in the soft top bows before you lift
the top.
FREEDOM TOP THREE-PIECE MODULAR
HARD TOP — IF EQUIPPED
Front Panel(s) Removal
NOTE:
The left side panel must be removed before
removing the right side panel.
1. Fold down the sun visor against the wind-
shield.
CAUTION!
The hard top is not designed to carry any
additional loads, such as after-market roof
racks, spare tires, building materials,
hunting or camping supplies, etc. For
optional Mopar accessory roof racks, refer
to the Roof Luggage Rack portion of this
Owner’s Manual for additional information.
Do not move your vehicle until the top has
been either fully attached to the front
header, sport bar, and body side or fully
removed.
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
interior water damage, stains or mildew:
It is recommended that the top be free of
water prior to panel removal. Removing the
top, opening a door or lowering a window
while the top is wet may allow water to drip
into the vehicle’s interior.
The hard top assembly must be positioned
properly to ensure sealing. Improper instal-
lation can cause water to leak into the
vehicle’s interior.
Careless handling and storage of the
removable roof panels may damage the
seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle’s interior.
The front panel(s) must be positioned prop-
erly to ensure sealing. Improper installation
can cause water to leak into the vehicle’s
interior.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Turn the three L-shaped locks on the left
side panel (one at the front, the rear, and
outside), unlocking them from the roof.
Roof Panel Lock Locations - Left Panel Shown
3. Unlatch the left side header panel latch
located at the top of the windshield.
Header Panel Latch Locations
4. Remove the left side panel.
5. Repeat the steps above to remove the right
side panel.
Freedom Top Storage Bag
Vehicles equipped with a Freedom Top Modular
Hard Top, come with a Freedom Top storage
bag that allows you to store your Freedom Top
panels. The storage bag contains two compart-
ments and fits behind the rear seat.
Lay the bag for the Freedom Top panels down
so the loops and hooks are facing upward.
Unzip the bag and fold back the outer flap.
NOTE:
Ensure the front Freedom Top panel latch is
closed prior to inserting the panel into the
Freedom Top bag.
1. Insert the left side Freedom Top panel into
the bag with the latches facing upward.
Left Panel — Latches Facing Upward
1 — Header Panel Latches
2 — Unlatched Position
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 67
2. Unfold the black panel divider (ensure the
divider is laying flat).
Fold Divider Over Left Panel
3. Insert the right side Freedom Top panel into
the bag with the latches facing downward.
Right Panel — Latches Facing Downward
NOTE:
Ensure the front Freedom Top panel latch is
closed prior to inserting the panel into the bag.
4. Unfold the outer flap and zip the Freedom
Top bag closed.
Storage Bag Closed
5. Lift the Freedom Top bag into the vehicle
with the hooks and straps facing the back of
the rear seat. Attach the clip at the bottom
of the bag to the child restraint anchorage,
located at the base of the rear seat.
6. Wrap the upper strap around the rear head
restraints and loop the strap through the
buckle. Pull on the strap to tighten the
Freedom Top bag securely against the rear
seat.
Front Panel(s) Installation
1. Set the right side panel on the windshield
frame with the locating pin in the front
receiver mounting hole followed by the left
side panel, making sure there is no over-
hang. Also, make sure that the panels are
sitting flush with the body.
2. Reinstall the panel(s) using the same steps
for removal in reverse order.
NOTE:
To prevent water leaks, the seals and Freedom
Top Panels should be clear of any dust and
debris prior to re-installation.
Rear Hard Top Removal
1. Remove both front panels. Refer to “Front
Panel(s) Removal” in this section.
2. Open both doors.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Using the provided #50 Torx head driver
and ratchet, remove the two Torx head
screws that secure the hard top at the
B-Pillar (near the top of the front doors).
Step Three
4. Remove the six Torx head screws that
secure the hard top to the vehicle (along the
interior bodyside — three screws on each
side) using the #50 Torx head driver.
Step Four
5. Open the swing gate all the way to ensure
clearance of the rear window glass. Lift the
rear window glass.
Step Five
6. Locate the wire harness and washer hose
on the left rear inside corner of the vehicle.
Wire Harness
7. Release the locking tab by pushing it down-
ward.
Push Locking Tab Downward
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 69
8. To remove the wiring harness, push the tab
inward while pulling downward to discon-
nect.
Push Tab Inward
Pull Wiring Harness To Separate
9. To remove the washer hose, push the
release button on hose connector, and pull
downward.
Release Button On Hose
10. Secure the wire harness to the body side by
plugging it into the receptacle and reen-
gaging the locking tab.
Securing The Wire Harness
11. Secure the washer hose by snapping it into
the top of the body side receptacle.
Securing The Washer Hose
Secured Wire Harness And Washer Hose
12. Lower the rear window, and close the swing
gate.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
13. Remove the hard top from the vehicle.
Place the hard top on a soft surface to
prevent damage.
Rear Hard Top Installation
NOTE:
If the door frames are installed from soft top
usage, they must be removed prior to installa-
tion of the hard top. Refer to “Door Frame” in
this section for installation procedures.
1. Inspect the hard top seals for damage and
replace if necessary.
2. Install the hard top using the same steps for
removal in reverse order.
Make sure that the hard top is sitting flush
with the body at the sides and check to en-
sure that there is a uniform gap between
the lift glass and hard top.
NOTE:
The Torx fasteners that attach the hard top to
the body should be torqued as follows using the
provided #50 Torx head driver and ratchet:
Hard top to B-Pillar: 119 in-lb +/- 23 in-lb
(13.5 N·m +/- 2.7 N·m)
Hard top to J-rail: 154 in-lb +/- 30 in-lb
(17.5 N·m +/- 3.5 N·m)
DOOR FRAME
CAUTION!
The removal of the Freedom Top requires four
adults located on each corner. Failure to
follow this caution could damage the
Freedom Top.
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads
with the door frame(s) removed as you will
lose the protection that they can provide.
This procedure is furnished for use during
off-road operation only.
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads
with the doors removed as you will lose the
protection that they can provide. This
procedure is furnished for use during
off-road operation only.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
interior water damage, stains or mildew:
Opening a door or lowering a window while
the top is wet may allow water to drip into
the vehicle's interior.
Careless handling and storage of the
removable door frame(s) may damage the
seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle's interior.
The door frame(s) must be positioned prop-
erly to ensure sealing. Improper installation
can cause water to leak into the vehicle's
interior.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 71
Door Frame Removal
NOTE:
In four door models, the rear door frames must
be removed first, followed by the front door
frames.
1. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver
and ratchet, loosen the Torx screws
located on the underside of each door
frame (two per door).
Door Frame Screw Locations
2. Once all the way loosened, remove the
screws by pulling downward.
NOTE:
Screws will not fall out once completely loose,
as they are held in place by an internal mecha-
nism.
Remove Screws From Below Frame
3. Lift the frame upward, removing it from the
vehicle.
Step Three
4. Store screws in a secure location.
5. Repeat procedure on the front door frame
(four door models).
Door Frame Installation Four Door Models —
If Equipped
1. Install the front door rail first.
2. Carefully place the front door rail in the
rubber seal at the top of the windshield, and
line up the holes for the Torx head screws
(two for each door).
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads
with the door frame(s) removed as you will
lose the protection that they can provide.
This procedure is furnished for use during
off-road operation only.
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads
with the doors removed as you will lose the
protection that they can provide. This
procedure is furnished for use during
off-road operation only.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Swing the frame bracket around the side of
the rail, and insert the screws from under-
neath. Tighten with #40 Torx head driver
until they are snug, being careful not to
cross-thread the screws or overtighten.
Refer to the table below for the appropriate
torque specifications for the door rail
screws.
Step Three
4. Set the rear door frame pin into the hole on
top of the body side, just behind the rear
door opening.
Step Four
5. Carefully position the top of the door frame
onto the rear of the front door rail, making
sure rubber seals lay flat. Ensure the seals
are installed correctly to avoid water leaks.
Position Of Frame Above Door
Torque
Specification
For Torx
Screws
Maximum Minimum
8.8 in-lbs 11.0 in-lbs 6.6 in-lbs
12 N·m 15 N·m 9 N·m
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip
the screws if they are overtightened.
1 — Front Door Rail
2 — Rear Door Frame
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 73
(Continued)
6. Swing the frame bracket around the side of
the rail, and insert the screws from under-
neath. Tighten with #40 Torx head driver
until they are snug, being careful not to
cross-thread the screws or overtighten.
Refer to the table above for the appropriate
torque specifications for the door rail
screws.
Step Six
Door Frame Installation Two Door Models —
If Equipped
1. Carefully place the front door rail in the
rubber seal at the top of the windshield,
and line up the holes for the Torx head
screws (two for each door).
2. Swing the frame bracket around the side of
the rail, and insert the screws from under-
neath. Tighten with #40 Torx head driver
until they are snug, being careful not to
cross-thread the screws or overtighten.
Refer to the table below for the appropriate
torque specifications for the door rail
screws.
Step Two
SOFT TOP TWO DOOR MODELS — IF
EQUIPPED
Torque
Specification
For Torx
Screws
Maximum Minimum
8.8 in-lbs 11.0 in-lbs 6.6 in-lbs
12 N·m 15 N·m 9 N·m
CAUTION!
Do not overtighten the screws. You can strip
the screws if they are overtightened.
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the rear
window up/removed unless the quarter
windows are also removed. Dangerous
exhaust gases could enter the vehicle
causing harm to the driver and passengers.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or
the top has been folded down for a period of
time, the top will appear to have shrunk when
you raise it, making it difficult to put up. This is
caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl or
acrylic materials of the fabric top.
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily
on the top fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its
original size and the top can then be installed. If
the temperature is 41°F (5°C) or below, do not
attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or
side curtains.
The fabric quarter windows and fabric top
are designed only for protection against the
elements. Do not rely on them to contain
occupants within the vehicle or to protect
against injury during an accident.
Remember, always wear seat belts.
Make sure hands and fingers are clear of
all pinch points when installing and
removing the soft tops. The lift assist mech-
anism and side bows may cause serious
injury if fingers or hands get caught in
between.
CAUTION!
The soft top is not designed to carry any
additional loads such as roof racks, spare tires,
building, hunting, or camping supplies, and/or
luggage, etc. Also, it was not designed as a
structural member of the vehicle and, thus,
cannot properly carry any additional loads
other than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not run a fabric top through an auto-
matic car wash. Window scratches and wax
build up may result.
Do not lower the top when the temperature
is below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top
may result.
Do not move your vehicle until the top has
been either fully attached to the windshield
frame, or fully lowered.
Do not lower the top with the windows
installed. Window and top damage may occur.
Refer to “Appearance Care For Fabric Top
Models” in “Bodywork” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for further information. It
contains important information on cleaning
and caring for your vehicle's fabric top.
Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to
pry or force any of the clamps, clips, or
retainers securing the soft top. Do not force
or pry the soft top framework when opening
or closing. Damage to the top may result.
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
interior water damage, stains or mildew on
the top material:
It is recommended that the top be free of
water prior to opening it. Operating the top,
opening a door or lowering a window while
the top is wet may allow water to drip into
the vehicle's interior.
Careless handling and storage of the soft
top may damage the seals, causing water
to leak into the vehicle's interior.
The soft top must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can
cause water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 75
Lowering The Soft Top
Side View Top And Components
1 — #1 Bow 6 — #6 Bow
2 — #2 Bow 7 — Rear Quarter Window
3 — #3 Bow 8 — Lower Window Retainer
4 — #4 Bow 9 — Front Window Retainer
5 — #5 Bow
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Rear View Top And Components
NOTE:
The rear window and rear quarter windows must be removed before lowering the soft top to prevent damage to the top. Clean the side and rear windows
before removal to assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft top. If the plastic retainers are difficult to operate due to road dust, etc.,
clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush. Cleaning products are available through an authorized dealer.
1 — Rear Window Retainer Attachment Points
2 — Quarter Window Pillars
3 — Swing Gate Bar Retainers
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 77
Remove The Rear Window:
1. With the swing gate open, remove the rear
window’s plastic retainers from the lower
right and left corners.
Step One
2. Grasp the swing gate bar, rotate it outward
and upward releasing it from both the right
and left retainers. Store in a safe location.
Step Two (Left Side Shown)
3. While holding the window in place, slide the
swing gate bar to the left separating it from
the rear window. Store windows in soft top
window bag, or a safe location.
Step Three
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Remove the plastic retainers from both
quarter window pillars.
Step Four
5. While keeping the rear window level, slide to
the left until it is completely separate from
its retainer. Do not pull downward while
removing the rear window. Damage to the
retainer could result.
Step Five
Remove The Right And Left Quarter Windows:
1. Through the rear opening, push the bottom
corner outward and release tab from the
bottom of the window pillar.
Step One
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 79
2. Undo the hook-and-loop fastener located at
the upper front corner of each quarter
window.
Hook-And-Loop Fastener Location
3. Starting at the rear of the vehicle, remove
plastic retainer from along the bottom of the
window moving toward the front of the
vehicle.
Step Three
4. Remove plastic retainer from bottom to top
of the window.
Step Four
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
5. While keeping the window level, slide rear-
ward until it is completely separate from its
retainer. Do not pull downward while
removing the window. Damage to the
retainer could result.
Step Five
6. Store in soft window bag or a safe location.
NOTE:
Refer to “Soft Top Window Storage Bag” in this
section for information on the use of the storage
bag.
Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider® Position
1. After removing the rear window and
quarter panel windows, move to the front
of the vehicle.
2. Fold both sun visors forward against the
windshield.
3. Release the header latches from the
crossbar by pulling the handle downward.
Make sure the hook is disengaged from its
receiver.
Step Three
4. From both the left and right sides, lift up on
the #1 Bow of the soft top to start the oper-
ation.
Step Four
5. Move to the side of the vehicle and use the
side link to fold the soft top rearward into
the Sunrider® position.
Step Five
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 81
NOTE:
If leaving the soft top in the Sunrider® position,
secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop
fasteners provided in the center console.
Secured Top When In Sunrider® Position
Lowering The Soft Top Into Fully Lowered Posi-
tion
1. From the Sunrider® position, remove
straps if previously secured and move to
the rear of the vehicle.
2. Locate the Sunrider® latch beneath the #6
Bow of the soft top on the left side.
Sunrider® Latch Beneath #6 Bow
3. Pull the latch downward to release the top,
and allow the soft top to slide rearward freely
in the guide tracks to the stowed position.
Step Three
4. While pushing downward slightly on the
folded soft top, slide the lock lever on the
left and right side lift assist mechanisms to
the “lock” position.
Step Four
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in
damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Lock Position
5. Once the lock lever is in the “lock” position,
push downward on each side of the folded
soft top to ensure it is secure. An audible
“click” may be heard.
NOTE:
Secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop
fasteners provided in the center console.
Secured Top When In Fully Lowered Position
Soft Top Window Storage Bag
To safely store the soft top rear window, and
rear quarter windows, proceed as follows:
NOTE:
The swing gate bar, once removed from the rear
window, does not store in the soft window
storage bag.
1. With the bag opened completely, fold both
fabric dividers downward and lay the first
quarter window all the way to the right side
with the inside of the window facing down-
ward and the window pillar to the outside.
NOTE:
The quarter windows are marked “1” and “2” on
the inside of the window pillar.
Window Pillar Number Location
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 83
Step One
2. Fold the first divider upward, covering the
first quarter window.
Step Two
3. Lay the second quarter window on top of the
first divider all the way to the left side with
the inside of the window facing downward
and the window pillar to the outside.
Step Three
4. Fold the second divider upward, covering
the second quarter window.
Step Four
5. Lay the rear window on top of the second
divider.
Step Five
1 — Quarter Window Facing Downward
2 — Both Dividers Folded Down
1 — Quarter Window Facing Downward
2 — Second Divider Folded Down
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. Close the storage bag and store in a safe
location.
Step Six
Raising The Soft Top
Raising The Soft Top From The Fully Lowered
Position
1. From the fully lowered position, remove
straps if previously secured.
2. While pushing down on the rear of the top,
slide the lock lever on the left and right side lift
assist mechanisms to the “unlock” position.
Push Down While Unlocking
Unlocked Position
3. Push up and forward from the #5 Bow along
the guide track until it locks into the
Sunrider® position with an audible “click”.
Step Three
4. Gently pull rearward on the #6 Bow to
ensure the top is locked in the Sunrider®
position.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in
damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 85
5. Using the side link, lift and push the soft top
toward the front of the vehicle guiding the
top into the closed position.
Side Link Location
Lower Top Into Closed Position
6. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on
the header latch downward to engage the
hook into its receiver. Repeat on the other
side.
Step Six
7. Pull the handle back upward while
squeezing the latch plate, locking the latch
into place.
Step Seven
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Install The Right And Left Quarter Windows
1. From the rear of the vehicle, guide the top
of the window into the retainer and slide
forward while keeping the window level.
Repeat on the other side.
Step One
2. Place the top of the quarter window pillar
into the top cover, and insert the bottom tab
into the clip.
Step Two
Step Two
3. Engage the retainers on the front of the
windows, ensuring they are fully engaged,
followed by the retainers along the bottom
of the windows.
Fully Engage Quarter Window Retainers
CAUTION!
Failure to follow all Quarter Window Install
steps could result in damage to the Soft Top
or vehicle.
1 — Retainer At Front Of Quarter Window
2 — Retainer At Bottom Of Quarter Window
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 87
NOTE:
It is critical that the retainers are fully engaged
before the vehicle resumes motion.
4. Tuck Flap 1 between Flap 2 and Flap 3 on
the Soft Top Cover.
Flaps On Soft Top Cover
5. Secure the hook-and-loop fastener at the
upper front corner of each quarter window
by pressing firmly.
Firmly Secure Hook-And-Loop Fastener
Install The Rear Window
1. Guide the rear window into the retainer
from left to right while keeping the window
level.
Step One
1 — Flap 1
2 — Flap 2
3 — Flap 3
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
2. Insert the swing gate bar into the retainers
at the bottom of the window from left to the
right.
Step Two
3. Rotate the swing gate bar into the left and
right side retainers.
Step Three
4. Line up the rear window to the right side
quarter window first, and engage the plastic
retainers.
5. Repeat with the left side quarter window.
Step Five
6. Engage the rear window retainers in the
lower right and left corners.
Step Six
SOFT TOP FOUR DOOR MODELS — IF
EQUIPPED
WARNING!
Do not drive the vehicle with the rear
window up/removed unless the quarter
windows are also removed. Dangerous
exhaust gases could enter the vehicle
causing harm to the driver and passengers.
The fabric quarter windows and fabric top
are designed only for protection against the
elements. Do not rely on them to contain
occupants within the vehicle or to protect
against injury during an accident.
Remember, always wear seat belts.
Make sure hands and fingers are clear of
all pinch points when installing and
removing the soft tops. The lift assist mech-
anism and side bows may cause serious
injury if fingers or hands get caught in
between.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 89
(Continued)
(Continued)
If the temperature is below 72°F (24°C) and/or
the top has been folded down for a period of
time, the top will appear to have shrunk when
you raise it, making it difficult to put up. This is
caused by a natural contraction of the vinyl or
acrylic materials of the fabric top.
Place the vehicle in a warm area. Pull steadily
on the top fabric. The vinyl will stretch back to its
original size and the top can then be installed. If
the temperature is 41°F (5°C) or below, do not
attempt to put the top down or roll the rear or
side curtains.
CAUTION!
The soft top is not designed to carry any
additional loads such as roof racks, spare tires,
building, hunting, or camping supplies, and/or
luggage, etc. Also, it was not designed as a
structural member of the vehicle and, thus,
cannot properly carry any additional loads other
than environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
CAUTION!
Do not run a fabric top through an auto-
matic car wash. Window scratches and wax
build up may result.
Do not lower the top when the temperature
is below 41°F (5°C). Damage to the top
may result.
Do not move your vehicle until the top has
been either fully attached to the windshield
frame, or fully lowered.
Do not lower the top with the windows
installed. Window and top damage may
occur.
Refer to “Appearance Care For Fabric Top
Models” in “Bodywork” in “Servicing And
Maintenance” for further information. It
contains important information on cleaning
and caring for your vehicle's fabric top.
Do not use any tools (screwdrivers, etc.) to
pry or force any of the clamps, clips, or
retainers securing the soft top. Do not force
or pry the soft top framework when opening
or closing. Damage to the top may result.
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
interior water damage, stains or mildew on
the top material:
CAUTION! (Continued)
It is recommended that the top be free of
water prior to opening it. Operating the top,
opening a door or lowering a window while
the top is wet may allow water to drip into
the vehicle's interior.
Careless handling and storage of the soft
top may damage the seals, causing water
to leak into the vehicle's interior.
The soft top must be positioned properly to
ensure sealing. Improper installation can
cause water to leak into the vehicle's inte-
rior.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Lowering The Soft Top
Side View Top And Components
1 — #1 Bow 6 — #6 Bow
2 — #2 Bow 7 — Rear Quarter Window
3 — #3 Bow 8 — Lower Window Retainer
4 — #4 Bow 9 — Front Window Retainer
5 — #5 Bow
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 91
Rear View Top And Components
NOTE:
The rear window and rear quarter windows must be removed before lowering the soft top to prevent damage to the top. Clean side and rear windows
before removal to assist in preventing scratching during removal of the soft top. If the plastic retainers are difficult to operate due to road dust, etc.,
clean them with a mild soap solution and a small brush. Cleaning products are available through an authorized dealer.
1 — Rear Window Retainer Attachment Points
2 — Quarter Window Pillars
3 — Swing Gate Bar Retainers
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Remove The Rear Window:
1. With the swing gate open, remove the rear
window’s plastic retainers from the lower
right and left corners.
Step One
2. Grasp the swing gate bar, rotate it outward
and upward releasing it from both the right
and left retainers.
Step Two (Left Side Shown)
3. While holding the window in place, slide the
swing gate bar to the left separating it from
the rear window. Store in soft window bag,
or a safe location.
Step Three
4. Remove the plastic retainers from both
quarter window pillars.
Step Four
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 93
5. While keeping the rear window level, slide to
the left until it is completely separate from
its retainer. Do not pull downward while
removing the rear window. Damage to the
retainer could result.
Step Five
Remove The Right And Left Quarter Windows:
1. Through the rear opening, push the bottom
corner outward and release tab from the
bottom of the window pillar.
Step One
2. Undo the hook-and-loop fastener located at
the upper front corner of each quarter
window.
Hook-And-Loop Fastener Location
3. Starting at the rear of the vehicle, remove
plastic retainer from along the bottom of the
window moving toward the front of the
vehicle.
Step Three
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. Remove plastic retainer from the bottom to
the top of the front window.
Step Four
5. While keeping the window level, slide rear-
ward until it is completely separate from its
retainer. Do not pull downward while
removing the window. Damage to the
retainer could result.
Step Five
6. Store in soft window bag or a safe location.
NOTE:
Refer to “Soft Top Window Storage Bag” in this
section for information on the use of the storage
bag.
Lowering The Soft Top Into Sunrider® Position
1. After removing the rear window and
quarter panel windows, move to the front
of the vehicle.
2. Fold both sun visors forward against the
windshield.
3. Release the header latches from the
crossbar by pulling the handle downward.
Make sure the hook is disengaged from its
receiver.
Step Three
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 95
4. From both the left and right sides, lift up on
the #1 Bow of the soft top to start the oper-
ation.
Step Four
5. Move to the side of the vehicle and use the
side link to fold the soft top rearward into
the Sunrider® position.
Step Five
NOTE:
If leaving the soft top in the Sunrider® position,
secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop
fasteners provided in the center console.
Secured Top When In Sunrider® Position
Lowering The Soft Top Into Fully Lowered Posi-
tion
1. From the Sunrider® position, remove
straps if previously secured and move to
the rear of the vehicle.
2. Locate the Sunrider® latch beneath the #6
Bow of the soft top on the left side.
Sunrider® Latch Beneath #6 Bow
3. Pull the latch to release the top, and allow
the soft top to slide rearward freely in the
guide tracks to the stowed position.
Step Three
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
4. While pushing downward slightly on the
folded soft top, slide the lock lever on the
left and right side lift assist mechanisms to
the “lock” position.
Step Four (Locked Position)
5. Once the lock lever is in the “lock” position,
push downward on each side of the folded
soft top to ensure it is secure. An audible
“click” may be heard.
Step Five
NOTE:
Secure the top by using the two hook-and-loop
fasteners provided in the center console.
Secured Top When In Fully Lowered Position
Raising The Soft Top
Raising The Soft Top From The Fully Lowered
Position
1. From the fully lowered position, remove
straps if previously secured.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in
damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the next steps could result in
damage to the Soft Top or vehicle.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 97
2. While pushing down on the rear of the top,
slide the lock lever on the left and right side lift
assist mechanisms to the “unlock” position.
Unlocked Lift Assist Mechanism
3. Push up and forward from the #5 Bow along
the guide track until it locks into the
Sunrider® position with an audible “click”.
Step Three
4. Gently pull rearward on the #6 Bow to
ensure the top is locked in the Sunrider®
position.
5. Using the side link, lift and push the soft top
toward the front of the vehicle manually
guiding the top into the closed position.
Lift From Side Link
Lower Top Into Closed Position
1 — Unlocked Position
2 — #5 Bow Location
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle on
the header latch downward to engage the
hook into its receiver. Repeat on the other
side.
Step Six
7. Pull the handle back upward while
squeezing the hook, locking the latch into
place.
Step Seven
Install The Right And Left Quarter Windows
1. From the rear of the vehicle, guide the top
of the window into the retainer and slide
forward while keeping the window level.
Repeat on the other side.
Step One
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 99
2. Place the top of the quarter window pillar
into the top cover, and insert the bottom tab
into the clip.
Step Two
Step Two
3. Engage the retainers on the front of the
windows, ensuring they are fully engaged,
followed by the retainers along the bottom
of the windows.
Fully Engage Quarter Window Retainers
NOTE:
It is critical that the retainers are fully engaged
before the vehicle resumes motion.
4. Secure the hook-and-loop fastener at the
upper front corner of each quarter window
by pressing firmly.
Firmly Secure Hook-And-Loop Fastener
CAUTION!
Failure to follow all Quarter Window Install
steps could result in damage to the Soft Top
or vehicle.
1 — Retainer At Front Of Quarter Window
2 — Retainer At Bottom Of Quarter Window
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Install The Rear Window
1. Guide the rear window into the retainer
from left to right while keeping the window
level.
Step One
2. Insert the swing gate bar into the retainers
at the bottom of the window from left to the
right.
Step Two
3. Rotate the swing gate bar into the left and
right side retainers.
Step Three
4. Line up the rear window to the right side
quarter window first, and engage the plastic
retainers.
5. Repeat with the left side quarter window.
Step Five
6. Engage the rear window retainers in the
lower right and left corners.
Step Six
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 101
(Continued)
NOTE:
For information on removing your soft top, refer
to “Removing The Soft Top — Four Door Models”
in this chapter.
POWER SLIDING TOP — IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with a Power Sliding
Top, the control switch can be found on the
front trim panel, to the right of the driver’s side
sun visor.
Power Sliding Top Control Switch
NOTE:
The Power Top is non-removable. If desired,
the rear quarter windows can be removed
and stored in the provided storage bag. Refer
to “Quarter Window Removal” in this section
for further information.
The Power Top will not open in temperatures
below -4°F (-20°C). However, if it is opened
at a higher temperature, it can be closed at
temperatures above -40°F (-40°C).
The Power Top will not operate at vehicle
speeds above 60 mph (96 km/h).
NOTE:
A slight pause in audio may be heard when
opening and closing the Power Sliding Top as a
result of the Uconnect system switching
between Power Top Closed and Power Top Open
audio modes.
CAUTION!
Lowering of the windshield is NOT
recommended in vehicles equipped with a
Power Sliding Top. Damage will occur to the
top as well as the header seal.
1 — Open Switch
2 — Close Switch
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,
particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the power top while
operating the power top switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open power
top. You could also be seriously injured or
killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly
and make sure all passengers are also
properly secured.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Opening The Power Top
Express Mode
Push the open switch and release it within
one-half second. The power top will open auto-
matically to the open position. This is called
“Express Open”. During Express Open opera-
tion, any movement of the switch will stop the
power top.
Manual Mode
To open the power top manually, push and hold
the open switch. The power top will stop auto-
matically at the open position. Any release of
the switch will stop the movement. The power
top will remain in a partially opened position
until the switch is pushed and held again.
Closing The Power Top
Express Mode
Push the close switch and release it within
one-half second. The power top will close fully
and stop automatically. This is called “Express
Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the power top.
Manual Mode
To close the power top manually, push and hold
the close switch. The power top will move
forward and automatically stop at the fully
closed position. Any release of the switch will
stop the movement. The power top will remain
in a partially closed position until the switch is
pushed and held again.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the percep-
tion of pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type
sound in the ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind
buffeting with the windows down, or the power
top in certain open or partially open positions.
This is a normal occurrence and can be mini-
mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear
windows open, then open the front and rear
windows together to minimize the buffeting. If
the buffeting occurs with the power top open,
adjust the power top opening to minimize the
buffeting or open any window.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the power top during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
power top is detected, the power top will auto-
matically retract. Remove the obstruction if this
occurs. Next, push the close switch and release
to Express Close.
NOTE:
The Power Sliding Top may reverse motion if
closing during a severe headwind. If this
occurs, push and hold the Power Sliding Top
switch again to close the top completely.
If three consecutive power top close
attempts result in Pinch Protect reversals,
Pinch Protect will disable and the power top
must be closed in Manual Mode.
Power Top Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the quarter window glass panel.
Refer to “Bodywork” in Servicing And Mainte-
nance” for further information. It contains
Do not allow small children to operate the
power top. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the power top opening. Injury may result.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
power top is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands,
fingers and all objects from the top’s path
before closing.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 103
important information on cleaning and caring
for your vehicle.
Ignition Off Operation
The power top switch can remain active in
Accessory Delay for up to approximately
10 minutes after the vehicle’s ignition is placed
to the Off position. Opening either front door will
cancel this feature.
NOTE:
Ignition Off time is programmable through the
Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/
Customer Programmable Features” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
Relearn Procedure
For vehicles equipped with a power top, there is
a relearn procedure that allows you to calibrate
the power top when the “Express Mode” stops
working. To reset the power top, follow these
steps:
1. Place the ignition in the RUN position, and
start the vehicle.
NOTE:
The engine must be running to perform the
relearn procedure.
2. Ensure the power top is in the fully closed
position.
3. Push and hold the Close switch for 10
seconds. This will put the power top into
calibration mode.
4. Continue holding down the close button
while the top goes fully open and then back
to fully close.
5. Once the power top has stopped in the fully
closed position, release the close button.
The power top is now reset and ready to
use.
NOTE:
If the close button is released anytime during
the relearning process, the relearn may not be
complete, and the procedure must be repeated.
Rear Quarter Window Removal
On vehicles equipped with a Power Sliding Top,
the rear quarter windows can be removed. To
remove these windows, follow the procedure
below:
1. Open the swing gate, and lift the rear
window.
2. Open both side doors nearest the quarter
windows.
3. Locate the rear quarter window latches (two
on each window) on the interior of the
windows.
4. Rotate the left hand side latch clockwise to
release.
5. Rotate the right hand side latch counter-
clockwise to release.
Rear Quarter Window Release Latches
1 — Rotate Left Handle Clockwise
2 — Rotate Right Handle Counterclockwise
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
6. From the outside of the vehicle, lift each
window upward and away from the vehicle.
NOTE:
Do not pull down or apply any weight to the
windows after the latches are released.
Damage could result to the pins holding the
windows in place.
Lift Quarter Window Upward And Outward
Quarter Window Pins Location
7. Store the rear quarter windows in the
provided storage bag and keep in a safe
location, or securely fasten the bag to the
rear seat.
Quarter Window Storage Bag
To use the storage bags for the rear quarter
windows, proceed as follows:
1. With the bag completely open and the
fabric divider raised, place the first quarter
window with the latches facing outward
into the foam insert. Fold divider over the
window once placed inside.
Step One
1 — Bag Open With Divider Raised
2 — Lower Divider Over Window (Latches Facing
Outward)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 105
2. Place the second window into the foam
insert with the latches facing outward. Fully
close the bag.
NOTE:
Once both windows are placed inside the bag,
the outside of the windows will be facing each
other with all latches facing the outside of the
bag.
Step Two
3. Store the bag in a safe location, or in the
cargo area of the vehicle by securing the
bag in the vehicle’s cargo area. This is done
by attaching the straps at the top of the bag
to the rear head restraints, as well as
attaching the clip at the bottom of the bag to
the forward most cargo hook on the load
floor.
Step Three
FOLDING WINDSHIELD
The fold-down windshield on your vehicle is a
structural element that can provide some
protection in some accidents. The windshield
also provides some protection against weather,
road debris and intrusion of small branches and
other objects.
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the wind-
shield down, as you lose the protection this
structural element can provide.
If required for certain off-road uses, the wind-
shield can be folded down. However, the protec-
tion afforded by the windshield is then lost. If
you fold down the windshield, drive slowly and
cautiously. It is recommended that the speed of
the vehicle be limited to 10 mph (16 km/h),
with low range operation preferred if you are
driving off-road with the windshield folded
down.
Raise the windshield as soon as the task that
required its removal is completed and before
you return to on-road driving. Both you and your
passengers should wear seat belts at all times,
on-road and off-road, regardless of whether the
windshield is raised or folded down.
Outside rearview mirrors are mounted on the
doors. If you choose to remove the doors, see
an authorized dealer for a replacement
cowl-mounted outside mirror. Federal law
requires outside mirrors on vehicles for on-road
use.
1 — Second Window Placed Over Divider
2 — Fully Closed Bag
CAUTION!
Lowering of the windshield is NOT
recommended in vehicles equipped with a
Power Sliding Top. Damage will occur to the
top as well as the header seal.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Lowering The Windshield
1. Before completing the steps below:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Soft
Top, the top MUST be lowered, and the
door rails must be removed prior to
lowering the windshield.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Hard
Top, the Freedom Panels MUST be
removed prior to lowering the windshield.
Refer to the “Soft Top,” “Door Frame,”
and “Freedom Top” instructions in this
chapter for more information.
2. Manually remove the protective caps over
the windshield wiper hex bolts.
Protective Cap Over Wiper Bolt
3. Using the provided 15mm socket, remove
the two hex bolts and remove the wiper
arms.
4. Move to the inside of the vehicle and lower
both sun visors.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these warnings to help
protect against personal injury:
Do not drive your vehicle on-road with the
windshield down.
Do not drive your vehicle unless the wind-
shield is securely fastened, either up or
down.
Eye protection, such as goggles, should be
worn at all times when the windshield is
down.
Be sure that you carefully follow the instruc-
tions for raising the windshield. Make sure
that the folding windshield, windshield
wipers, side bars, and all associated hard-
ware and fasteners are correctly and tightly
assembled before driving your vehicle.
Failure to follow these instructions may
prevent your vehicle from providing you and
your passengers’ protection in some acci-
dents.
If you remove the doors, store them outside
the vehicle. In the event of an accident, a
loose door may cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow this step will cause damage
to the vehicle’s header seal.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 107
5. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver,
remove the four Torx screws located along
the interior of the windshield.
Interior Torx Screw Locations
NOTE:
Store all of the mounting bolts in their original
threaded holes and tighten for safekeeping.
6. Lower the windshield gently until it contacts
the footman loop bumpers (if equipped).
Footman Loop Bumpers
7. Secure the windshield by passing a cinch
strap through the footman loops on either
side of the hood and on the windshield
frame. Tighten the strap to secure the wind-
shield in place.
ACC/FCW Sensor Protective Cover — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a protective
cover that is to be used whenever the wind-
shield is folded down in order to protect the
ACC/FCW sensor. To install the cover, follow the
instructions below:
1. Secure the top part of the cover so that it
hinges to the header.
2. Swing the cover down and push on it so that
it covers the opening.
3. Check to make sure the cover is secured
properly.
1 — Washer Nozzle
2 — Bumper
3 — Footman Loop
CAUTION!
Do Not Overtighten! Damage to the
windshield could result.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Be sure to remove the cover before returning
the windshield to the normal position. Store the
cover in the cargo area.
Cleaning Instructions
During windshield down applications, dust/dirt
can accumulate in the cover and block the
camera lens. Use a microfiber cloth to clean the
camera lens, module, and inside cover, being
careful not to damage or scratch the module.
Raising The Windshield
1. Release the strap that secured the wind-
shield in the lowered position.
2. Raise the windshield.
3. Using the provided #40 Torx head driver,
reinstall the four Torx screws located along
the interior of the windshield. Secure them
until they are snug, being careful not to
cross-thread the screws or overtighten.
Interior Torx Screw Locations
4. Reinstall the windshield wiper arms using
the provided 15 mm socket. First, align the
tips of the blade to the “T” mark in the glass.
Then, while holding the arm in that position,
reinstall the hex nut and tighten until snug.
Be careful not to over-tighten. Repeat for
the other arm.
5. Replace the protective caps over the wiper
arm hex bolts and push gently until they
snap into place.
Protective Cap Over Wiper Bolt
6. After completing the steps above:
If your vehicle is equipped with a Soft
Top, reinstall the Door Rails and raise the
top.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Hard
Top, reinstall the Freedom Panels.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 109
HOOD
Opening The Hood
Release both the hood latches.
Hood Latch Locations
Raise the hood and locate the safety latch,
located in the middle of the hood opening. Push
the safety latch to the left side of the vehicle, to
open the hood. You may have to push down
slightly on the hood before pushing the safety
latch. Unhook the support rod from the hood
and insert it into the slot on the front end above
the radiator.
Closing The Hood
To close the hood, remove the support rod from
the slot and replace it on the hood panel
retaining clip. Lower the hood slowly. Secure
both of the hood latches.
REAR SWING GATE
The rear swing gate can be unlocked by using
one of the following methods:
Mechanical key (with mechanical lock — if
equipped)
Remote Keyless Entry key fob (if equipped)
Power door unlock switch on the front doors
(if equipped)
Keyless Enter-N-Go swing gate handle (if
equipped)
To open the swing gate, pull on the gate handle.
Swing Gate Handle
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Use a firm downward push at
the front center of the hood to ensure that
both latches engage. Do not fully open and
rest the hood on the windshield.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Close the rear flip-up window before attempting
to close the swing gate (hard top models only).
NOTE:
The swing gate hinges and check strap may
require cleaning if a squeak can be heard when
opening the swing gate. Progressive accumula-
tion on the check strap arm may cause failure of
the check strap, requiring replacement. For
further information on vehicle cleaning proce-
dures, refer to “Interiors” in “Servicing And
Maintenance”.
Cargo Area Features
Trail Rail Cargo Organizer — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with the Trail Rail
system, a rail will be found built into the floor on
either side of the cargo area. Each rail contains
an adjustable anchor loop that can be used to
secure cargo. The position of the adjustable
anchor loop can be adjusted by sliding the loop
along the rail.
To adjust the anchor loop, push down on the
center button while sliding the loop along the
rail to the desired position. Release the button
and move the loop slightly to the next fixed posi-
tion in the notches of the rail.
Adjustable Anchor Loop
Lift the loop to use.
Lift Adjustable Anchor Loop
WARNING!
Driving with the flip-up window open can
allow poisonous exhaust gases into your
vehicle. You and your passengers could be
injured by these fumes. Keep the flip-up
window closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not push on rear wiper blade when closing
the rear flip-up window, as damage to the
blade will result.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 111
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink® replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates, lighting
or home security systems. The HomeLink® unit
is powered by your vehicle’s 12 Volt battery.
The HomeLink® buttons, located on the sun
visor or the overhead console, designate the
three different HomeLink® channels. The
HomeLink® indicator is located above the
center button.
HomeLink® Buttons/Overhead Console
NOTE:
HomeLink® is disabled when the Vehicle Secu-
rity Alarm is active.
Before You Begin Programming HomeLink®
Be sure that your vehicle is parked outside of
the garage before you begin programming.
For more efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal it is
recommended that a new battery be placed in
the hand-held transmitter of the device that is
being programmed to the HomeLink® system.
To erase the channels, place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position, and push and hold the two
outside HomeLink® buttons (I and III) for up to
20 seconds or until the orange indicator
flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be
performed when programming HomeLink®
for the first time. Do not erase channels when
programming additional buttons.
If you have any problems, or require assis-
tance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for infor-
mation or assistance.
Programming A Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers that
were manufactured after 1995. These garage
door openers can be identified by the “LEARN”
or “TRAIN” button located where the hanging
antenna is attached to the garage door opener.
NOTE:
It is NOT the button that is normally used to
open and close the door. The name and color of
the button may vary by manufacturer.
Training The Garage Door Opener
1 — Door Opener
2 — Training Button
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Home-
Link® button you wish to program while
keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you push and hold
the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the indicator light. The HomeLink® indi-
cator will flash slowly and then rapidly after
HomeLink® has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons after the indicator
light changes from slow to rapid.
5. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING”
button. This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to the
garage door opener/device motor. Firmly
push and release the “LEARN” or
“TRAINING” button. On some garage door
openers/devices there may be a light that
blinks when the garage door opener/device
is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the
next step after the LEARN button has been
pushed.
6. Return to the vehicle and push the
programmed HomeLink® button twice
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). If the garage door opener/device acti-
vates, programming is complete.
NOTE:
If the garage door opener/device does not acti-
vate, push the button a third time (for two
seconds) to complete the training.
To program the remaining two HomeLink®
buttons, repeat each step for each remain-
ing button. DO NOT erase the channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previ-
ously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button proceed with
“Programming A Rolling Code” step 2 and
follow all remaining steps.”
Programming A Non-Rolling Code
For programming garage door openers manu-
factured before 1995.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the Home-
Link® button you wish to program while
keeping the HomeLink® indicator light in
view.
3. Press and hold the HomeLink® button you
want to program while you press and hold
the hand-held transmitter button.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and observe
the indicator light. The HomeLink® indi-
cator will flash slowly and then rapidly after
HomeLink® has received the frequency
signal from the hand-held transmitter.
Release both buttons after the indicator
light changes from slow to rapid.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 113
5. Press and hold the programmed Home-
Link® button and observe the indicator
light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining Home-
Link® buttons, repeat each step for each
remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Non-Rolling Code)
To reprogram a channel that has been previ-
ously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Programming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2
and follow all remaining steps.
Canadian/Gate Operator Programming
For programming transmitters in Canada/
United States that require the transmitter
signals to “time-out” after several seconds of
transmission.
Canadian radio frequency laws require trans-
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after several
seconds of transmission – which may not be
long enough for HomeLink® to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the
cycling process to prevent possible overheating
of the garage door or gate motor.
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Place the hand-held transmitter 1 to
3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink® button you wish to program
while keeping the HomeLink® indicator
light in view.
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink®
button, while you press and release
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter every
two seconds until HomeLink® has success-
fully accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly when fully trained.
4. Watch for the HomeLink® indicator to
change flash rates. When it changes, it is
programmed. It may take up to 30 seconds
or longer in rare cases. The garage door
may open and close while you are program-
ming.
5. Press and hold the programmed
HomeLink® button and observe the
indicator light.
NOTE:
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and the garage
door/device should activate when the
HomeLink® button is pressed.
To program the two remaining Home-
Link® buttons, repeat each step for each
remaining button. DO NOT erase the
channels.
If you unplugged the garage door opener/
device for programming, plug it back in at this
time.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink® Button
(Canadian/Gate Operator)
To reprogram a channel that has been previ-
ously trained, follow these steps:
1. Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®
button until the indicator light begins to
flash after 20 seconds. Do not release the
button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming”
step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Using HomeLink®
To operate, push and release the programmed
HomeLink® button. Activation will now occur for
the programmed device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security system, entry
door lock, home/office lighting, etc.). The
hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell
or turn in your vehicle.
To do this, push and hold the two outside
buttons for 20 seconds until the orange indi-
cator flashes. Note that all channels will be
erased. Individual channels cannot be erased.
The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver is
disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is
active.
NOTE:
The universal garage door opener only operates
when the engine is running for security reasons
associated with removable tops and doors.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink®,
here are some of the most common solutions:
Replace the battery in the garage door
opener hand-held transmitter.
Push the LEARN button on the garage door
opener to complete the training for a rolling
code.
Did you unplug the device for programming
and remember to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance,
please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the
Internet at HomeLink.com for information or
assistance.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide,
a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in
the garage while programming the trans-
ceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious
injury or death.
Your motorized door or gate will open and
close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program the
transceiver if people, pets or other objects
are in the path of the door or gate. Only use
this transceiver with a garage door opener
that has a “stop and reverse” feature as
required by Federal safety standards. This
includes most garage door opener models
manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety
features.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 115
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Storage
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
To open the glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
Glove Compartment
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove
compartment in the open position. Driving
with the glove compartment open may result
in injury in a collision.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Console Storage Compartment
The center console has both an upper and lower
storage compartment.
To open the upper storage compartment, lift the
top latch.
Upper Console Storage Latch
To access the lower storage compartment, lift
the bottom latch.
Lower Console Storage Latch
Rear Storage Compartment — If Equipped
The rear cargo area storage compartment is
located underneath the load floor.
To access the storage compartment, lift up on
the cargo strap at the rear of the cargo area.
Rear Storage Cover
Cupholders
The front cupholders are located in the center
console.
Front Cupholders
The rear cupholders are located on the back of
the center console, near the floor.
Rear Cupholders
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 117
(Continued)
NOTE:
Cupholders located in the front center console,
as well as the back of the center console are not
removable.
There are also cupholders located in the rear
seat armrest, if equipped. These cupholders
can be removed for cleaning.
Rear Seat Armrest Cupholders
Electrical Power Outlets
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) auxiliary power
outlets that can provide power for accessories
designed for use with the standard power outlet
adapters.
The front power outlet is located in the center of
the instrument panel below the climate
controls, and is powered from the ignition
switch. Power is available when the ignition
switch is in the ON or ACC position.
Front Power Outlet
On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer,
there is a second power outlet located in the
rear cargo area and is powered directly from the
vehicle battery.
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
Power Outlets Fuse Locations
1 — F43 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (bat-
tery powered at all times)
2 — F45 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (pow-
ered when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC
position)
CAUTION!
Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is
exceeded the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Power Inverter — If Equipped
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet
located on the back of the center console to
convert DC current to AC current.
This outlet can power cellular phones, elec-
tronics and other low power devices requiring
power up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end video
game consoles exceed this power limit, as will
most power tools.
Power Inverter
The power inverter is designed with built-in over-
load protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts
is exceeded, the power inverter automatically
shuts down. Once the electrical device has
been removed from the outlet, the inverter
should automatically reset. If the power rating
exceeds approximately 170 Watts, the power
inverter may have to be reset manually.
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the
outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of
the power outlet can cause damage not
covered by your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the recepta-
cles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the alternator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not hang any type of acces-
sory or accessory bracket from the plug.
Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 119
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped
Four auxiliary switches located in the lower
switch bank of the instrument panel can be
used to power various electrical devices. You
have the ability to configure the functionality of
the auxiliary switches via the Uconnect settings.
All switches can be configured as follows:
Switch type operation: Latching or
Momentary
Power source: Battery or Ignition
Ability to hold last state across key cycles:
On or Off
Auxiliary Switches
NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when
switch type is set to latching and power source
is set to ignition.
For more information, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia”.
The auxiliary switches manage the relays that
power four blunt cut wires. These wires are
located under the instrument panel in the
passenger compartment and under the hood to
the right, near the battery.
Auxiliary Switch Connections – Under Hood
Auxiliary Switch Connections – Under Instrument Panel
In addition to the four auxiliary switch wires, a
fused battery wire and ignition wire are also
located in the interior, in the passenger side under
the instrument panel.
A kit of splices and heat shrink tubing are provided
with the auxiliary switches to aid in the connection/
installation of your electrical devices.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the
receptacles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Wire Color Chart
Circuit Function Fuse Wire Color Locations
Aux Switch 1 F93 – 40 Amp Beige/Pink Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) & Underhood (right side near
battery)
Aux Switch 2 F92 – 40 Amp Green/Pink Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) & Underhood (right side near
battery)
Aux Switch 3 F103 – 15 Amp Orange/Pink Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) & Underhood (right side near
battery)
Aux Switch 4 F108 – 15 Amp Dark Blue/Pink Interior (passenger side under instrument panel) & Underhood (right side near
battery)
Battery F72 – 10 Amp Red/White Interior (passenger side under instrument panel)
Ignition F50 – 10 Amp Pink/Orange Interior (passenger side under instrument panel)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 121
(Continued)
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
Roof rack applications are for Hard Top models
ONLY.
The load carried on the roof, when equipped
with a luggage rack, must not exceed 100 lbs
(45 kg), this includes the weight of the cross-
bars, and it should be uniformly distributed over
the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever
cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check the
straps frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
NOTE:
Crossbars can be purchased at an authorized
dealer through Mopar parts.
External racks do not increase the total load
carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the
total occupant and luggage load inside the
vehicle, plus the load on the luggage rack, do
not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before
driving your vehicle. Improperly secured loads
can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high
speeds, resulting in personal injury or
property damage. Follow the roof rack
cautions when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof
rack load capacity. Always distribute heavy
loads as evenly as possible and secure the
load appropriately.
Long loads, which extend over the wind-
shield, should be secured to both the front
and rear of the vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection
between the surface of the roof and the
load.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to
natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can
add sudden upward loads. It is recom-
mended to not carry large flat loads, such
as wood panels or surfboards, which may
result in damage to the cargo or your
vehicle.
Load should always be secured to cross
bars first, with tie down loops used as addi-
tional securing points if needed. Tie loops
are intended as supplementary tie down
points only. Do not use ratcheting mecha-
nisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
CAUTION! (Continued)
2
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 123
Premium Instrument Cluster
Instrument Cluster Descriptions
Base Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the
engine cooling system is operating satis-
factorily.
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the
tachometer pointer in the red area. Engine
damage will occur.
3
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather,
up mountain grades, or when towing a
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
3. Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a
driver-interactive display. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in this
chapter for further information.
4. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel filler
door is located.
5. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
Premium Instrument Cluster Descriptions
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a
driver-interactive display. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in this
chapter for further information.
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Fuel Gauge
The pointer shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel filler
door is located.
5. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within the
normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather,
up mountain grades, or when towing a
trailer. It should not be allowed to exceed
the upper limits of the normal operating
range.
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
CAUTION!
Do not operate the engine with the
tachometer pointer in the red area. Engine
damage will occur.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 125
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instru-
ment cluster display, which offers useful infor-
mation to the driver. With the ignition in the
STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a door will
activate the display for viewing, and display the
total miles, or kilometers, in the odometer. Your
instrument cluster display is designed to display
important information about your vehicle’s
systems and features. Using a driver interactive
display located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how
systems are working and give you warnings
when they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through and enter
the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and
make selections and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls
The instrument cluster display is located in the
center of the instrument cluster.
3.5 Inch Instrument Cluster Display Location
7.0 Inch Instrument Cluster Display Location
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. You may want to call an
authorized dealer for service if your vehicle
overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the
temperature gauge reads “H” pull over and
stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on the “H”, turn the engine off
immediately and call an authorized dealer for
service.
3
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The system allows the driver to select informa-
tion by pushing the following buttons mounted
on the steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow
button to scroll upward through the
Main Menu items.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow
button to scroll downward through
the Main Menu items.
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow
button to access the information
screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow
button to access the information
screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item.
OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of a
Main Menu item. Push and hold the OK arrow
button for two seconds to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
The Main Menu items consists of the following:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Off Road — If Equipped
Driver Assist — If Equipped
Fuel Economy
Trip Info
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Audio
Messages
Screen Setup
Oil Change Reset — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display in the instru-
ment cluster display for five seconds after a
single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval may
fluctuate, dependent upon your personal
driving style.
1 — OK Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — Left Arrow Button
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 127
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time you place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position. To turn off the message
temporarily, push and release the OK button. To
reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer
to the following procedure.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN mode (do not start
the engine).
2. Navigate to "Oil Life" submenu in "Vehicle
Info" in the instrument cluster display.
3. Push and hold the OK button until the gauge
resets to 100%.
Secondary Method For Oil Change Reset Proce-
dure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place the
ignition in the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items
display in the center of the instrument cluster.
Menu items may vary depending on your vehicle
features.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the speedometer menu icon is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the OK button to toggle between MPH
and km/h.
Vehicle Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Vehicle Info menu icon is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. Push and
release the left or right arrow button to scroll
through the information submenus and push
and release the OK button to select or reset the
resettable submenus.
Off Road
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Off Road menu icon is displayed in the
instrument cluster display. Push and release
the left or right arrow button to scroll through
the information submenus.
Drivetrain
Front Wheel Angle: displays the graphical
and numerical value of calculated
average front wheel angle from the
steering wheel orientation.
Tire Pressure Coolant
Temperature
Transmission
Temperature —
Automatic
Transmission Only
Oil Pressure
Oil Temperature Oil Life
Battery Voltage Exhaust
Fluid Level —
If Equipped
3
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Transfer Case Lock Status: displays
“Lock” graphic only during 4WD High,
4WD High Part Time, 4WD Low status.
Axle Lock And Sway Bar Status (If
Equipped): displays front and rear or rear
only axle locker graphic, and sway bar
connection graphic with text message
(connected or disconnected).
Pitch And Roll
Displays the pitch and roll of the vehicle
in the graphic with the angle number on
the screen.
NOTE:
When vehicle speed becomes too high to
display the pitch and roll, “- -” will display in
place of the numbers, and the graphic will be
greyed out. A message indicating the necessary
speed for the feature to become available will
also display.
Driver Assist — If Equipped
The Driver Assist menu displays the status of
the ACC systems.
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Driver Assist menu is displayed in the
instrument cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Feature — If
Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the
current Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) system
settings. The information displayed depends on
ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) ON/OFF
button (located on the steering wheel) until one
of the following displays in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Push the SET + or the SET - button (located on
the steering wheel), and the following will
display in the instrument cluster display.
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in
the instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any
ACC activity occurs, which may include any of
the following:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
For further information, refer to “Adaptive
Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating.”
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Fuel Economy icon is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display. Push and hold the
OK button to reset average fuel economy
feature.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 129
Toggle left or right to select a display with or
without Current Fuel Economy Information.
Range – The display shows the estimated
distance (mi or km) that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. When the
Range value is less than 10 miles (16 kilome-
ters), the Range display will change to a
“LOW” message. Adding a significant amount
of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW”
message and a new Range value will display.
Range cannot be reset through the OK
button.
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable
distance of the vehicle, regardless of the Range
displayed value.
Average – The display shows the average fuel
economy (MPG, L/100 km, or km/L) since
the last reset.
Current – This display shows the current fuel
economy (MPG, L/100 km, km/L) while
driving.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Trip icon/title is highlighted in the
instrument cluster display, then push and
release the left or right arrow button to select
Trip A or Trip B.
The Trip A and Trip B information will display the
following:
Distance
Average Fuel Economy
Elapsed Time
Hold the OK button to reset all the information.
Stop/Start — If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Stop/Start icon/title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. The screen will
display the Stop/Start status.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Audio Menu icon/title is highlighted in
the instrument cluster display. This menu will
display the audio source information, including
the Song name, Artist name, and audio source
with an accompanying graphic.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia for
further information.
Phone Call Status
When a call is incoming, a Phone Call Status
pop-up will display on the screen. The pop-up
will remain until the phone is answered or
ignored.
NOTE:
The call status will temporarily replace the
previous media source information displayed
on the screen. When the pop-up is no longer
displayed, the display will return to the last used
screen.
Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Messages Menu item is highlighted.
This feature shows the number of stored
warning messages. Pushing the right arrow
button will allow you to see what the stored
messages are.
When no messages are present, main menu
icon will be a closed envelope, and “No Stored
Messages” will display.
3
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow button
until the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is high-
lighted in the instrument cluster display. Push
and release the OK button to enter the submenus
and follow the prompts on the screen as needed.
The Screen Setup feature allows you to change
what information is displayed in the instrument
cluster as well as the location that information is
displayed.
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left
None
Compass (default setting)
Outside Temp
Time
Range To Empty
Average MPG (or L/100km, km/L)
Current MPG (or L/100km, km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Center
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Time
Range to Empty
Average MPG (or L/100km, km/L)
Current MPG (or L/100km, km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Audio
Speedometer
Menu Title (default setting)
Upper Right
None
Compass
Outside Temp (default setting)
Time
Range To Empty
Average MPG (or L/100km, km/L)
Current MPG (or L/100km, km/L)
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Gear Display — If Equipped
Full (default setting)
Single
Current Gear — If Equipped
On
Off (default setting)
Odometer — If Equipped
Show (default setting)
Hide
Favorite Menus
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Off Road – If Equipped (show/hide)
Driver Assist – If Equipped (show/hide)
Fuel Economy (show/hide)
Trip Info (Show/Hide)
Stop/Start
Audio (show/hide)
Messages
Screen Setup
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
Defaults (Restores All Settings To Default
Settings)
Cancel
Restore
The menu with (show/hide) means user can
press OK button to choose show or hide this
menu on the instrument cluster display.
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional moni-
toring of the electrical system and status of the
vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions
will take place to extend the driving time and
distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical
loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a
risk of battery depletion to the point where the
vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply,
or will not restart after the current drive cycle.
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will
appear in the instrument cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery
has a low state of charge and continues to lose
electrical charge at a rate that the charging
system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from
load reduction. The charging system
performs a diagnostic on the charging
system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it
may indicate a problem with the charging
system. Refer to “Battery Charge Warning
Light” in this chapter for further information.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
effected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
150W Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system
because the electrical loads are larger than
the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical
loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and
interior lights, overloaded power outlets
+12 Volt, 150W, USB ports) during certain
driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights,
upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated
by long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended
period of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was
not charged completely.
3
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The battery was discharged by an electrical
load left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volt portable appli-
ances like vacuum cleaner’s, game consoles
and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On”
or “Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if
possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte-
rior)
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volt, 150W, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, tempera-
ture)
Check the audio settings (volume)
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and
review specifications if any (load and Ignition
Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecu-
tive trips and the evaluation of the vehicle
and driving pattern did not help to identify the
cause.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when appli-
cable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be consid-
ered as exhaustive and/or alternative to the
information contained in the Owner’s Manual,
which you are advised to read carefully in all
cases. Always refer to the information in this
chapter in the event of a failure indication. All
active telltales will display first if applicable. The
system check menu may appear different
based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and
will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN posi-
tion. This light will illuminate with a single chime
when a fault with the air bag has been detected,
it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light
is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns
on while driving, have the system inspected at
an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application.
If the brake light turns on it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a
problem with the anti-lock brake system
reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at
the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 133
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will
remain on until the condition has been
corrected. If the problem is related to the brake
booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may be
felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If
it stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the elec-
trical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a
door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the
vehicle. You could have a collision. Have the
vehicle checked immediately.
3
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electric Power Steering Fault Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the Electric Power
Steering (EPS) system. Refer to “Electro
- Hydraulic Power Steering” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the Electronic
Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected while the vehicle
is running, the light will either stay on or flash
depending on the nature of the problem. Cycle
the ignition when the vehicle is safely and
completely stopped and the transmission is
placed in the PARK (P) position. The light should
turn off. If the light remains on with the vehicle
running, your vehicle will usually be drivable;
however, see an authorized dealer for service
as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as
a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light
This warning light warns of an over-
heated engine condition. If the engine
coolant temperature is too high, this
indicator will illuminate and a single
chime will sound. If the temperature reaches
the upper limit, a continuous chime will sound
for four minutes or until the engine is able to
cool: whichever comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,
turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into
NEUTRAL (N) and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to normal,
turn the engine off immediately and call for
service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the
hood is ajar/open and not fully
closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 135
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will
turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Swing Gate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the swing gate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
warn of a high transmission fluid
temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N), until
the light turns off. Once the light turns off, you
may continue to drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
vehicle security alarm is arming, and
then will flash slowly until the vehicle
is disarmed.
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning Light
This warning light monitors the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The
light will turn on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is
required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
3
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning
Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the igni-
tion is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position, have the brake system inspected by an
authorized dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when
the Electronic Stability Control system
is Active. The “ESC Indicator Light” in
the instrument cluster will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position, and when ESC is acti-
vated. It should go out with the engine running.
If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continu-
ously with the engine running, a malfunction
has been detected in the ESC system. If this
warning light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several
miles (kilometers) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as
soon as possible to have the problem diag-
nosed and corrected.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” and the “ESC
Indicator Light” come on momentarily each
time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN, the
ESC system will be on, even if it was turned off
previously.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the fuel filler cap is loose. Properly
close the filler cap to disengage the
light. If the light does not turn off,
please see an authorized dealer.
Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approxi-
mately 2.0 gal (7.5 L), this light will
turn on and a chime will sound. The
light will remain on until fuel is added.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the windshield washer fluid is low.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL) is a part of an
Onboard Diagnostic System called
OBD II that monitors engine and auto-
matic transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
signal a fault with the 4WD system. If
the light stays on or comes on during
driving, it means that the 4WD system
is not functioning properly and that service is
required. We recommend you drive to the
nearest service center and have the vehicle
serviced immediately.
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the Forward Colli-
sion Warning System. Contact an
authorized dealer for service. Refer to
“Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With Mitiga-
tion” in “Safety” for further information.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start system is not func-
tioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Speed Control Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indi-
cate the Speed Control System is not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized dealer.
Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate when there is
a fault in the sway bar disconnect
system.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the indi-
cations corresponding to each tire.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher
temperatures than in normal operating
conditions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This
could result in death or serious injury to the
driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause damage
to the vehicle control system. It also could
affect fuel economy and driveability. If the
MIL is flashing, severe catalytic converter
damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and
steering. If a tire puncture occurs, repair
immediately using the dedicated tire repair
kit and contact an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
3
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pres-
sure telltale when one or more of your tires is
significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when
the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you
should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pres-
sure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the
vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if under-inflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pres-
sure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as
the malfunction exists. When the malfunction
indicator is illuminated, the system may not be
able to detect or signal low tire pressure as
intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more tires or
wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow
the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Yellow Indicator Lights
4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive
mode, and the front and rear drivesh-
afts are mechanically locked together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle.
Undesirable system operation or sensor
damage may result when using replacement
equipment that is not of the same size, type,
and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire
sealants may cause the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to become
inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer to have your
sensor function checked.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW
mode. The front and rear driveshafts
are mechanically locked together
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at
the wheels.
4WD Part Time Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive part
time mode, and the front and rear
driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed.
Active Speed Limiter Fault Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
signal when there is a fault detected
with the Active Speed Limiter.
Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light
This light indicates when the front
and/or rear axle locker fault has been
detected.
Forward Collision Warning Off Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to indi-
cate that Forward Collision Warning is
off.
Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the front,
rear, or both axles have been locked.
The telltale will display the lock icon
on the front and rear axles to indicate
the current lock status.
Neutral Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the neutral mode.
Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the rear axle
lock has been activated.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control Warning
Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when a ACC is
not operating and needs service.
Refer to “Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC)” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Sway Bar Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front sway bar is discon-
nected.
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when the Adaptive
Cruise Control is set and there is no
target vehicle detected. Refer to “Adap-
tive Cruise Control (ACC)” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target
Light — If Equipped
This will display when the ACC is set
and a target vehicle is detected. Refer
to “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
3
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4WD Auto Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the four-wheel drive auto
mode. The system will provide power
to all four wheels and shift the power
between the front and rear axles as needed.
This will provide maximum traction in dry and
slippery conditions.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If
Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate
when the speed control is set to the
desired speed. Refer to “Speed
Control — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front fog lights are on.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the park lights or headlights are
turned on.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Stop/Start function is in
“Autostop” mode.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the corre-
sponding exterior turn signal lamps
will flash. Turn signals can be activated when
the multifunction lever is moved down (left) or
up (right).
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
White Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Ready Light —
If Equipped
This light will turn on when the vehicle
equipped with Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) has been turned on, but
not set. Refer to “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) — If Equipped” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
2WD High Indicator Light — If Equipped With
a Premium Cluster
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the two wheel drive high
mode.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator shows when the Hill
Descent Control (HDC) feature is
turned on. The lamp will be on solid
when HDC is armed. HDC can only be
armed when the transfer case is in the “4WD
LOW” position and the vehicle speed is less
then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these conditions are
not met while attempting to use the HDC
feature, the HDC indicator light will flash on/off.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If
Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This light will turn on when the speed
control has been turned on, but not
set. Refer to “Speed Control — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If
Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate
when the speed control is set.
Refer to “Speed Control — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam head-
lights are on. With the low beams acti-
vated, push the multifunction lever
forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to turn
on the high beams. Pull the multifunction lever
rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to turn
off the high beams. If the high beams are off,
pull the lever toward you for a temporary high
beam on, "flash to pass" scenario.
Gray Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If
Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the speed
control has been turned on, but not
set. Refer to “Speed Control — If
Equipped” in “Starting And Operating”
for further information.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the emis-
sions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current govern-
ment regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the
OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction Indi-
cator Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic
codes and other information to assist your
service technician in making repairs. Although
your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
3
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the diag-
nosis and service of your vehicle and emissions
system.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecurity”
in “Multimedia”.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's emis-
sions control system. Failure to pass could
prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the “Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not
on when the engine is running, and that the
OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the “Malfunc-
tion Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol come on
as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and
then return to being fully illuminated until you
turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
not ready and you should not proceed to the
I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
fully illuminated until you place the ignition in
the off position or start the engine. This
means that your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation you should
have your vehicle serviced before going to the
I/M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
3
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides
increased vehicle stability and brake perfor-
mance under most braking conditions. The
system automatically prevents wheel lock, and
enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure
that the ABS is working properly each time the
vehicle is started and driven. During this
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound
as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels begin to
lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow, gravel,
bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris, or panic
stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-
tion(s).
You also may experience the following when
ABS activates:
The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run
for a short time after the stop)
The clicking sound of solenoid valves
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead
to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
SAFETY 145
ABS is designed to function with the Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires. Modifica-
tion may result in degraded ABS performance.
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will
turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains
on or comes on while driving, it indicates that
the anti-lock portion of the brake system is not
functioning and that service is required.
However, the conventional brake system will
continue to operate normally if the “Anti-Lock
Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the
brake system should be serviced as soon as
possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light”
does not come on when the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as
soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Elec-
tronic Brake Control (EBC) System. This system
includes Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake
Assist System (BAS), Hill Start Assist (HSA),
Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic
Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Miti-
gation (ERM). These systems work together to
enhance both vehicle stability and control in
various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer
Sway Control (TSC), Ready Alert Braking (RAB),
Rain Brake Support (RBS), and Hill Descent
Control (HDC).
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn
on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on
or comes on while driving, it indicates that the
brake system is not functioning properly and
that immediate service is required. If the “Brake
System Warning Light” does not come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The Brake Assist System (BAS) is designed to
optimize the vehicle’s braking capability during
emergency braking maneuvers. The system
detects an emergency braking situation by
sensing the rate and amount of brake applica-
tion and then applies optimum pressure to the
brakes. This can help reduce braking distances.
The BAS complements the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly
results in the best BAS assistance. To receive
the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stop-
ping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes). Do
not reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking
is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal is
released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the
traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities of
a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 SAFETY
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
The Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
manages the distribution of the braking torque
between the front and rear axles by limiting
braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to
prevent overslip of the rear wheels to avoid
vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear axle
from entering ABS before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) anticipates the
potential for wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s
steering wheel input and the speed of the
vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and
vehicle’s speed are sufficient to potentially
cause wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur. ERM
can only reduce the chance of wheel lift occur-
ring during severe or evasive driving maneu-
vers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due to other
factors, such as road conditions, leaving the
roadway, or striking objects or other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”
mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability
Control (ESC)” in this section for a complete
explanation of the available ESC modes.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) enhances
directional control and stability of the vehicle
under various driving conditions. ESC corrects
for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle
by applying the brake of the appropriate
wheel(s) to assist in counteracting the oversteer
or understeer condition. Engine power may also
be reduced to help the vehicle maintain the
desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” located in the instrument cluster will start
to flash as soon as the ESC system becomes
active. The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indi-
cator Light” also flashes when the TCS is active.
If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease
up on the accelerator and apply as little throttle
as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll
overs, especially those that involve leaving
the roadway or striking objects or other
vehicles. The capabilities of an
ERM-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner
which could jeopardize the user's safety or
the safety of others.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
SAFETY 147
(Continued)
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE:
Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating
modes.
ESC On
“ESC On” is the normal operating mode for the
ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC
system will be in this mode. This mode should
be used for most driving conditions. Alternate
ESC modes should only be used for specific
reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when
a more spirited driving experience is desired. This
mode may modify TCS and ESC thresholds for
activation, which allows for more wheel spin than
normally allowed. This mode may be useful if the
vehicle becomes stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the “ESC OFF” switch and the “ESC Off Indi-
cator Light” will illuminate. To turn the ESC on
again, momentarily push the “ESC OFF” switch
and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes, a
momentary button push will toggle the ESC
mode. Multiple momentary button pushes may
be required to return to “ESC On” mode.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 SAFETY
Full Off — If Equipped
The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-highway
or off-road use only and should not be used on
any public roadways. In this mode, TCS and ESC
features are turned off. To enter the “Full Off”
mode, push and hold the “ESC OFF” switch for
five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with
the engine running. After five seconds, a chime
will sound, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illu-
minate, and the “ESC Off” message will display
in the instrument cluster. To turn ESC on again,
momentarily push the “ESC OFF” switch.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to
“Partial Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a
predetermined speed. When the vehicle speed
slows below the predetermined speed the
system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive
modes (if equipped).
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indi-
cator Light” in the instrument cluster
will come on when the ignition is
turned to the “ESC on” mode. It
should go out with the engine running. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”
comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (km) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as
soon as possible to have the problem diag-
nosed and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” (located in the instrument cluster) starts
to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Acti-
vation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash
during acceleration, ease up on the accelerator
and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func-
tionality of ESC, (except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section), has
been disabled and the “ESC Off Indicator
Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING!
In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine
torque reduction and stability features are
disabled. Therefore, enhanced vehicle
stability offered by the ESC system is
unavailable. In an emergency evasive
maneuver, the ESC system will not engage
to assist in maintaining stability. ESC “Full
Off” mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only.
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
cannot prevent the natural laws of physics
from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded by prevailing
road conditions. ESC cannot prevent all
accidents, including those resulting from
excessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also
cannot prevent collisions.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
SAFETY 149
NOTE:
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” come
on momentarily each time the ignition is
turned ON.
Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC
system will be on even if it was turned off
previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indi-
cates the customer has elected to
have the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) in a reduced mode.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
Hill Descent Control (HDC) is intended for low
speed off road driving while in 4L Range. HDC
maintains vehicle speed while descending hills
during various driving situations. HDC controls
vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not acti-
vate)
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application)
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed)
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but
the following conditions must also be met to
enable HDC:
Driveline is in 4L Range
Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h)
Park brake is released
Driver door is closed (If doors are attached,
then door must be closed. If doors are
detached, then driver seatbelt must be
buckled)
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate automati-
cally if driven down a grade of sufficient magni-
tude. The set speed for HDC is selectable by the
driver, and can be adjusted by using the gear
shift +/-. The following summarizes the HDC set
speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but
will not activate
R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 SAFETY
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for HDC
target speed selection, but will not affect the
gear chosen by the transmission. When actively
controlling HDC the transmission will shift
appropriately for the driver-selected set speed
and corresponding driving conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at anytime.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if
any of the following conditions occur:
Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle
or brake application
Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h)
Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
magnitude, is on level ground, or is on an
uphill grade
Vehicle is shifted to PARK (P)
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of
the following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch
The driveline is shifted out of 4L Range
The park brake is applied
Driver door opens (Driver door opens if doors
are attached or driver seatbelt is unbuckled if
doors are detached)
The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds
The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately)
HDC detects excessive brake temperature
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
HDC switch has an indicator light, which offers
feedback to the driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch indicator light will
illuminate and remain on solid when HDC is
enabled or activated. This is the normal oper-
ating condition for HDC.
The cluster icon and switch indicator light will
flash for several seconds then extinguish
when the driver pushes the HDC switch but
enable conditions are not met.
The cluster icon and switch indicator light will
flash for several seconds then extinguish
when HDC disables due to excess speed.
The cluster icon and switch indicator light will
flash when HDC deactivates due to over-
heated brakes. The flashing will stop and
HDC will activate again once the brakes have
cooled sufficiently.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The Hill Start Assist (HSA) system is designed to
mitigate roll back from a complete stop while on
an incline. If the driver releases the brake while
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to hold
the brake pressure for a short period. If the
driver does not apply the throttle before this
time expires, the system will release brake pres-
sure and the vehicle will roll down the hill as
normal.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending
hills. The driver must remain attentive to the
driving conditions and is responsible for
maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
SAFETY 151
The following conditions must be met in order
for HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled
The vehicle must be stopped
Park brake must be off
Driver door must be closed. (If the doors are
attached, then the door must be closed. If the
doors are detached then the driver's seatbelt
must be buckled)
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE (R) gear)
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate if
the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL
(N). For vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
will remain active.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll
back while towing a trailer.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking (RAB) may reduce the time
required to reach full braking during emergency
braking situations. It anticipates when an emer-
gency braking situation may occur by moni-
toring how fast the throttle is released by the
driver. The EBC will prepare the brake system
for a panic stop.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA
is not a substitute for active driving
involvement. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to be attentive to distance to
other vehicles, people, and objects, and most
importantly brake operation to ensure safe
operation of the vehicle under all road
conditions. Your complete attention is always
required while driving to maintain safe control
of your vehicle. Failure to follow these
warnings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated
and deactivated with the brake switch. If so,
there may not be enough brake pressure to
hold both the vehicle and the trailer on a hill
when the brake pedal is released. In order to
avoid rolling down an incline while resuming
acceleration, manually activate the trailer
brake or apply more vehicle brake pressure
prior to releasing the brake pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting your vehicle.
Also, be certain to place the transmission in
PARK (P).
Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision or serious personal injury.
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 SAFETY
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support (RBS) may improve braking
performance in wet conditions. It will periodi-
cally apply a small amount of brake pressure to
remove any water buildup on the front brake
rotors. It functions when the windshield wipers
are in LO or HI speed. When RBS is active, there
is no notification to the driver and no driver
interaction is required.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) uses sensors in the
vehicle to recognize an excessively swaying
trailer and will take the appropriate actions to
attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become
active automatically once an excessively
swaying trailer is recognized.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda-
tions. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the
engine power may be reduced and you may feel
the brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” or “Full Off” modes.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The Traction Control System (TCS) monitors the
amount of wheel spin of each of the driven
wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may
apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s)
and/or reduce engine power to provide
enhanced acceleration and stability. A feature
of the TCS, Brake Limited Differential (BLD),
functions similar to a limited slip differential
and controls the wheel spin across a driven
axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning
faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more
engine torque to be applied to the wheel that is
not spinning. BLD may remain enabled even if
TCS and Electronic Stability Control (ESC) are in
a reduced mode.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system uses
two radar-based sensors, located inside the tail-
lights, to detect highway licensable vehicles
(automobiles, trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that
enter the blind spot zones from the rear/front/
side of the vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning
light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rear view mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
or REVERSE (R) and enters standby mode when
the vehicle is in PARK (P).
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer
sway.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
SAFETY 153
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one lane width on both sides of the vehicle 12 ft
(3.8 m). The zone length starts at the outside
rear view mirror and extends approximately
10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detec-
tion zones on both sides of the vehicle when the
vehicle speed reaches approximately 6 mph
(10 km/h) or higher and will alert the driver of
vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer.
Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is
clear for both your vehicle and trailer before
making a lane change. If the trailer or other
object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment)
extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this
may result in the BSM warning light
remaining illuminated the entire time the
vehicle is in a forward gear.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience drop outs (blinking on and off) of
the side mirror Warning Indicator lamps
when a motorcycle or any small object
remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple
of seconds).
The area on taillights, where the radar sensors
are located, must remain free of snow, ice, and
dirt/road contamination so that the BSM
system can function properly. Do not block the
taillights where the radar sensors are located
with foreign objects (bumper stickers, bicycle
racks, etc.).
BSM Radar Location (Left Side Shown)
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects in
the detection zones by illuminating the BSM
warning light located in the outside mirrors in
addition to sounding an audible (chime) alert
and reducing the radio volume. Refer to “Modes
Of Operation” for further information.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
from three different entry points (side, rear,
front) while driving to see if an alert is neces-
sary. The BSM system will issue an alert during
these types of zone entries.
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 SAFETY
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle
on either side and enter the rear detection zone
with a relative speed of less than 30 mph
(48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h) and the
vehicle remains in the blind spot for approxi-
mately 1.5 seconds, the warning light will be
illuminated. If the difference in speed between
the two vehicles is greater than 15 mph
(24 km/h), the warning light will not illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
SAFETY 155
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However, occa-
sionally the system may alert on such objects.
This is normal operation and your vehicle does
not require service.
Stationary Objects
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the
vehicle in adjacent lanes.
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is intended
to aid the driver when backing out of parking
spaces where their vision of oncoming vehicles
may be blocked. Proceed slowly and cautiously
out of the parking space until the rear end of the
vehicle is exposed. The RCP system will then
have a clear view of the cross traffic and if an
oncoming vehicle is detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to
objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 SAFETY
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be obscured by vehicles parked on either side.
If the sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE
(R), the driver is alerted using both the visual
and audible alarms, including reducing the
radio volume.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are avail-
able in the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” for further
information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal is
then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn
signal and detected object are present on the
same side at the same time, both the visual and
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will be
no visual or audible alerts from either the BSM
or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time
the vehicle is started the previously stored
mode will be recalled and used.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a back
up aid system. It is intended to be used to
help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in a
parking lot situation. Drivers must be careful
when backing up, even when using RCP.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before backing
up. Failure to do so can result in serious
injury or death.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
SAFETY 157
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped
The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) system
provides the driver with audible, visual warnings
(within the instrument cluster display), and may
apply a haptic warning in the form of a brake
jerk, to warn the driver when it detects a poten-
tial frontal collision. The warnings are intended
to provide the driver with enough time to react,
avoid or mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver
will be provided with audible and visual warn-
ings as well as a possible haptic warning in the
form of a brake jerk.
If the driver does not take action based upon
these progressive warnings, then the system
will provide a limited level of active braking to
help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn-
ings by braking and the system determines that
the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake
force, the system will compensate and provide
additional brake force as required.
If a FCW with Mitigation event begins at a speed
below 32 mph (52 km/h), the system may
provide the maximum braking possible to miti-
gate the potential forward collision. If the
Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation event
stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds
and then release the brakes.
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 SAFETY
FCW Message
When the system determines a collision with
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,
the warning message will be deactivated.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
3 mph (5 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or
sign posts based on the course prediction.
This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
activation and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To
prevent such misuse of the system, after four
Active Braking events within a key cycle, the
Active Braking portion of FCW will be deacti-
vated until the next key cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such
as overhead objects, ground reflections,
objects not in the path of the vehicle,
stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the
same or higher rate of speed.
FCW will be disabled like ACC, with the
unavailable screens.
Turning FCW On or Off
The FCW button is located in the Uconnect
display in the control settings. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the
Owner's Manual for further information.
To turn the FCW system on, press the forward
collision button once.
To turn the FCW system off, press the forward
collision button once.
NOTE:
When the FCW is “on”, this allows the system
to warn the driver of a possible collision with
the vehicle in front.
When the FCW is “off”, this prevents the
system from warning the driver of a possible
collision with the vehicle in front. If the FCW
is set to “off”, “FCW OFF” will be displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
When FCW status is set to “Only Warning”,
this prevents the system from providing
limited active braking, or additional brake
support if the driver is not braking adequately
in the event of a potential frontal collision.
When FCW status is set to “Warning and
Braking”, this allows the system to warn the
driver of a possible collision with the vehicle
in front using audible/visual warnings and it
applies autonomous braking.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
can FCW detect every type of potential
collision. The driver has the responsibility to
avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via
braking and steering. Failure to follow this
warning could lead to serious injury or death.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
SAFETY 159
The system will retain the last setting
selected by the driver after ignition shut-
down.
FCW Braking Status And Sensitivity
The FCW Sensitivity and Active Braking status
are programmable through the Uconnect
System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multi-
media” for further information.
Far
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Far” setting and the system status is
“Only Warning”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible more distant
collisions with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings.
More cautious drivers that do not mind
frequent warnings may prefer this
setting.
Medium
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Medium” setting and the system status
is “Only Warning”, this allows the system
to warn the driver of a possible collision
with the vehicle in front using audible/
visual warnings.
Near
When the sensitivity of FCW is set to the
“Near” setting and the system status is
"Only Warning”, this allows the system to
warn the driver of a possible closer colli-
sions with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings.
This setting provides less reaction time
than the “Far” and “Medium” settings,
which allows for a more dynamic driving
experience.
More dynamic or aggressive drivers that
want to avoid frequent warnings may
prefer this setting.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster displays “ACC/FCW
Limited Functionality” or “ACC/FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield” momen-
tarily, there may be a condition that limits FCW
functionality. Although the vehicle is still driv-
able under normal conditions, the active
braking may not be fully available. Once the
condition that limited the system performance
is no longer present, the system will return to its
full performance state. If the problem persists,
see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster displays:
ACC/FCW Unavailable Service Required
Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service Required
This indicates there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still drivable under
normal conditions, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 SAFETY
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure based
on the vehicle recommended cold placard pres-
sure.
NOTE:
The alert warning on the cluster will stay on until
the tire is inflated to the placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(6.5°C). This means that when the outside
temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle
has not been driven for at least three hours, or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for infor-
mation on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s
tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven. This is normal and there
should be no adjustment for this increased
pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pres-
sure if the tire pressure falls below the low-pres-
sure warning limit for any reason, including low
temperature effects and natural pressure loss
through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low
tire pressure as long as the condition exists,
and will not turn off until the tire pressure is at
or above the recommended cold placard pres-
sure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light) illu-
minates, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the TPMS Light to turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
The system will automatically update and the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures. The
vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
SAFETY 161
For example, your vehicle may have a recom-
mended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If
the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately
24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low
enough to turn on the TPMS Warning Light.
Driving the vehicle may cause the tire pressure
to rise to approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but
the TPMS Warning Light will still be on. In this
situation, the TPMS Warning Light will turn off
only after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance, or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if
underinflation has not reached the level to
trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning
Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
actual tire pressure in the tire.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been estab-
lished for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPM
sensor is not designed for use on after-
market wheels, and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance.
Customers are encouraged to use Original
Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) wheels to
assure TPMS feature operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 SAFETY
System Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following compo-
nents:
Receiver module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster
Tire Pressure Monitoring warning light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster and a
chime will sound when tire pressure is
low in one or more of the four active road tires.
In addition, the instrument cluster will display a
"Tire Low" message for a minimum of five
seconds, an "Inflate to XX" message and a
graphic showing the pressure values of each
tire with the low tire pressure values in a
different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with low pressure
(those in a different color in the instrument
cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value as shown in the
"Inflate to XX" message. Once the system
receives the updated tire pressures, the system
will automatically update, the pressure values
in the graphic display in the instrument cluster
will return to their original color, and the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warning
Light off.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
SAFETY 163
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then remain on solid. The system
fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE TIRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM" message for a minimum of
five seconds and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure value to indicate which
sensor is not being received.
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the TPMS
Warning Light will no longer flash, and the
“SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message
will no longer display, and a pressure value will
display in place of the dashes. A system fault
can occur due to any of the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors
Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors
Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching
Full Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching
full size does not have a Tire Pressure
Monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
will not monitor the pressure in the
compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching
full size spare tire in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, upon the next ignition cycle,
the TPMS Warning Light will remain on and
a chime will sound. In addition, the graphic
in the instrument cluster will still display a
different color pressure value and an
"Inflate to XX" message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the
TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will display
a “Service Tire Pressure System” message
for five seconds and then display dashes (--)
in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a chime
will sound, the TPMS Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on solid, and the instrument cluster
will display a “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE
SYSTEM” message for five seconds and
then display dashes (--) in place of the pres-
sure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the compact spare or non-matching full
size, the TPMS will update automatically. In
addition, the TPMS Warning Light will turn
off and the graphic in the instrument cluster
will display a new pressure value instead of
dashes (--), as long as no tire pressure is
below the low-pressure warning limit in any
of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 SAFETY
Vehicles With a Full Size Matching Spare
1. If your vehicle is equipped with a matching
full-size spare wheel and tire assembly, it
has a tire pressure monitoring sensor, and
can be monitored by the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) when swapped
with a low pressure road tire.
2. In the event that the matching full-size
spare tire is swapped with a low pressure
road tire, the next ignition switch cycle will
still show the TPMS Warning Light to be on,
a chime to sound, an Inflate to XX message
to appear in the instrument cluster, and the
graphic display will still show the low tire
pressure value in a different color.
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) will turn off the
TPMS Warning Light as long as none of road
tires are below the low pressure warning
threshold.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all
four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with
wheel and tire assemblies that do not have
TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter
wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires not
equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPM)
Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime,
the TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on. The instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE
SYSTEM” message and then display dashes (--) in
place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE
TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message in the
instrument cluster but dashes (--) will remain in
place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
equipped with TPMS sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75
seconds and then turn off. The instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TIRE PRES-
SURE SYSTEM” message and then display pres-
sure values in place of the dashes. On the next
ignition cycle the "SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE
SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed
as long as no system fault exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
SAFETY 165
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved
by the party responsible for compliance could void
the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on others. If
you are not sure, ask an authorized dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your passen-
gers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to “Child
Restraints” in this section for further infor-
mation) must be secured in the appropriate
child restraint or belt-positioning booster
seat in a rear seating position.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint (Refer to “Child Restraints” in this
section for further information).
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and deploy-
ment occurs, the side air bags will inflate
forcefully into the space between occupants
and the door and occupants could be
injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, refer to the “Customer Assistance”
section for customer service contact infor-
mation.
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 SAFETY
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position,
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on
the outboard front passenger seat or when the
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
SAFETY 167
(Continued)
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recom-
mended that pets be restrained in the rear seat
(if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts, and cargo is
properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recom-
mend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until the driver and
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal condi-
tions. However, in a collision the seat belt will
lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside
of the vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 SAFETY
(Continued)
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
SAFETY 169
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automati-
cally retract to its stowed position. If neces-
sary, slide the latch plate down the webbing
to allow the seat belt to retract fully.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grasp and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger
seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower
position, and if you are taller than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a higher
position. After you release the anchorage button,
try to move it up or down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
(if equipped) is in its lowest position, an autho-
rized dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt
Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be
used only if the existing seat belt is not long
enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is not
required for a different occupant, it must be
removed.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-
cally required in order to properly fit the
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the
Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
SAFETY 171
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision. Preten-
sioners work for all size occupants, including
those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu-
pant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air
bags, the pretensioners are single use items. A
deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use the
Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not
long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not
needed.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 SAFETY
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-
tions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used to secure
a child restraint system. For additional informa-
tion, refer to “Installing Child Restraints Using
The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child
Restraints” section of this manual. The figure
below illustrates the locking feature for each
seating position.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Locations (Two-Door Models)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Locations (Four-Door Models)
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then care-
fully pull out only the amount of webbing neces-
sary to comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the buckle
until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be prop-
erly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle with
a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down-
ward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
SAFETY 173
(Continued)
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and inter-
connecting wiring associated with the electrical
Air Bag System Components. Your vehicle may
be equipped with the following Air Bag System
Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of
the electronic parts of the air bag
system whenever the ignition switch
is in the START or ON/RUN position. If
the ignition switch is in the OFF position or in the
ACC position, the air bag system is not on and
the air bags will not inflate.
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in colli-
sions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 SAFETY
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes discon-
nected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illu-
minate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be
disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect
the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light will illuminate on the instrument panel.
The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay
on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the Redun-
dant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a
fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air
Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the Redun-
dant Air Bag Warning Light refer to “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” section of this
manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove compart-
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
SAFETY 175
(Continued)
ment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are
embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multi-
stage driver and front passenger air bags. This
system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system compo-
nents.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag deploy-
ment. A low energy output is used in less severe
collisions. A higher energy output is used for
more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
This vehicle has an Occupant Classification
System (OCS) in the front passenger seat. The
OCS is designed to activate or deactivate the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag depending
on the occupant’s seated weight. It is designed
to deactivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag for an unoccupied seat and for occupants
whose seated weight classifies them in a cate-
gory other than a properly seated adult. This
could be a child, teenager, or even an adult.
The Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) Indicator
Light (an amber light located on the overhead
sports bar) tells the driver and front passenger
when the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is
deactivated. The PAD Indicator Light illuminates
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 SAFETY
(Continued)
the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” to show
that the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will
not deploy during a collision.
NOTE:
When the front passenger seat is empty or
when very light objects are placed on the seat,
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not
deploy even though the Passenger Air Bag
Disable (PAD) System Indicator Light is NOT illu-
minated.
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover colli-
sions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck under-
rides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators
of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring the
front air bags, it signals the inflator units. A large
quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate
the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is
part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to activate or deacti-
vate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
depending on the occupant’s seated weight. It
is designed to deactivate the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied seat
and for occupants whose seated weight classi-
fies them in a category other than a properly
seated adult. This could be a child, teenager, or
even an adult.
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them manu-
ally. You may damage the air bags and you
could be injured because the air bags may
no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags
are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
SAFETY 177
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Consists Of The Following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
Sensor located in the front passenger seat
Passenger Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator
Light – an amber light located on the over-
head sports bar
Air Bag Warning Light
Passenger Seat Belt
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And
Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
located underneath the front passenger seat.
The Sensor is located beneath the passenger
seat cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will
be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input
from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classification. The
OCM communicates this information to the
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to deter-
mine whether it should activate or deactivate
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. In order
for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright
Facing forward
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor
Sitting with their back against the seat back
and the seat back in an upright position
Seated Properly
The OCS may deactivate the deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS
estimates that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or
has very light objects in it.
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
rear-facing child restraint.
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
child, including a child seated in a
forward-facing child restraint or booster seat.
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
small passenger, including a child or small
adult.
The front passenger is not properly seated or
his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a
period of time.
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 SAFETY
* When the front passenger seat is empty or
when very light objects are placed on the seat
and the seat belt is unbuckled, the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even
though the PAD System Indicator Light is NOT
illuminated.
** It is possible for a child to be classified as an
adult, allowing the deployment of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag. Never allow children to
ride in the front passenger seat and never
install a child restraint system, including a
rear-facing child restraint, in the front
passenger seat.
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Front
Passenger
Seat
Occupant
Status
Front
Passenger
Advanced
Air Bag
Disabled
Indicator
Light
(“PAD”)
Status
Front
Passenger
Air Bag
Status
Unoccupied
seat*
Unbuckled
NOT
ILLUMINATED
DEACTIVATED
Unoccupied
seat*Buckled
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
DEACTIVATED
Grocery bags,
heavy
briefcases,
and other
relatively light
objects
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
DEACTIVATED
Rear-facing
child
restraint**
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
DEACTIVATED
Child,
including a
child in a
forward-facin
g child
restraint or
booster
seat**
“PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
DEACTIVATED
Small adult “PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF”
DEACTIVATED
Properly
seated adult
NOT
ILLUMINATED
ACTIVATED
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Front
Passenger
Seat
Occupant
Status
Front
Passenger
Advanced
Air Bag
Disabled
Indicator
Light
(“PAD”)
Status
Front
Passenger
Air Bag
Status
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
SAFETY 179
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled
(PAD) Indicator Light
The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled
(PAD) Indicator Light (an amber light located on
the overhead sports bar) tells the driver and
front passenger when the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag is deactivated. The PAD Indicator
light illuminates the words “PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF” to show that the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not deploy during a collision.
When the front passenger seat is empty or
when very light objects are placed on the seat
and the seat belt is unbuckled, the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even
though the PAD indicator light is NOT illumi-
nated.
The PAD indicator light should not be illumi-
nated when an adult passenger is properly
seated in the front passenger seat. The driver
and adult passenger should verify that the PAD
Indicator Light is not illuminated when an adult
is riding in the front passenger seat. If an adult
is not seated properly, the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag may deactivate and the PAD Indi-
cator Light will be illuminated.
The PAD Indicator Light should be illuminated
and the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
should be deactivated for most properly seated
and restrained children in the passenger seat
and for most properly installed child restraint
systems. However, under certain conditions,
even with a properly installed child restraint
system, the PAD Indicator Light may not be illu-
minated, even though the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag is deactivated. This can occur if
the child restraint is lighter than the lightest
weight necessary to illuminate the PAD Indi-
cator Light. NEVER assume the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated unless
the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the
words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF.”
NOTE:
If the seat belt is buckled for an empty seat, the
PAD Indicator Light will illuminate.
If The PAD Indicator Light Is Illuminated For An
Adult Passenger:
If an adult passenger is seated in the front
passenger seat and the PAD Indicator Light is
illuminated, the passenger may be sitting
improperly. Follow the steps below to allow the
OCS to detect the adult passenger’s seated
weight to activate the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag:
1. Turn off the vehicle and have the adult
passenger step out of the vehicle.
2. Remove any extra materials from the
passenger seat, such as cushions, pads,
seat covers, seat massagers, blankets,
extra clothing, etc.
3. Place the seatback in the full upright posi-
tion.
4. Have the adult passenger sit in the center of
the seat, with the passenger’s feet comfort-
ably on or near the floor, and with their back
against the seatback.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the passenger
remain in this seated position for two to
three minutes after restarting the vehicle.
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 SAFETY
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small
Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a
small adult, occupies the passenger seat, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may be
deactivated. Therefore, the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag may or may not be acti-
vated for a lighter weight passenger, including a
small adult (depending on size) who is seated in
the passenger seat. This does not mean that
the OCS is working improperly.
The driver and passenger must always use the
PAD Indicator Light as a determination of
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
is activated or deactivated. If the PAD Indicator
Light is illuminated with the words “PASSENGER
AIR BAG OFF” when an adult is in the front
passenger seat, have the passenger reposition
his or her body in the seat until the PAD Indi-
cator Light goes out.
If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with the
words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not
inflate in the event of a collision.
Do Not Decrease OR Increase The Front
Passenger’s Seated Weight On The Front
Passenger Seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be
properly positioned on the front passenger seat.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury or
death. The OCS determines the most probable
classification of the occupant that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s
decreased or increased seated weight, which
may result in deactivation or activation of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision.
This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat may
result in deactivation of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag causing serious injury or
death. Increasing the front passenger’s seated
weight on the front passenger seat may result in
activation of the Passenger Advanced Front Air
WARNING!
If the PAD Indicator Light remains illumi-
nated for an adult passenger, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately. Failure to do so may
cause serious injury or death. If the PAD
Indicator Light is illuminated with the words
"PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF," the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy in
the event of a collision.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
SAFETY 181
Bag. Examples of improper front passenger
seating include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm
rest or instrument panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways,
or turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the
full upright position.
The front passenger carries or holds an
object while seated (e.g., backpack, box,
etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger
seat.
Objects are lodged between the front
passenger seat and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated
weight on the front passenger seat are
attached to the front passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the
front passenger seat is seated improperly, the
occupant may provide an output signal to the
OCS that is different from the occupant’s prop-
erly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 SAFETY
(Continued)
The Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate
whenever the OCS is unable to classify the front
passenger seat status.
A malfunction in the OCS may affect the opera-
tion of the air bag system. If the Air Bag Warning
Light does not come on, or stays on after you
start the vehicle, or it comes on as you drive,
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical
OCS components that may affect Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the
OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a
front seat passenger, the OCS components
must function as designed. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If
the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service
for any reason, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat accesso-
ries may be used.
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teen-
ager or adult in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different from the occupant’s properly
seated weight input. This may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position,
your back against the seatback, sitting
upright, facing forward, in the center of the
seat, with your feet comfortably on or near
the floor.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back-
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front
passenger seat. Holding an object may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different than the occupant’s properly
seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t
have the air bags to protect you in a colli-
sion. If the light does not come on as a bulb
check when the ignition is first turned on,
stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it
comes on as you drive, have an authorized
dealer service the air bag system immedi-
ately.
Placing an object on the floor under the
front passenger seat may prevent the OCS
from working properly, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision. Do not
place any objects on the floor under the
front passenger seat.
If there is a fault present in the OCS, both
the PAD Indicator Light and the Air Bag
Warning Light will illuminate to show that
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag is
deactivated. Should this occur, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will
remain deactivated until the fault is
cleared. This indicates that you should take
the vehicle to an authorized dealer for
service immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
SAFETY 183
The following requirements must be strictly
followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat
assembly or components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat
covers or cushions not designated by FCA US
LLC for the specific model being repaired.
Always use the correct seat cover and
cushion specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with
an aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS
related component or fastener be modified
or replaced with any part except those which
are approved by FCA US LLC.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved inter-
action with the front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with a “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service proce-
dures to the passenger seat assembly, its
related components, seat cover, or cushion
may inadvertently change the air bag
deployment in case of a frontal collision.
This could result in death or serious injury
to the front passenger if the vehicle is
involved in a collision. A modified vehicle
may not comply with required Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities,
contact an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 SAFETY
(Continued)
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occu-
pant injury during certain side impacts, in addi-
tion to the injury reduction potential provided by
the seat belts and body structure.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the appro-
priate response to impact events. The system is
calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on the
impact side of the vehicle during impacts that
require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side
impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy inde-
pendently; a left side impact deploys the left
Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side colli-
sions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
SAFETY 185
(Continued)
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate imme-
diately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protec-
tion in all collisions. They also help keep
you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be
properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
WARNING! (Continued)
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 SAFETY
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gener-
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-
tion. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another colli-
sion, the air bags will not be in place to protect
you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the ORC will determine whether to have the
Enhanced Accident Response System perform
the following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped).
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped).
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power.
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for
15 minutes from the intervention of the
Enhanced Accident Response System.
Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt
pretensioners cannot protect you in another
collision. Have the air bags, seat belt
pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Also, have the Occupant
Restraint Controller System serviced as well.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
SAFETY 187
(Continued)
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the igni-
tion to the START or ON/OFF position and
remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid
draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle
for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or
damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
headlights) after an accident, reset the system
by following the procedure described below. If
you have any doubt, contact an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System Reset
Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident
Response System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from ignition
START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Carefully
check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine
compartment and on the ground near the
engine compartment and fuel tank before reset-
ting the system and starting the engine.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body
structure, or add aftermarket side steps or
running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci-
dentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 SAFETY
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under-
standing of the circumstances in which crashes
and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equip-
ment is required, and access to the vehicle or
the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such as law
enforcement, that have the special equipment,
can read the information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride prop-
erly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the instruc-
tions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s
Manual and on all the labels attached to the
child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehicle-
safety/safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
SAFETY 189
(Continued)
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint.
Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear-facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers Children who are two years old or younger and
who have not reached the height or weight limits
of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of their
rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point
Harness, facing forward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Larger Children Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit
the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints Children 12 years old or younger, who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their
booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the
vehicle
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 SAFETY
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use
a belt-positioning booster seat until the
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat
belt.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was “no,
” then the child still needs to use a booster seat
in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/
shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can loosen
the child restraint attachments. Remove
the child restraint before adjusting the
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
SAFETY 191
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
position the seat belt on the child correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child
properly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt
correctly.
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top
Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing Child Restraint Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Rear-Facing Child Restraint More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There
are two lower anchorages located at the back of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback
and one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used
with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions (Two-Door Models)
LATCH Positions (Four-Door Models)
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
SAFETY 193
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH
anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the child and
the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether anchor
instead of the LATCH system once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system to attach
a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed by the
booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more
information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center
position using the inner LATCH lower anchorages
from the outboard seating positions?
Two Door Models –
N/A
Four Door Models –
Yes
Four Door Only: You can install child restraints with flexible lower anchors in
the center position. The inner anchorages are 18.5 inches (484 mm) apart.
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower anchors in the center position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the
center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages, use the
seat belt to install a child seat in the center position next to a child seat using
the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back
of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child restraint owner’s
manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Two Door Models –
No
Four Door Models –
Yes
Two Door Models — None
Four Door — The center head restraint can be removed if it interferes with the
installation of the child restraint.
See “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 SAFETY
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint
interferes with the installation of the child
restraint, the head restraint may be folded and
the child seat installed in front of it (Two-Door
Models).
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback.
They are just visible when you lean
into the rear seat to install the child restraint.
You will easily feel them if you run your finger
along the gap between the seatback and seat
cushion. If your vehicle is equipped with
anchorage symbols on the seatback, they will
be located just above the lower anchorages.
LATCH Anchorages (Two-Door Models)
LATCH Anchorages (Four-Door Models)
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Two-Door Models:
There are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position
located on the back of the seat,
near the floor.
Tether Strap Anchorages (Two-Door Models)
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its
upright position when the seat is to be used
by an occupant who is not in a child restraint.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
SAFETY 195
(Continued)
Four-Door Models:
There are tether strap anchorages behind each
rear seating position located on the back of the
seat.
Tether Strap Anchorages (Four-Door Models)
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Two-Door Models:
Four-Door Models:
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower
attachments in the center seating position. Only
install this type of child restraint in the outboard
seating positions. Child restraints with flexible,
webbing mounted lower attachments can be
installed in any rear seating position.
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switch-
able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat
belt, stow the seat belt, following the instruc-
tions below. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. For
some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and / or raise the head
WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating
position. Do not use the center lower LATCH
anchorages to install a child seat in the
center of the back seat.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. If you
are installing LATCH-compatible child
restraints next to each other, you must use
the seat belt for the center position. You can
then use either the LATCH anchors or the
vehicle’s seat belt for installing child seats in
the outboard positions.
Please refer to “Installing The
LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint System” for
typical installation instructions.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 SAFETY
(Continued)
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly
by pulling back and forth on the child seat at
the belt path. It should not move more than
1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle
Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
SAFETY 197
The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-
tions are equipped with a Switchable Automatic
Locking Retractor (ALR) that is designed to keep
the lap portion of the seat belt tight around the
child restraint so that it is not necessary to use
a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be
“switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of
the webbing out of the retractor and then letting
the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it
is locked, the ALR will make a clicking noise
while the webbing is pulled back into the
retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” descrip-
tion in “Switchable Automatic Locking Retrac-
tors (ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems”
for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor Locations
(Two-Door Models)
Automatic Locking Retractor Locations
(Four-Door Models)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 SAFETY
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint
interferes with the installation of the child
restraint, the head restraint may be folded and
the child seat installed in front of it (Two-Door
Models).
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the child
restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the seat belt to
attach a forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the
Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to
install a forward facing child restraint, up to the
recommended weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of the front
passenger seat?
Yes Contact between the front passenger seat and the child
restraint is allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also
allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? Two Door Models – No
Four Door Models –
Yes
Two Door — None
Four Door — The center head restraint can be removed if it
interferes with the installation of the child restraint.
See “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for
further information.
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat belt
against the belt path of the child restraint?
No Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an
ALR retractor.
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in its
upright position when the seat is to be used
by an occupant who is not in a child restraint.
Sitting in a seat with the head restraint in its
lowered position could result in serious injury
or death in a collision.
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
SAFETY 199
Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. For some second row
seats, you may need to recline the seat
and/or raise the head restraint (if adjust-
able) to get a better fit. If the rear seat can
be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
the section “Installing Child Restraints
Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-
tions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any direc-
tion.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 SAFETY
(Continued)
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
1. Look behind the seating position where
you plan to install the child restraint to find
the tether anchorage. You may need to
move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is
no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and
where possible, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the two
posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around
the outboard side of the head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models)
Tether Strap Mounting
(Four-Door Models With Center Armrest)
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See the section “Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System” for the
location of approved tether anchorages in
your vehicle.
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
SAFETY 201
(Continued)
(Continued)
Center Tether Attachment — Four-Door
Without Center Armrest
1. If adjustable, lower the adjustable center
head restraint to the full down position.
2. Route the tether strap over the seatback
and head restraint.
Tether Strap Mounting
(Four-Door Models Without Center Armrest)
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the center tether anchorage
located on the back of the seat.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
Exhaust Gas
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety
tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 SAFETY
(Continued)
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly main-
tained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent mechanic inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In addi-
tion, inspect the exhaust system each time the
vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil change.
Replace as required.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the igni-
tion switch is first turned to ON/RUN. If the light
is either not on during starting, stays on, or
turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light has been detected, it will stay on until the
fault is removed. If the light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving, have an
authorized dealer service the vehicle immedi-
ately. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not inter-
fere with the operation of the pedal assemblies.
Only use a floor mat that is securely attached
using the floor mat fasteners so it cannot slip
out of position and interfere with the pedal
assemblies or impair safe operation of your
vehicle in other ways.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your
heating or cooling controls to force outside
air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high
speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to
interfere with the accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and cause a loss of vehicle control. To
prevent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
SAFETY 203
(Continued)
(Continued)
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or stack an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured to
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if
present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
WARNING! (Continued)
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 SAFETY
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the wheel nuts for tightness. Check the
tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation
pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam indi-
cator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
205
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
fasten your seat belts.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Apply the parking brake, place the gear selector
in NEUTRAL, and press the clutch pedal before
starting the vehicle. This vehicle is equipped
with a clutch interlocking ignition system. It will
not start unless the clutch pedal is pressed to
the floor.
Four-Wheel Drive Models Only
In 4L mode, if the vehicle is stalled, the engine
will start regardless of whether or not the clutch
pedal is pressed to the floor. This feature
enhances off-road performance by allowing the
vehicle to start when in 4L without having to
press the clutch pedal. The “4WD Low Indicator
Light” will illuminate when the transfer case has
been shifted into this mode.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Start the vehicle with the gear selector in the
PARK position (vehicle can also be started in
NEUTRAL). Apply the brake before shifting to
any driving range.
Normal Starting
To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE
START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to start
the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the
starter will disengage automatically after
10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push the
button again.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the ignition and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or pressing
the accelerator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE START/
STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push
and release the ENGINE START/STOP
button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with
vehicle stopped) and the ENGINE START/
STOP button is pushed once, the transmis-
sion will automatically select PARK and the
engine will turn off, however the ignition will
remain in the ACC mode (NOT the OFF
mode). Never leave a vehicle out of the
PARK position, or it could roll.
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and the
vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h),
pushing the START/STOP button once will
turn the engine off. The ignition will remain
in the ACC mode.
5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph (8 km/h),
the ENGINE START/STOP button must be held
for two seconds (or three short pushes in a
row) to turn the engine off. The ignition will
remain in the ACC mode (NOT the OFF mode) if
the engine is turned off when the transmission
is not in PARK.
NOTE:
The system will automatically time out and the
ignition will cycle to the OFF mode after
30 minutes of inactivity if the ignition is left in
the ACC or RUN (engine not running) mode and
the transmission is in PARK.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three modes:
OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the ignition
modes without starting the vehicle and use the
accessories, follow these steps:
1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF mode,
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once
to place the ignition to the ACC mode
(instrument cluster will display “ACC”),
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the RUN
mode (instrument cluster will display “ON/
RUN”),
4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third
time to return the ignition to the OFF mode
(instrument cluster will display “OFF”).
AutoPark
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist in
placing the vehicle in PARK should the situa-
tions on the following pages occur. It is a
backup system and should not be relied upon
as the primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will
engage are outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
Driver inattention could lead to failure to
place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO A
VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in PARK
by verifying that a solid (not blinking) “P” is
indicated in the instrument cluster display
and on the gear selector. If the "P" indicator
is blinking, your vehicle is not in PARK. As
an added precaution, always apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns
off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these condi-
tions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed trans-
mission
Drivers door is ajar or in conditions where
driver door is removed an additional trigger
would be if the driver is off the seat (seat pad
sensor detects driver missing).
Vehicle is not in PARK
Vehicle speed is 0 mph (0 km/h)
Ignition switched from RUN to OFF
NOTE:
For Keyless Enter-N-Go equipped vehicles, The
engine will turn off and the ignition switch will
change to ACC mode. After 30 minutes the igni-
tion switches to OFF automatically, unless the
driver turns the ignition switch OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits
the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these condi-
tions are met:
Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed trans-
mission
Drivers door is ajar or in conditions where
driver door is removed an additional trigger
would be if the driver is off the seat (seat pad
sensor detects driver missing).
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is removed
Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (2.0 km/h) or less
Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
Driver’s door is ajar
Brake pedal is not depressed
The MESSAGE “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P
then Shift to Gear” will display in the instrument
cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. In these
cases, the shifter must be returned to “P” to
select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle speed
is 1.2 mph (2.0 km/h) or less.
The MESSAGE “Vehicle Speed is Too High to
Shift to P” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph
(2.0 km/h).
AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is not
designed to replace the need to shift your
vehicle into PARK. It is a backup system
and should not be relied upon as the
primary method by which the driver shifts
the vehicle into PARK.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph (2.0 km/h),
the transmission will default to NEUTRAL until
the vehicle speed drops below 1.2 mph
(1.9 km/h). A vehicle left in the NEUTRAL
position can roll. As an added precaution,
always apply the parking brake when exiting
the vehicle.
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
4WD LOW
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
vehicle in 4WD LOW.
The MESSAGE “AutoPark Disabled” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given
when both of these conditions are met:
Vehicle is not in PARK
Driver’s door is ajar
The MESSAGE “AutoPark Not Engaged” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. A warning
chime will continue until you shift the vehicle
into PARK or the driver’s door is closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK
that your vehicle
is in PARK by looking for the "P" in the instru-
ment cluster display and on the shifter. As an
added precaution, always apply the parking
brake when exiting the vehicle.
Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or
−30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these tempera-
tures, use of an externally powered electric
engine block heater (available from your autho-
rized dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails To Start
If the engine fails to start after you have
followed the "Normal Starting" or "Extreme Cold
Weather" procedure, and has not experienced
an extended park condition as identified in
"Extended Park Starting" procedure it may be
flooded. Push the accelerator pedal all the way
to the floor and hold it there. Crank the engine
for no more than 15 seconds. This should clear
any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
Leave the ignition key in the RUN position,
release the accelerator pedal and repeat the
“Normal Starting” procedure.
After Starting
The idle speed is controlled automatically, and
it will decrease as the engine warms up.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could
result in flash fire causing serious personal
injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly. Refer to
“Jump Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
continuously crank the engine for more than
25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds
before trying again.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine, and
permits quicker starts in cold weather. Connect
the cord to a standard 110-115 Volt AC elec-
trical outlet with a grounded, three-wire exten-
sion cord.
The engine block heater must be plugged in at
least one hour to have an adequate warming
effect on the engine.
The engine block heater cord is found under the
hood bundled in front of the battery tray.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle accelera-
tion in low gear can be detrimental and should
be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate conditions under which
vehicle operations will occur.
For the recommended viscosity and quality
grades, refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications”.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
PARKING BRAKE
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to
leave an automatic transmission in PARK, or
manual transmission in REVERSE or FIRST
gear.
The parking brake lever is located in the center
console. To apply the parking brake, pull the
lever up as firmly as possible. To release the
parking brake, pull the lever up slightly, push
the center button, then lower the lever
completely.
Parking Brake Lever
When the parking brake is applied with the igni-
tion switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the
instrument cluster will illuminate.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt AC electrical cord could cause
electrocution.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
NOTE:
When the parking brake is applied and the
automatic transmission is placed in gear, the
“Brake Warning Light” will flash. If vehicle
speed is detected, a chime will sound to alert
the driver. Fully release the parking brake
before attempting to move the vehicle.
This light only shows that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. For vehicles equipped with an automatic
transmission, apply the parking brake before
placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the
load on the transmission locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the gear selector
out of PARK. The parking brake should always
be applied whenever the driver is not in the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position on an auto-
matic transmission as a substitute for the
parking brake. Always apply the parking
brake fully when parked to guard against
vehicle movement and possible injury or
damage.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the ignition and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle or it may roll and cause
damage or injury. Also, be certain to leave
an automatic transmission in PARK, a
manual transmission in REVERSE or first
gear. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle
to roll and cause damage or injury.
CAUTION!
If the “Brake Warning Light” remains on with
the parking brake released, a brake system
malfunction is indicated. Have the brake
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
MANUAL TRANSMISSION — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
During cold weather, you may experience
increased effort in shifting until the transmis-
sion fluid warms up. This is normal.
Manual Transmission Shifter
To shift the gears, fully press the clutch pedal
and place the gear selector into the desired
gear position (the diagram for the engagement
of the gears is displayed on the handle of the
selector).
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL
position, lift the REVERSE ring, located below
the knob and move the gear selector all the way
left and then forward.
Shift Pattern
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting gears.
As you release the clutch pedal, lightly press the
accelerator pedal.
You should always use first gear when starting
from a standing position.
NOTE:
A certain amount of noise from the transmission is
normal. This noise can be most noticeable when
the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL with the clutch
engaged (clutch pedal released), but it may also be
heard when driving. The noise may also be more
noticeable when the transmission is warm. This
noise is normal and is not an indication of a
problem with your clutch or transmission.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the
parking brake fully applied. The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver is
not in the vehicle, especially on an incline.
CAUTION!
Never drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the vehicle
on a hill with the clutch pedal partially
engaged, as this will cause abnormal wear
on the clutch.
Do not drive with your hand resting on the
gear selector as the force exerted, even if
slight, could lead over time to premature
wear of the gearbox internal components.
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission efficiently for both fuel economy and performance, it should be upshifted as listed in recommended shift speed
chart. Shift at the vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily loaded or pulling a trailer these recommended up-shift speeds may not apply.
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for
2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be
significantly less.
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear is
recommended to preserve brakes when driving
down steep hills. In addition, downshifting at
the right time provides better acceleration when
you desire to resume speed. Downshift progres-
sively. Do not skip gears to avoid overspeeding
the engine and clutch.
NOTE:
The manual transmission shift system is
equipped with gear blockers, which will prevent
downshifts into 1st or 2nd gear above certain
vehicle speeds.
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Engine Speeds 1 to 2 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6
3.6L Accel. 15 (24) 24 (39) 50 (80) 65 (104) 70 (112)
Cruise 10 (16) 19 (31) 40 (64) 55 (88) 65 (105)
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip, and the vehicle
could skid.
CAUTION!
Skipping gears and downshifting into lower
gears at higher vehicle speeds can damage the
engine and clutch systems, Any attempt to shift
into lower gear with clutch pedal depressed
may result damage to the clutch system.
Shifting into lower gear and releasing the clutch
may result in engine damage.
When descending a hill, be very careful to
downshift one gear at a time to prevent
overspeeding the engine which can cause
engine damage, and/or clutch damage,
even if the clutch pedal is pressed. If
transfer case is in low range the vehicle
speeds to cause engine and clutch damage
are significantly lower.
Failure to follow the maximum recom-
mended downshifting speeds may cause
the engine damage and/or damage the
clutch, even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
Descending a hill in low range with clutch
pedal depressed could result in clutch
damage.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are for 2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L would be significantly less.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recommended
downshifting speeds may cause the engine to
overspeed and/or damage the clutch disc,
even if the clutch pedal is pressed.
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1
Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)(Continued)
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
CAUTION!
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK before the ignition can be turned to the
OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid inadver-
tently leaving the vehicle without placing the
transmission in PARK. This system also locks
the transmission in PARK whenever the ignition
is in the OFF mode.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK when
the ignition is in the ACC mode (even though the
engine will be off). Ensure that the transmission
is in PARK, and the ignition is OFF (not in ACC
mode) before exiting the vehicle.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmis-
sion Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that holds the
transmission gear selector in PARK unless the
brakes are applied. To shift the transmission
out of PARK, the engine must be running and
the brake pedal must be pressed. The brake
pedal must also be pressed to shift from
NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when the
vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.
Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission
The transmission gear range (PRNDM) is
displayed both beside the gear selector and in
the instrument cluster. To select a gear range,
press the lock button on the gear selector and
move the selector rearward or forward. To shift
the transmission out of PARK, the engine must
be running and the brake pedal must be
pressed. You must also press the brake pedal to
shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds. Select the DRIVE range for normal
driving.
NOTE:
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects PARK while
driving), the position indicator will blink continu-
ously until the selector is returned to the proper
position, or the requested shift can be
completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs,
along with environmental and road conditions.
The transmission electronics are self-cali-
brating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new
vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and precision shifts will
develop within a few hundred miles (kilome-
ters).
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE and MANUAL (Auto-
Stick) shift positions. Manual shifts can be
made using the AutoStick shift control. Toggling
the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+)
while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) position
(beside the DRIVE position) will manually select
the transmission gear, and will display the
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
current gear in the instrument cluster. Refer to
"AutoStick" in this section for further informa-
tion.
Gear Selector
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when
pushed forward), it is probably in the AutoStick
(+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In
AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3,
etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Move the gear selector to the right (into the
DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK,
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Ranges
Do not depress the accelerator pedal when
shifting from PARK or NEUTRAL into another
gear range.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a level surface, you may shift
the transmission into PARK first, and then apply
the parking brake.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK. As an
added precaution, turn the front wheels toward
the curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
Apply the parking brake
Shift the transmission into PARK
Turn the ignition OFF and
Remove the key fob from the vehicle
NOTE:
On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the
transfer case is in a drive position.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the transmission gear selector out of
PARK with the brake pedal released. Make
sure the transmission is in PARK before
exiting the vehicle.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
(Continued)
(Continued)
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock
button on the gear selector and firmly move
the selector all the way forward until it stops
and is fully seated.
The transmission may not engage PARK if
the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shifting to
PARK, and verify that the transmission gear
position indicator solidly indicates PARK (P)
without blinking. Ensure that the vehicle is
completely stopped, and the PARK position
is properly indicated, before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing
the brake pedal, the vehicle could accel-
erate quickly forward or in reverse. You
could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
WARNING! (Continued)
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When exiting the vehicle, always make sure
the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove the
key fob from the vehicle, and lock the
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must start the
engine, and also press the brake pedal.
Otherwise, damage to the gear selector
could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position (P), and is not blinking.
With brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK position (when pushed forward), it is prob-
ably in the AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the
DRIVE position). In AutoStick mode, the trans-
mission gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to
the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for access
to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running.
Apply the parking brake and shift the transmis-
sion into PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE
position provides optimum driving characteris-
tics under all normal operating conditions.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain, trav-
eling into strong head winds, or while towing a
heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control
(refer to "AutoStick" in this section for further
information) to select a lower gear. Under these
conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.
During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F
[-30°C] or below), transmission operation may
be modified depending on engine and transmis-
sion temperature as well as vehicle speed.
Normal operation will resume once the trans-
mission temperature has risen to a suitable
level.
MANUAL (M)
The MANUAL (M, +/-) position (beside the DRIVE
position) enables full manual control of trans-
mission shifting also known as AutoStick mode.
Toggling the gear selector forward (-) or rear-
ward (+) while in the MANUAL (AutoStick) posi-
tion will manually select the transmission gear,
and will display the current gear in the instru-
ment cluster. Refer to “AutoStick” in this
chapter for further information.
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a
collision.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in
NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission
damage.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in this chapter
and “Towing A Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case
Of Emergency” for further information.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored electroni-
cally for abnormal conditions. If a condition is
detected that could result in transmission
damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is acti-
vated. In this mode, the transmission may
operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at
all. Vehicle performance may be severely
degraded and the engine may stall. In some
situations, the transmission may not re-engage
if the engine is turned off and restarted. The
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illumi-
nated. A message in the instrument cluster will
inform the driver of the more serious conditions,
and indicate what actions may be necessary.
In the event of a momentary problem, the trans-
mission can be reset to regain all forward gears
by performing the following steps:
NOTE:
In cases where the instrument cluster message
indicates the transmission may not re-engage
after engine shutdown, perform this procedure
only in a desired location (preferably, at an
authorized dealer).
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if
possible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the
engine turns OFF.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the trans-
mission will return to normal operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
assess the condition of your transmission.
If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized
dealer service is required.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving
you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick
allows you to maximize engine braking, elimi-
nate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
improve overall vehicle performance. This
system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery condi-
tions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and
many other situations.
Operation
To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear
selector into the MANUAL (M) position (beside
the DRIVE position). The current transmission
gear will be displayed in the instrument cluster.
In AutoStick mode, you can use the gear
selector (in the MANUAL position) to manually
shift the transmission. Tapping the gear
selector forward (-) while in the MANUAL (M)
position will downshift the transmission to the
next lower gear. Tapping the selector rearward
(+) will command an upshift.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up
or down when (+/-) is manually selected by the
driver, unless an engine lugging or overspeed
condition would result. It will remain in the
selected gear until another upshift or downshift
is chosen, except as described below.
The transmission will automatically down-
shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine
lugging) and will display the current gear.
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
The transmission will automatically down-
shift to FIRST gear when coming to a stop.
After a stop, the driver should manually
upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is
accelerated.
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or
SECOND gear (or THIRD gear, in 4L range).
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in
SECOND gear. Starting out in SECOND or
THIRD gear can be helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at
too low of a vehicle speed.
Holding the gear selector in the (-) position
will downshift the transmission to the lowest
gear possible at the current speed.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
NOTE:
When Hill Descent Control is enabled, AutoStick
is not active.
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear
selector to the DRIVE position. You can shift in
or out of the AutoStick position at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION
Four-Position Transfer Case
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector
The transfer case provides four mode positions:
2H (Two-Wheel Drive High Range)
4H (Four-Wheel Drive High Range)
N (Neutral)
4L (Four-Wheel Drive Low Range)
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each transfer case mode position, see
the information below:
2H
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
normal street and highway driving on dry, hard
surfaced roads.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle
could skid, causing a collision or personal
injury.
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position
completely can cause transfer case damage
or loss of power and vehicle control. You
could have a collision. Do not drive the
vehicle unless the transfer case is fully
engaged.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
4H
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range
maximizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range provides additional traction
for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
N (Neutral)
Neutral — This range disengages both the front
and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be
used for flat towing behind another vehicle.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range
provides low speed four-wheel drive. It maxi-
mizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range provides additional traction
and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
The transfer case is intended to be driven in the
2H position for normal street and highway
conditions, such as hard-surfaced roads.
In the event that additional traction is required,
the transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be
used to lock the front and rear driveshafts
together, forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. The 4H and 4L posi-
tions are intended for loose, slippery road
surfaces only and not intended for normal
driving. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on
hard-surfaced roads will cause increased tire
wear and damage to the driveline components.
Refer to “Shifting Procedures” in this section for
further information on shifting into 4H or 4L.
The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in four-wheel drive, and the front and
rear driveshafts are locked together. The light
will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted
into the 4H position.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine
speed will be approximately three times (four
times for Rubicon models) that of the 2H or 4H
positions at a given road speed. Take care not
to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and circum-
ference on each wheel. Any difference will
adversely affect shifting and cause damage to
the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedures
2H To 4H Or 4H To 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with
the vehicle stopped or in motion. The preferred
shifting speed would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h).
With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will
engage/disengage faster if you momentarily
release the accelerator pedal after completing
the shift. Do not accelerate while shifting the
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both
the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the automatic transmission is in PARK
(or manual transmission is in gear). The
parking brake should always be applied when
the driver is not in the vehicle.
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
transfer case. Apply a constant force when
shifting the transfer case lever.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The front
and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for
the shift to take place. Shifting while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning can cause
damage to the transfer case.
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or
uneven tire pressures, excessive vehicle
loading, or cold temperatures.
Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is
normal.
During cold weather, you may experience
increased effort in shifting until the transfer
case fluid warms up. This is normal.
4H To 4L Or 4L To 4H
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h), shift an automatic transmission into
NEUTRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal on a
manual transmission. While the vehicle is
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the
transfer case lever firmly to the desired posi-
tion. Do not pause with the transfer case in N
(Neutral). Once the shift is completed, place the
automatic transmission into DRIVE or release
the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
NOTE:
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur
due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned.
Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth
alignment and shift completion to occur. The
preferred method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage
or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster
than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
Five-Position Transfer Case
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector
The transfer case provides five mode positions:
2H (Two-Wheel Drive High Range)
4H AUTO (Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range)
4H PT (Four-Wheel Drive Part Time High
Range)
N (Neutral)
4L (Four-Wheel Drive Low Range)
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position
completely can cause transfer case damage
or loss of power and vehicle control. You
could have a collision. Do not drive the
vehicle unless the transfer case is fully
engaged.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each transfer case mode position, see
the information below:
2H
Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for
normal street and highway driving on dry, hard
surfaced roads.
4H AUTO
Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range
sends power to the front wheels. The four-wheel
drive system will be automatically engaged
when the vehicle senses a loss of traction. Addi-
tional traction for varying road conditions.
4H P-T
Four-Wheel Drive Part Time High Range — This
range maximizes torque to the front driveshaft,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional
traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.
N (Neutral)
Neutral — This range disengages both the front
and rear driveshafts from the powertrain. To be
used for flat towing behind another vehicle.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for further information.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range
provides low speed four-wheel drive. It maxi-
mizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the
front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. This range provides additional traction
and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery
road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph
(40 km/h).
This transfer case is designed to be driven in
the two-wheel drive position (2WD) or
four-wheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for
normal street and highway conditions on dry
hard surfaced roads. Driving the vehicle in 2WD
will have greater fuel economy benefits as the
front axle is not engaged in 2WD.
For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO
mode can be used. In this mode, the front axle
is engaged, but the vehicle's power is sent to
the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive will be auto-
matically engaged when the vehicle senses a
loss of traction. Because the front axle is
engaged, this mode will result in lower fuel
economy than the 2WD mode.
In the event that additional traction is required,
the transfer case 4H and 4L positions can be
used to lock the front and rear driveshafts
together, forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. The 4H and 4L posi-
tions are intended for loose, slippery road
surfaces only and not intended for normal
driving. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on
hard-surfaced roads will cause increased tire
wear and damage to the driveline components.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both
the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the automatic transmission is in PARK
(or manual transmission is in gear). The
parking brake should always be applied when
the driver is not in the vehicle.
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
Refer to “Shifting Procedures” in this section for
further information on shifting into 4H or 4L.
The instrument cluster alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in four-wheel drive, and the front and
rear driveshafts are locked together. The light
will illuminate when the transfer case is shifted
into the 4H position.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine
speed will be approximately three times (four
times for Rubicon models) that of the 2H or 4H
positions at a given road speed. Take care not
to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and circum-
ference on each wheel. Any difference will
adversely affect shifting and cause damage to
the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedures
2H To 4H Auto Or 4H Auto To 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H Auto can be made
with the vehicle stopped or in motion. The
preferred shifting speed would be 0 to 45 mph
(72 km/h). With the vehicle in motion, the
transfer case will engage/disengage faster if
you momentarily release the accelerator pedal
after completing the shift. Do not accelerate
while shifting the transfer case. Apply a
constant force when shifting the transfer case
lever.
2H/4H Auto To 4H Part Time Or 4H Part Time To
2H/4H Auto
Shifting between 2H/4H AUTO to 4H PART TIME
can be made with the vehicle stopped or in
motion. The preferred shifting speed would be 0
to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the vehicle in
motion, the transfer case will engage/disen-
gage faster if you momentarily release the
accelerator pedal after completing the shift. Do
not accelerate while shifting the transfer case.
Apply a constant force when shifting the
transfer case lever.
NOTE:
Do not attempt to make a shift while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning. The front
and rear driveshaft speeds must be equal for
the shift to take place. Shifting while only the
front or rear wheels are spinning can cause
damage to the transfer case.
Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be
experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or
uneven tire pressures, excessive vehicle
loading, or cold temperatures.
Shifting effort will increase with speed, this is
normal.
During cold weather, you may experience
increased effort in shifting until the transfer
case fluid warms up. This is normal.
4H Part Time/4H Auto To 4L Or 4L To 4H Part
Time/4H Auto
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h), shift an automatic transmission into
NEUTRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal on a
manual transmission. While the vehicle is
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the
transfer case lever firmly to the desired posi-
tion. Do not pause with the transfer case in N
(Neutral). Once the shift is completed, place the
automatic transmission into DRIVE or release
the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.
NOTE:
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle
completely stopped; however, difficulty may occur
due to the mating teeth not being properly aligned.
Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
alignment and shift completion to occur. The
preferred method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage
or disengage 4L with the vehicle moving faster
than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped
The Trac-Lok rear axle provides a constant
driving force to both rear wheels and reduces
wheel spin caused by the loss of traction at one
driving wheel. If traction differs between the two
rear wheels, the differential automatically
proportions the usable torque by providing
more torque to the wheel that has traction.
Trac-Lok is especially helpful during slippery
driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a
slippery surface, a slight application of the
accelerator will supply maximum traction.
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) — Rubicon Models
The axle lock switch is located on the instru-
ment panel (to the right of the steering column).
Axle Lock Switch Panel
This feature will only activate when the following
conditions are met:
Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4L (Low)
range.
Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h)
or less.
Both right and left wheels on axle are at the
same speed.
To activate the system, push the axle lock
switch down to lock the rear axle only (the
“REAR ONLY” will illuminate), push the switch
up to lock the front axle and rear axle (the
“FRONT + REAR” will illuminate). When the rear
axle is locked, pushing the bottom of switch
again will lock or unlock the front axle.
NOTE:
The indicator lights will flash until the axles are
fully locked or unlocked.
To unlock the axles, push the axle lock OFF
button.
Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken
out of 4L (Low) range, or the ignition switch is
turned to the OFF position.
The axle lock disengages at speeds above
30 mph (48 km/h), and will automatically
re-lock once vehicle speed is less than 10 mph
(16 km/h).
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position
completely can cause transfer case damage
or loss of power and vehicle control. You
could have a collision. Do not drive the
vehicle unless the transfer case is fully
engaged.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip
differential, never run the engine with one
rear wheel off the ground. The vehicle may
drive through the rear wheel remaining on the
ground and cause you to lose control of your
vehicle.
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect — If
Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an elec-
tronic disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This
system allows greater front suspension travel in
off-road situations.
This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR
switch located on the instrument panel (to the
right of the steering column).
SWAY BAR Switch
Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the
system. Push the switch again to deactivate the
system. The “Sway Bar Indicator Light” (located
in the instrument cluster) will illuminate when
the bar is disconnected. The “Sway Bar Indi-
cator Light” will flash during activation transi-
tion, or when activation conditions are not met.
The stabilizer/sway bar should remain in
on-road mode during normal driving conditions.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to
either 4H or 4L and push the SWAY BAR switch
to obtain the off-road position. Refer to
“Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this section for
further information. The “Sway Bar Indicator
Light” will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has
been fully disconnected.
NOTE:
The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked
due to left and right suspension height differ-
ences. This condition is due to driving surface
differences or vehicle loading. In order for the
stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/reconnect,
the right and left halves of the bar must be
aligned. This alignment may require that the
vehicle be driven onto level ground or rocked
from side to side.
To return to on-road mode, push the SWAY BAR
switch again.
WARNING!
Ensure the stabilizer/sway bar is reconnected
before driving on hard surfaced roads or at
speeds above 18 mph (29 km/h); a
disconnected stabilizer/sway bar may
contribute to the loss of vehicle control, which
could result in serious injury. Under certain
circumstances, the front stabilizer/sway bar
enhances vehicle stability and assists with
vehicle control. The system monitors vehicle
speed and will attempt to reconnect the
stabilizer/sway bar at speeds over 18 mph
(29 km/h). This is indicated by a flashing or
solid “Sway Bar Indicator Light.” Once vehicle
speed is reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h),
the system will once again attempt to return
to off-road mode.
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to
on-road mode, the “Sway Bar Indicator Light”
will flash in the instrument cluster and vehicle
stability may be reduced. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h).
Driving faster than 18 mph (29 km/h) with a
disconnected stabilizer/sway bar may
contribute to the loss of vehicle control, which
could result in serious injury.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC POWER STEERING
Your vehicle is equipped with an
electro-hydraulic power steering system that
will give you good vehicle response and
increased ease of maneuverability in tight
spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide
light efforts while parking and good feel while
driving. If the electro-hydraulic power steering
system experiences a fault that prevents it from
providing power steering assist, then the
system will provide mechanical steering capa-
bility.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING”
message and a flashing icon are
displayed on the instrument cluster
screen, it indicates that the vehicle
needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is
likely the vehicle has lost power steering assis-
tance. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If the “POWER STEERING HOT” message and an
icon are displayed on the instrument cluster
screen, it indicates that extreme steering
maneuvers may have occurred, which caused
an over temperature condition in the power
steering system. You will lose power steering
assistance momentarily until the over tempera-
ture condition no longer exists. Once driving
conditions are safe, then pull over and let
vehicle idle for a few moments until the light
turns off. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”
in “Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
NOTE:
Even if power steering assistance is no longer
operational, it is still possible to steer the
vehicle. Under these conditions there will be
a substantial increase in steering effort,
especially at very low vehicle speeds and
during parking maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see your authorized
dealer for service.
STOP/START SYSTEM — AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
The Engine Stop/Start (ESS) function is devel-
oped to reduce fuel consumption. The system
will stop the engine automatically during a
vehicle stop if the required conditions are met.
Releasing the brake pedal or pressing the accel-
erator pedal will automatically re-start the
engine.
ESS vehicles have been upgraded with a heavy
duty starter, enhanced battery, and other
upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional
engine starts. Vehicles equipped with eTorque
contain a heavy duty motor generator and an
additional hybrid electric battery to store energy
from vehicle deceleration for use on engine
startup after a stop as well as providing launch
torque assist.
NOTE:
It is recommended that Stop/Start be disabled
during off-road use.
CAUTION!
Extreme steering maneuvers may cause the
electrically driven pump to reduce or stop
power steering assistance in order to prevent
damage to the system. Normal operation will
resume once the system is allowed to cool.
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
Secondary Battery
Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary
battery used to power the Stop/Start system
and the 12 Volt vehicle electrical system. The
secondary battery is located behind the wheel
well for the front passenger wheel.
Battery Locations
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled
after every normal customer engine
start. At that time, the system will go
into STOP/START READY and if all
other conditions are met, can go into a STOP/
START AUTOSTOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display
within the Stop/Start section. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-
tion.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The shifter must be in a forward gear and the
brake pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
move to the zero position and the Stop/Start
telltale will illuminate indicating you are in
Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained
upon return to an engine running condition.
1 — Primary Battery
2 — Secondary Battery
WARNING!
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main
and the supplemental batteries must be
disconnected to completely de-energize the
12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do
not disconnect both batteries. To learn how
to properly disconnect, see your authorized
dealer.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if
they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the
operation of the Stop/Start system may be
viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/
Start Screen. In the following situations, the
engine will not stop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
Battery charge is low.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high
blower speed.
HVAC set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
Engine temperature too high.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Hood is open.
Transfer case is in 4L or Neutral.
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient
pressure.
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop
Include:
Accelerator pedal input.
Vehicle speed threshold not achieved from
previous auto-stop.
Steering angle beyond threshold. (ESS
Models Only)
ACC is on and speed is set.
Vehicle is at high altitude.
System fault present.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the Stop/Start system
going into a STOP/START READY state under
more extreme conditions of the items listed
above.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
While in a forward gear, the engine will start
when the brake pedal is released or the throttle
pedal is depressed. The transmission will auto-
matically re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE.
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
Actual cabin temperature is significantly
different than temperature set on Auto HVAC.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted.
Battery voltage drops too low.
Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake
pedal applications).
Stop/Start OFF switch is pushed.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE time
exceeds 5 minutes.
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
4WD system is put into 4L or Neutral mode.
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold.
(ESS Models Only)
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
1. Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on
the switch bank). The light on the switch
will illuminate.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will
appear in instrument cluster display within
the Stop/Start section. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-
ment Panel” for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the
Stop/Start system), the engine will not be
stopped.
4. The Stop/Start system will reset itself back
to an ON condition every time the ignition is
turned off and back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn
off.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start
system, the system will not shut down the
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display“ in
“Getting to Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message appears in the instrument cluster
display, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
STOP/START SYSTEM — MANUAL
TRANSMISSION (IF EQUIPPED)
The Engine Stop/Start function is developed to
reduce fuel consumption. The system will stop
the engine automatically during a vehicle stop if
the required conditions are met. Pressing the
clutch pedal will automatically restart the
vehicle.
ESS vehicles have been upgraded with a heavy
duty starter, enhanced battery, and other
upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional
engine starts. Vehicles equipped with eTorque
contain a heavy duty motor generator and an
additional hybrid electric battery to store energy
from vehicle deceleration for use on engine
startup after a stop as well as providing launch
torque assist.
NOTE:
It is recommended that Stop/Start be disabled
during off-road use.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
Secondary Battery
Your vehicle may be equipped with a secondary
battery used to power the Stop/Start system
and the 12 Volt vehicle electrical system. The
secondary battery is located behind the wheel
well for the front passenger wheel.
Battery Locations
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after
every normal customer engine start. It
will remain in STOP/START NOT READY
until you drive forward with a vehicle
speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). At that time,
the system will go into STOP/START READY and if
all other conditions are met, can go into an STOP/
START AUTO STOP ACTIVE mode.
To Activate The STOP/START AUTO STOP
ACTIVE Mode, The Following Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
Vehicle speed must be less than 2 mph
(3 km/h).
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL
position and the clutch pedal must be fully
released
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
fall to the Stop/Start position, the STOP/START
AUTO STOP ACTIVE message will appear, and
the heater/air conditioning (HVAC) air flow will
be reduced.
1 — Primary Battery
2 — Secondary Battery
WARNING!
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main
and the supplemental batteries must be
disconnected to completely de-energize the
12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do
not disconnect both batteries. To learn how
to properly disconnect, see your authorized
dealer.
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if
they are fulfilled. In following situations the
engine will not stop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Outside temperature is less than 10°F
(–12°C) or greater than 109°F (43°C).
Actual cabin temperature is significantly
different than temperature set on Auto HVAC.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
Battery discharged.
When driving in REVERSE.
Hood is open.
Transfer case is in 4L or Neutral
Driver's seat is not occupied or driver door is
open.
Vehicle is at high altitude.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Forward Gear is engaged.
Steering angle beyond threshold. (ESS
Models Only)
System fault is present.
HVAC set to MAX A/C.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the STOP/START system
going into a STOP/START READY state under
more extreme conditions of the items listed
above.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode
When the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, the
engine will start when the clutch pedal is
pressed (does not require complete/full pedal
press). The vehicle will go into STOP/START
SYSTEM NOT READY mode until the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Conditions that will cause the engine to start
automatically while in STOP/START AUTO STOP
ACTIVE mode
The Engine Will Start Automatically When:
Actual cabin temperature is significantly
different than temperature set on Auto HVAC.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE time
exceeds 5 minutes.
Battery voltage drops too low.
Low brake vacuum e.g. after several brake
pedal applications.
Vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/h).
STOP/START OFF switch is pressed.
4WD system is put into 4L or Neutral mode.
Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold.
(ESS Models Only)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start System
1. Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on
the switch bank). The light on the switch
will illuminate.
Stop/Start OFF Switch
2. The STOP/START OFF message will appear in
the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the
Stop/Start system), the engine will not be
stopped.
4. If the Stop/Start system is manually turned
off, the engine can only be started and
stopped by cycling the ignition switch.
5. The Stop/Start system will reset itself back
to an ON condition every time the ignition is
turned off and back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start System
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn
off.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start
system, the system will not shut down the
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display“ in
“Getting to Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message appears in the instrument cluster
display, have the system checked by an autho-
rized dealer.
SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (32 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — SET (+)/Accel
2 — On/Off
3 — RES/Resume
4 — SET (-)/Decel
5 — CANC/Cancel
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the
Speed Control System has been designed to
shut down if multiple Speed Control func-
tions are operated at the same time. If this
occurs, the Speed Control System can be
reactivated by pushing the Speed Control on/
off button and resetting the desired vehicle
set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed
Control. The cruise indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster display will illuminate. To turn the
system off, push the on/off button a second
time. The cruise indicator light will turn off. The
system should be turned off when not in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pushing the
SET (+) or SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the
vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more informa-
tion. The speed increment shown is dependent
on the chosen speed unit of US (mph) or Metric
(km/h):
US Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could
accidentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose control
and have an accident. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for more informa-
tion. The speed increment shown is dependent
on the chosen speed unit of US (mph) or Metric
(km/h):
US Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Speed Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may
occur so it may be preferable to drive without
Speed Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANC
(cancel) button, or normal brake pressure while
slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed
Control without erasing the set speed from
memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the
speed control without erasing the set speed
from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Clutch pedal is pressed (manual transmis-
sion only)
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition
in the OFF position erases the set speed from
memory.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the
conditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Speed Control
in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding,
icy, snow-covered or slippery.
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF
EQUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the
driving convenience provided by cruise control
while traveling on highways and major road-
ways. However, it is not a safety system and not
designed to prevent collisions. Speed Control
function performs differently. Please refer to
the proper section within this chapter.
ACC will allow you to keep cruise control
engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions
without the constant need to reset your cruise
control. ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a
forward facing camera designed to detect a
vehicle directly ahead of you.
NOTE:
If the sensor does not detect a vehicle ahead
of you, ACC will maintain a fixed set speed.
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or accelerate
(not to exceed the original set speed) auto-
matically to maintain a preset following
distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
The Cruise Control system has two control
modes:
Adaptive Cruise Control mode for main-
taining an appropriate distance between
vehicles.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode
for cruising at a constant preset speed. For
additional information, refer to “Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode” in this
section.
NOTE:
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control will not
react to preceding vehicles. Always be aware of
the mode selected.
You can change the mode by using the Cruise
Control buttons. The two control modes func-
tion differently. Always confirm which mode is
selected.
1 — Distance Setting Increase
2 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
3 — Distance Setting Decrease
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive of
road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake opera-
tion to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians,
oncoming vehicles, and stationary
objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The Speed Control buttons (located on the right
side of the steering wheel) operate the ACC
system.
NOTE:
Any chassis/suspension or tire size modifica-
tions to the vehicle will affect the performance
of the Adaptive Cruise Control and Forward
Collision Warning System.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
You can only engage ACC if the vehicle speed is
above 0 mph (0 km/h).
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster displays “ACC
Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
displays “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
When in Four-Wheel Drive Low
When you apply the brakes
When the parking brake is applied
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
When the manual transmission is in first gear
When the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(32 km/h) (manual transmission)
When the vehicle speed is outside of the
speed range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance
conditions.
Does not always fully recognize
complex driving conditions, which can
result in wrong or missing distance
warnings.
On vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion, will bring the vehicle to a complete
stop while following a target vehicle and
hold the vehicle for 2 seconds in the
stop position. If the target vehicle does
not start moving within two seconds the
ACC system will display a message that
the system will release the brakes and
that the brakes must be applied manu-
ally. An audible chime will sound when
the brakes are released.
You should switch off the ACC system:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway
construction zones).
WARNING! (Continued)
When entering a turn lane or highway
off ramp; when driving on roads that
are winding, icy, snow-covered, slip-
pery, or have steep uphill or downhill
slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at
low speeds
ESC Full-Off Mode is active
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster displays “ACC Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the instrument cluster displays “Adaptive Cruise
Control (ACC) Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
To Set A Desired ACC Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button
and release. The instrument cluster display will
display the set speed.
If the system is set when the vehicle speed is
below 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall
be defaulted to 20 mph (32 km/h). If the
system is set when the vehicle speed is above
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall be the
current speed of the vehicle. On vehicles
equipped with a manual transmission, the
system cannot be set when the vehicle speed is
below 20 mph (32 km/h) or when the vehicle is
in first gear.
NOTE:
ACC cannot be set if there is a stationary vehicle
in front of your vehicle in close proximity.
Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal. If
you do not, the vehicle may continue to accel-
erate beyond the set speed. If this occurs:
The message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will
display in the instrument cluster display.
The system will not be controlling the
distance between your vehicle and the
vehicle ahead. The vehicle speed will only be
determined by the position of the accelerator
pedal.
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
system on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it
to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have a collision. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the system:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC button is pushed
An Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) event
occurs
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
(D) position
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
Driver seatbelt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated)
A Trailer Sway Control (TSC) event occurs
The vehicle speed is less than 15 mph
(24 km/h) (manual transmission only)
The clutch is depressed for more than 10
seconds (manual transmission only)
The vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL for more
than 10 seconds (manual transmission only)
The driver shifts to 1st gear (manual trans-
mission only)
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed
in memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/
off button is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
You switch to Four-Wheel Drive Low
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory push the RES
(resume) button and then remove your foot
from the accelerator pedal. The instrument
cluster display will display the last set speed.
NOTE:
If your vehicle stays at standstill for longer
than two seconds, then the system will
cancel and the brake force will be
ramped-out. The driver will have to apply the
brakes to keep the vehicle at a standstill.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a
stationary vehicle in-front of your vehicle in
close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
While ACC is set, you can increase the set speed
by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown
is dependent on the chosen speed unit of
US (mph) or Metric (km/h):
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming
a set speed that is too high or too low for
prevailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
too sharply for safe operation. Failure to
follow these warnings can result in a collision
and death or serious personal injury.
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
While ACC is set, the set speed can be
decreased by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed decrement shown
is dependent on the chosen speed unit of US
(mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+)
button or SET (-) button, the new set speed
will be the current speed of the vehicle.
When you use the SET (-) button to decel-
erate, if the engine’s braking power does not
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set
speed, the brake system will automatically
slow the vehicle.
The ACC system applies the brake down to a
full stop when following a target vehicle. If an
ACC host vehicle follows a target vehicle to a
standstill, the host vehicle will release the
vehicle brakes two seconds after coming to a
full stop.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving up hill and down hill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, down shifting may occur while
climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed. When driving up hill and down
hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking
temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be
set by varying the distance setting between four
bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars
(medium) and one bar (short). Using this
distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle
ahead. This distance setting displays in the
instrument cluster display.
Distance Setting 4 Bars (Longest)
Distance Setting 3 Bars (Long)
Distance Setting 2 Bars (Medium)
Distance Setting 1 Bar (Short)
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting — Increase button and release.
Each time the button is pushed, the distance
setting increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Setting — Decrease button and
release. Each time the button is pushed, the
distance setting decreases by one bar (shorter).
If there is no vehicle ahead, the vehicle will
maintain the set speed. If a slower moving
vehicle is detected in the same lane, the instru-
ment cluster displays the “Sensed Vehicle Indi-
cator” icon, and the system adjusts vehicle
speed automatically to maintain the distance
setting, regardless of the set speed.
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
above the set speed
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor
The distance setting is changed
The system disengages (Refer to the informa-
tion on ACC Activation)
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE!” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking capacity.
Brake Alert
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the
Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with ACC engaged and following a
vehicle, the system will provide an additional
acceleration up to the ACC set speed to assist in
passing the vehicle. This additional acceleration
is triggered when the driver utilizes the left turn
signal and will only be active when passing on
the left hand side.
ACC Operation At A Stop (Automatic
Transmission Only)
In the event that the ACC system brings your
vehicle to a standstill while following a target
vehicle, your vehicle will resume motion without
the need for any driver action if the target
vehicle starts moving within two seconds of your
vehicle coming to a standstill.
If the target vehicle does not start moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a stand-
still, the ACC with Stop system will cancel and
the brakes will release. A cancel message will
display on the instrument cluster display and
produce a warning chime. Driver intervention
will be required at this moment.
While ACC with Stop is holding your vehicle at a
standstill, if the driver seatbelt is unbuckled or
the driver door is opened, the ACC with Stop
system will cancel and the brakes will release. A
cancel message will display on the instrument
cluster display and produce a warning chime.
Driver intervention will be required at this
moment.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the
current ACC system settings. The instrument
cluster display is located in the center of the
instrument cluster. The information it displays
depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button (located on the steering wheel) until one
of the following appears in the instrument
cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button (located
on the steering wheel) is pushed, the display will
read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any
ACC activity occurs, which may include any of
the following:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the
last display selected after five seconds of no
ACC display activity.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of
Vehicle” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and also a chime
will indicate when conditions temporarily limit
system performance.
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
“ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” and the system will deactivate.
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e.
tunnels with reflective tiles, or ice and snow).
The ACC system will recover after the vehicle
has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the radar is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily
occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control is still available. For additional
information refer to “Normal (Fixed Speed)
Cruise Control Mode” in this section.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in
a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 STARTING AND OPERATING
sensor is located in the center of the vehicle
behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe
the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious
not to damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system
malfunction or failure and require a sensor
realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see an autho-
rized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an
ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system
is no longer present, the system will return to
the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will
resume function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front
Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without
any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the radar sensor realigned at an autho-
rized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector,
an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is
not recommended. Doing so may block the
sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” warning will display and also
a chime will indicate when conditions tempo-
rarily limit system performance. This most often
occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on wind-
shield and fog on the inside of glass. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
“ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean Front
Windshield” and the system will have degraded
performance.
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message can sometimes be
displayed while driving in adverse weather
conditions. The ACC/FCW system will recover
after the vehicle has left these areas. Under
rare conditions, when the camera is not
tracking any vehicles or objects in its path this
warning may temporarily occur.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rear view
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited func-
tionality is no longer present, the system will
return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without any
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the
windshield and forward facing camera
inspected at an authorized dealer.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
STARTING AND OPERATING 245
“Service ACC/FCW” Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster displays “ACC/FCW Unavailable Service
Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable Service
Required”, there may be an internal system
fault or a temporary malfunction that limits ACC
functionality. Although the vehicle is still driv-
able under normal conditions, ACC will be
temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try acti-
vating ACC again later, following an ignition
cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may
brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to
stay alert and may need to intervene.
NOTE:
Do not put stickers or easy passes over the
camera/radar field of view.
Cracks in the windshield may affect the
performance of ACC, depending on the size
and location of the crack.
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane
that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a
vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may decrease the vehicle speed and
acceleration for stability reasons, with no target
vehicle detected. Once the vehicle is out of the
curve the system will resume your original set
speed. This is a part of normal ACC system func-
tionality.
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 STARTING AND OPERATING
Using ACC On Hills
When driving on hills, ACC may not detect a
vehicle in your lane. Depending on the speed,
vehicle load, traffic conditions, and the steep-
ness of the hills, ACC performance may be
limited.
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane in which you are trav-
eling. In the illustration shown, ACC has not yet
detected the vehicle changing lanes and it may
not detect the vehicle until it's too late for the
ACC system to take action. There may not be
sufficient distance to the lane-changing vehicle.
Always be attentive and ready to apply the
brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles traveling near the outer
edges of the lane or edging into the lane are not
detected until they have moved fully into the
lane. There may not be sufficient distance to the
vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
STARTING AND OPERATING 247
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not
react in situations where the vehicle you are
following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead
is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control Mode
In addition to Adaptive Cruise Control mode, a
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is
available for cruising at fixed speeds. The
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode is
designed to maintain a set cruising speed
without requiring the driver to operate the accel-
erator. Cruise Control can only be operated if
the vehicle speed is above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To change between the different control modes,
push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button which turns the ACC and the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control off. Pushing the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/off
button will result in turning on (changing to) the
Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control mode.
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 STARTING AND OPERATING
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise
Control on. When the vehicle has
reached the desired speed, push the
SET (+) or SET (-) button and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will
operate at the selected speed. Once a speed
has been set a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET
TO MPH (km/h)” will appear indicating what
speed was set. This light will turn on when the
system is turned on via the on/off control. It
turns green when the cruise control is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
is set, you can increase speed by pushing the
SET (+) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed increment shown
is dependent on the speed of US (mph) or
Metric (km/h) units:
US Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 5 mph
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+) button once will result in
a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in an increase
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
increase in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Decrease Speed
When the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
is set, you can decrease speed by pushing the
SET (-) button.
The driver's preferred units can be selected
through the instrument cluster display. Refer to
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
more information. The speed decrement shown
is dependent on the speed of US (mph) or
Metric (km/h) units:
US Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 5 mph
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode, the system will not react to vehicles
ahead. In addition, the proximity warning
does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead
since neither the presence of the vehicle
ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Always be aware which mode is selected.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
STARTING AND OPERATING 249
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (-) button once will result in
a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each subse-
quent tap of the button results in a decrease
of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease in 10 km/h
decrements until the button is released. The
decrease in set speed is reflected in the
instrument cluster display.
To Cancel
The following conditions will cancel the Normal
(Fixed Speed) Cruise Control without clearing
the memory:
The brake pedal is applied.
The CANC button is pushed.
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates.
The vehicle parking brake is applied.
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated).
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
(D) position.
The driver switches ESC to full-off mode.
The driver shifts to 1st gear (manual trans-
mission only).
The vehicle speed is less than 15 mph
(24 km/h) (manual transmission only).
The clutch is depressed for more than 10
seconds (manual transmission only).
The vehicle is placed in NEUTRAL (N) for more
than 10 seconds (manual transmission only).
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and erase the set speed
in memory if:
The Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control on/
off button is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
Four-Wheel Drive Low is engaged
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF
EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system
provides visual and audible indications of the
distance between the rear fascia and a
detected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during
a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense
System Usage Precautions” in this section for
limitations of this system and recommenda-
tions.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE (R). If ParkSense is
enabled at this gear selector position, the
system will remain active until the vehicle speed
is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h)
or above. When in REVERSE and above the
system's operating speed, a warning will appear
within the instrument cluster display indicating
the vehicle speed is too fast. The system will
become active again if the vehicle speed is
decreased to speeds less than approximately
6 mph (9 km/h).
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 STARTING AND OPERATING
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from approxi-
mately 12 inches (30 cm) up to 79 inches
(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the
horizontal direction, depending on the location,
type and orientation of the obstacle.
ParkSense Warning Display
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display. It provides visual
warnings to indicate the distance between the
rear fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information.
ParkSense Display
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the instrument
cluster display will show the park assist ready
system status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in one or more regions
based on the obstacle’s distance and location
relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear
region, the display will show a single solid arc in
the center rear region and will produce a
one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves
closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
sound tone will change from slow, to fast, to
continuous.
If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right
rear region, the display will show a single
flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region
and will produce a fast sound tone. As the
vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the
display will show the single arc moving closer to
the vehicle and the tone will change from fast to
continuous.
Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
Slow Tone/Solid Arc
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
STARTING AND OPERATING 251
Slow Tone/Solid Arc Fast Tone/Flashing Arc Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the
warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None
None
None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None Single 1/2-
Second Tone
(for rear center only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Slow
(for rear center
only)
Fast
(for rear center
only)
Fast Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio
tone.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch, located on the switch
panel below the climate controls.
ParkSense Switch
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster
display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for approximately five seconds. Refer
to “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further infor-
mation. When the gear selector is moved to
REVERSE and the system is disabled, the instru-
ment cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE
OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE (Not in 4L).
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when Park-
Sense is disabled or requires service. The Park-
Sense switch LED will be off when the system is
enabled. If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and
requires service, the ParkSense switch LED will
blink momentarily, and then the LED will be on.
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle,
and it will display the “PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-
ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the “PARK-
SENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”
message. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display”.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the system has detected a faulted condi-
tion, the instrument cluster display will show the
"PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE
SERVICE REQUIRED" message for as long as the
vehicle is in REVERSE. Under this condition,
ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster
display, make sure the outer surface and the
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear, see an autho-
rized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” appears in the instrument cluster
display, see an authorized dealer.
Cleaning The ParkSense System
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water,
car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use
rough or hard cloths. In washing stations, clean
sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high pres-
sure washing nozzles at least 4 inches (10 cm)
from the sensors. Do not scratch or poke the
sensors. Otherwise, you could damage the
sensors.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
STARTING AND OPERATING 253
(Continued)
(Continued)
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the Park-
Sense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.”
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if
you cycle the ignition.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-
Sense system off if objects such as bicycle
carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are placed within
12 inches (30 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message
to be displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the loudspeaker sounds the continuous
tone. Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
WARNING! (Continued)
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you
to see an on-screen image of the rear surround-
ings of your vehicle whenever the gear selector
is put into REVERSE (R). The image will be
displayed in the touchscreen display along with
a caution note to “check entire surroundings”
across the top of the screen. After five seconds
this note will disappear. The ParkView camera is
located on the rear of the vehicle in the center
of the spare tire.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Press the “Controls” button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the “Backup Camera” button to turn
the Rear View Camera system on.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with Camera delay turned off), the rear Camera
mode is exited and the previous screen appears
again.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with Camera delay turned on), the rear Camera
image will be displayed for up to 10 seconds
unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph
(13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into
PARK, the ignition is placed in the OFF position,
or the touchscreen button “X” to disable display
of the Rear View Camera image is pressed.
Whenever the Rear View Camera image is acti-
vated through the “Backup Camera” button in
the “Controls” menu, and the vehicle speed is
greater than, or equal to, 8 mph (13 km/h), a
display timer for the image is initiated. The
image will continue to be displayed until the
display timer exceeds 10 seconds.
NOTE:
If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will
be displayed continuously until deactivated
via the touchscreen button “X”, the transmis-
sion is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
The touchscreen button “X” to disable display
of the camera image is made available ONLY
when the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid
on the image to illustrate the width of the
vehicle and its projected backup path based on
the steering wheel position. A dashed center
line overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver.
When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance to
the rear of the vehicle.
The following table shows the approximate
distances for each zone:
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
CAUTION! (Continued)
Zone Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green 6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
STARTING AND OPERATING 255
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
Fuel Filler Cap
The fuel filler cap is located on the driver's side
of the vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is lost or
damaged, be sure the replacement cap is the
correct one for this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Door
Fuel Filler Cap
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
Tighten the fuel filler cap about 1/4 turn until
you hear one click. This is an indication that
the cap is properly tightened.
If the fuel filler cap is not tightened properly,
the MIL will come on. Be sure the cap is tight-
ened every time the vehicle is refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diag-
nostic system can determine if the fuel filler cap
is possibly loose, improperly installed, or
damaged. If the system detects a malfunction,
the “gASCAP” message will display in the odom-
eter display. Tighten the gas cap until a
"clicking" sound is heard. This is an indication
that the gas cap is properly tightened. Push the
odometer reset button to turn the message off.
If the problem persists, the message will appear
the next time the vehicle is started. This might
indicate a damaged cap. If the problem is
detected twice in a row, the system will turn on
the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL
off.
VEHICLE LOADING
Certification Label
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side
door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of manu-
facture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) front and rear,
and Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). A
Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is included on
this label and indicates the Month, Day and
Hour of manufacture. The bar code that
appears on the bottom of the label is your VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear axle
systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so
GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not
exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allow-
able load weight a truck can carry, including the
weight of the driver, all passengers, options and
cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on
the front and rear axles. The load must be
distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR
of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the compo-
nents in the system with the lowest load
carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components some-
times specified by purchasers for increased
durability does not necessarily increase the
vehicle's GVWR.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission
control system could result from using an
improper fuel filler cap. A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system.
Also, a poorly fitting aftermarket cap can
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)” to illuminate, due to fuel vapors
escaping from the system.
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
STARTING AND OPERATING 257
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full
GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids,
including vehicle fuel, at full capacity condi-
tions, and with no occupants or cargo loaded
into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle
on a commercial scale before any occupants or
cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the
front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can
best be determined by weighing it when it is
loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to ensure that the GVWR has
not been exceeded. The weight on the front and
rear of the vehicle should then be determined
separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR
of either the front or rear axles has been
exceeded but the total load is within the speci-
fied GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted from
front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until
the specified weight limitations are met. Store
the heavier items down low and be sure that the
weight is distributed equally. Stow all loose
items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers
and handles and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and infor-
mation on limits to the type of towing you can
reasonably do with your vehicle. Before towing a
trailer, carefully review this information to tow
your load as efficiently and safely as possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and recom-
mendations in this manual concerning vehicles
used for trailer towing.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR.
If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles.
This could cause you to lose control. Also
overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 STARTING AND OPERATING
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be
limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR.
Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification
Label” in “Starting And Operating” for further
information.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, consumables and equip-
ment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on
the trailer in its "loaded and ready for operation"
condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of
your vehicle and trailer when weighed in combi-
nation.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR. Refer to
“Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification Label” in
“Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force
exerted on the hitch ball by the trailer. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height multi-
plied by the maximum width of the front of a
trailer.
Trailer Sway Control – If Equipped
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that
can be installed between the hitch receiver and
the trailer tongue. It typically provides adjust-
able friction associated with the telescoping
motion to dampen any unwanted trailer swaying
motions while traveling.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
STARTING AND OPERATING 259
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are the most
popular on the market today and they are
commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in accor-
dance with the manufacturer's directions, it
provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a fric-
tion/hydraulic sway control also dampens sway
caused by traffic and crosswinds and contrib-
utes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. Trailer sway control and a weight
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recom-
mended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and
may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling,
stability, braking performance, and could
result in a collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can tow and should be used to assist you
in selecting the correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class Max. Trailer Hitch Industry Standards
Class I - Light Duty 2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Class II - Medium Duty 3,500 lbs (1,587 kg)
Class III - Heavy Duty 5,000 lbs (2,267 kg)
Class IV - Extra Heavy Duty 10,000 lbs (4,535 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on your vehicle.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
STARTING AND OPERATING 261
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and
cargo (ie. the GVWR), and the GVWR should
never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire
Safety Information” in “Servicing And Mainte-
nance” for further information.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your bumper or trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options or
dealer-installed options must be considered as
part of the total load on your vehicle. Refer to
the “Tire And Loading Information” placard for
Engine/Transmission Model
GCWR (Gross
Combined Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross
Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt. (See Note)
2.0L Two–Door 8,016 lbs (3 636 kg) 20 ft2 (1.86 m2) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
Four–Door 8,117 lbs (3 682 kg) 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs (158 kg)
3.6L Two–Door 8,016 lbs (3 636 kg) 20 ft2 (1.86 m2) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
Four–Door 8,117 lbs (3 682 kg) 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lbs
(1 587 kg)
350 lbs (158 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 STARTING AND OPERATING
the maximum combined weight of occupants
and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements — Tires
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle. Refer to “Tires – General Informa-
tion” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
proper tire inflation procedures.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer. Refer to
“Tires – General Information” in “Servicing
And Maintenance” for proper inspection
procedure.
When replacing tires, refer to “Tires –
General Information” in “Servicing And Main-
tenance” for proper tire replacement proce-
dures. Replacing tires with a higher load
carrying capacity will not increase the
vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-
equate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer
with electronically actuated brakes. When
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to
the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a
trailer connector. Refer to the following illustra-
tions.
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
load your brake system and cause it to fail.
You might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
ping distance. When towing, you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs
(453 kg) loaded, it should have its own
brakes and they should be of adequate
capacity. Failure to do this could lead to
accelerated brake lining wear, higher brake
pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
STARTING AND OPERATING 263
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
Seven-Pin Connector
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning,
stopping and backing the trailer in an area away
from heavy traffic.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer
towing, all starts must be in first gear to avoid
excessive clutch slippage.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
Select the DRIVE range when towing. The trans-
mission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. However, if
frequent shifting does occur while in DRIVE, you
can use the AutoStick shift control to manually
select a lower gear.
NOTE:
Using a lower gear while operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions, will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup. This
action will also provide better engine braking.
AutoStick — If Equipped
When using the AutoStick shift control, select
the highest gear that allows for adequate
performance and avoids frequent down-
shifts. For example, choose “5” if the desired
speed can be maintained. Choose “4” or “3”
if needed to maintain the desired speed.
To prevent excess heat generation, avoid
continuous driving at high RPM. Reduce
vehicle speed as necessary to avoid
extended driving at high RPM. Return to a
higher gear or vehicle speed when grade and
road conditions allow.
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 STARTING AND OPERATING
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
When using the speed control, if you experi-
ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
Use speed control in flat terrain and with light
loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission
overheating, take the following actions:
City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, shift
the transmission into NEUTRAL and increase
engine idle speed.
Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE See Instructions
Automatic transmission in PARK.
Manual transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL [N]).
Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N).
Tow in forward direction.
Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional details.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
STARTING AND OPERATING 265
(Continued)
Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive
Models
NOTE:
The transfer case must be shifted into NEUTRAL
(N), automatic transmission must be in PARK,
and manual transmission must be in gear (NOT
in NEUTRAL) for recreational towing.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on
level ground.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the automatic transmission into
NEUTRAL or depress the clutch pedal on a
manual transmission.
CAUTION!
DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing
with only one set of wheels on the ground
(front or rear) will cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage. Tow
with all four wheels either ON the ground, or
OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).
Tow only in the forward direction. Towing
this vehicle backwards can cause severe
damage to the transfer case.
Automatic transmissions must be placed in
PARK for recreational towing.
Manual transmissions must be placed in
gear (not in Neutral) for recreational towing.
Before recreational towing, perform the
procedure outlined under “Shifting Into
NEUTRAL (N)” to be certain that the transfer
case is fully in NEUTRAL (N). Otherwise,
internal damage will result.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper face
bar will be damaged.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if you
leave the vehicle unattended with the transfer
case in the NEUTRAL (N) position without first
fully engaging the parking brake. The transfer
case NEUTRAL (N) position disengages both
the front and rear driveshafts from the
powertrain, and will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if the automatic transmission is in PARK
(or manual transmission is in gear). The
parking brake should always be applied when
the driver is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in
NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing to
prevent damage to internal parts.
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Turn the engine OFF.
5. Shift the transfer case lever into N (Neutral).
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal
on manual transmissions) for five seconds
and ensure that there is no vehicle move-
ment.
9. Repeat steps seven and eight with auto-
matic transmission in DRIVE or manual
transmission in first gear.
10. Turn the engine off.
11. Firmly apply the parking brake.
12. Shift the transmission into PARK or place
manual transmission in gear (NOT in
NEUTRAL).
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a
suitable tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop,
leaving it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Turn the engine off.
7. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired
position.
NOTE:
When shifting the transfer case out of N
(Neutral), the engine should remain off to avoid
gear clash.
8. Shift the automatic transmission into PARK,
or place manual transmission in NEUTRAL.
9. Release the brake pedal.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into gear, release the
brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual
transmissions), and check that the vehicle
operates normally.
DRIVING TIPS
On-Road Driving Tips
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance
and a narrower track to make them capable of
performing in a wide variety of off-road applica-
tions. Specific design characteristics give them
a higher center of gravity than conventional
passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is
a better view of the road, allowing you to antici-
pate problems. They are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as conventional
passenger cars any more than low-slung sports
cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type,
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
transmission is shifted into PARK with the
transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) and the engine
running. With the transfer case in NEUTRAL
(N) ensure that the engine is OFF before
shifting the transmission into PARK.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
STARTING AND OPERATING 267
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.
Off-Road Driving Tips
Side Step Removal — If Equipped
NOTE:
Prior to off-road usage, the side steps should be
removed to prevent damage if so equipped.
1. Remove both nuts and bolt from the under-
side of the vehicle for each bracket.
Underside Nuts
2. Remove the side step assembly.
Bumper End Cap Removal
The end caps on your vehicle’s front bumper
can be removed by following the steps below:
NOTE:
Bumper end caps are removable on steel
bumper only.
1. Loosen the two bolts that retain the GAWR
bracket (Bolts #1 and #2) to the end cap
using a T45 torx bit screw driver. Do not
remove the bolts.
Bolt #1
Bolt #2
2. Remove the remaining 8 bolts.
3. Gently remove the end cap from the vehicle
and store it where it will not get damaged.
4. Repeat this procedure on the other side.
The Basics Of Off-Road Driving
You will encounter many types of terrain driving
off-road. You should be familiar with the terrain
and area before proceeding. There are many
types of surface conditions: hard-packed dirt,
gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow and ice.
Every surface has a different effect on your
vehicle's steering, handling and traction.
Controlling your vehicle is one of the keys to
successful off-road driving, so always keep a
firm grip on the steering wheel and maintain a
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 STARTING AND OPERATING
good driving posture. Avoid sudden accelera-
tions, turns or braking. In most cases, there are
no road signs, posted speed limits or signal
lights. Therefore, you will need to use your own
good judgment on what is safe and what is not.
When on a trail, you should always be looking
ahead for surface obstacles and changes in
terrain. The key is to plan your future driving
route while remembering what you are currently
driving over.
NOTE:
It is recommended that the Stop/Start System
be disabled during off-road use.
When To Use 4L (Low) Range
When off-road driving, shift into 4L (Low) for
additional traction and control on slippery or
difficult terrain, ascending or descending steep
hills, and to increase low speed pulling power.
This range should be limited to extreme situa-
tions such as deep snow, mud, steep inclines,
or sand where additional low speed pulling
power is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of
25 mph (40 km/h) should be avoided when in
4L (Low) range.
Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation
Many off-road driving conditions require the
simultaneous use of the brake and throttle
(two-footed driving). When climbing rocks, logs,
or other stepped objects, using light brake pres-
sure with light throttle will keep the vehicle from
jerking or lurching. This technique is also used
when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on
a steep incline.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
Snow
In heavy snow or for additional control and trac-
tion at slower speeds, shift the transmission
into a low gear and the transfer case into 4L
(Low) if necessary. Do not shift to a lower gear
than necessary to maintain headway.
Over-revving the engine can spin the wheels
and traction will be lost. If you start to slow to a
stop, try turning your steering wheel no more
than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth, while
still applying throttle. This will allow the tires to
get a fresh "bite" and help maintain your
momentum.
Mud
Deep mud creates a great deal of suction
around the tires and is very difficult to get
through. You should use DRIVE, with the
transfer case in the 4L (Low) position to main-
tain your momentum. If you start to slow to a
stop, try turning your steering wheel no more
WARNING!
Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down
cargo. Unsecured cargo can become
projectiles in an off-road situation.
CAUTION!
Never park your vehicle over dry grass or
other combustible materials. The heat from
your vehicle exhaust system could cause a
fire.
CAUTION!
Do not use 4L (Low) range when operating
the vehicle on dry pavement. Driveline
hardware damage can result.
CAUTION!
On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at
high engine RPM or vehicle speeds, because
engine braking may cause skidding and loss
of control.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
STARTING AND OPERATING 269
than a 1/4 turn quickly back and forth for addi-
tional traction. Mud holes pose an increased
threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck.
They are normally full of debris from previous
vehicles getting stuck. As a good practice before
entering any mud hole, get out and determine
how deep it is, if there are any hidden obstacles
and if the vehicle can be safely recovered if
stuck.
Sand
Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with
full tire pressure. When crossing soft, sandy
spots in a trail, maintain your vehicle's
momentum and do not stop. The key to driving
in soft sand is using the appropriate tire pres-
sure, accelerating slowly, avoiding abrupt
maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle's
momentum. If you are going to be driving on
large soft sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire
pressure to a minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to
allow for a greater tire surface area. Reduced
tire pressure will drastically improve your trac-
tion and handling while driving on the soft sand,
but you must return the tires to normal air pres-
sure before driving on pavement or other hard
surfaces. Be sure you have a way to reinflate
the tires prior to reducing the pressure.
Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High
Points)
While driving off-road, you will encounter many
types of terrain. These varying types of terrain
bring different types of obstacles. Before
proceeding, review the path ahead to determine
the correct approach and your ability to safely
recover the vehicle if something goes wrong.
Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring
the vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the
vehicle forward until it makes contact with the
object. Apply the throttle lightly while holding a
light brake pressure and ease the vehicle up
and over the object.
Using A Spotter
There are many times where it is hard to see the
obstacle or determine the correct path. Deter-
mining the correct path can be extremely diffi-
cult when you are confronting many obstacles.
In these cases have someone guide you over,
through, or around the obstacle. Have the
person stand a safe distance in front of you
where they can see the obstacle, watch your
tires and undercarriage, and guide you through.
Crossing Large Rocks
When approaching large rocks, choose a path
which ensures you drive over the largest of
them with your tires. This will lift your undercar-
riage over the obstacle. The tread of the tire is
tougher and thicker than the side wall and is
designed to take the abuse. Always look ahead
and make every effort to cross the large rocks
with your tires.
CAUTION!
Reduced tire pressures may cause tire
unseating and total loss of air pressure. To
reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at a
reduced tire pressure, reduce your speed and
avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
WARNING!
Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering
system loading which could cause you to
loose control of your vehicle.
CAUTION!
Never attempt to straddle a rock that is
large enough to strike your axles or under-
carriage.
Never attempt to drive over a rock which is
large enough to contact the door sills.
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 STARTING AND OPERATING
Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or Rut
When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or
a large rut, the angled approach is the key to
maintaining your vehicle's mobility. Approach
these obstacles at a 45-degree angle and let
each tire go through the obstacle inde-
pendently. You need to use caution when
crossing large obstacles with steep sides. Do
not attempt to cross any large obstacle with
steep sides at an angle great enough to put the
vehicle at risk of a rollover. If you get caught in
a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left at a
45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use
the removed dirt to fill the rut ahead of the
turnout you just created. You should now be
able to drive out following the trench you just
created at a 45-degree angle.
Crossing Logs
To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle
(approximately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows
one front tire to be on top of the log while the
other just starts to climb the log. While climbing
the log, modulate your brake and accelerator to
avoid spinning the log out from under your tires.
Then ease the vehicle off the log using your
brakes.
Getting High-Centered
If you get hung up or high-centered on an object,
get out of the vehicle and try to determine what
the vehicle is hung up on, where it is contacting
the underbody and what is the best direction to
recover the vehicle. Depending on what you are
in contact with, jack the vehicle up and place a
few rocks under the tires so the weight is off of
the high point when you let the vehicle down.
You can also try rocking the vehicle or winching
the vehicle off the object.
Hill Climbing
Hill climbing requires good judgment and a
good understanding of your abilities and your
vehicle's limitations. Hills can cause serious
problems. Some are just too steep to climb and
should not be attempted. You should always
feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities.
You should always climb hills straight up and
down. Never attempt to climb a hill on an angle.
Before Climbing A Steep Hill
As you approach a hill, consider its grade or
steepness. Determine if it is too steep. Look to
see what the traction is on the hill side trail. Is
the trail straight up and down? What is on top
and the other side? Are there ruts, rocks,
branches or other obstacles on the path? Can
you safely recover the vehicle if something goes
wrong? If everything looks good and you feel
confident, shift the transmission into a lower
gear with 4L (Low) engaged, and proceed with
caution, maintaining your momentum as you
climb the hill.
Driving Up Hill
Once you have determined your ability to
proceed and have shifted into the appropriate
gear, line your vehicle up for the straightest
possible run. Accelerate with an easy constant
WARNING!
There is an increased risk of rollover when
crossing an obstacle, at any angle, with steep
sides.
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater
diameter than the running ground clearance
or the vehicle will become high-centered.
CAUTION!
Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard
objects increases the risk of underbody
damage.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
STARTING AND OPERATING 271
throttle and apply more power as you start up
the hill. Do not race forward into a steep grade;
the abrupt change of grade could cause you to
lose control. If the front end begins to bounce,
ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four tires
back on the ground. As you approach the crest
of the hill, ease off the throttle and slowly
proceed over the top. If the wheels start to slip
as you approach the crest of a hill, ease off the
accelerator and maintain headway by turning
the steering wheel no more than a 1/4 turn
quickly back and forth. This will provide a fresh
"bite" into the surface and will usually provide
enough traction to complete the climb. If you do
not make it to the top, place the vehicle in
REVERSE and back straight down the grade
using engine resistance along with the vehicle
brakes.
Driving Downhill
Before driving down a steep hill, you need to
determine if it is too steep for a safe descent.
What is the surface traction? Is the grade too
steep to maintain a slow, controlled descent?
Are there obstacles? Is it a straight descent? Is
there plenty of distance at the base of the hill to
regain control if the vehicle descends to fast? If
you feel confident in your ability to proceed,
then make sure you are in 4L (Low) and proceed
with caution. Allow engine braking to control the
descent and apply your brakes, if necessary, but
do not allow the tires to lock.
Driving Across An Incline
If at all possible, avoid driving across an incline.
If it is necessary, know your vehicle's abilities.
Driving across an incline places more weight on
the downhill wheels, which increases the possi-
bilities of a downhill slide or rollover. Make sure
the surface has good traction with firm and
stable soils. If possible, transverse the incline at
an angle heading slightly up or down.
If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway
If you stall or begin to lose headway while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come
to a stop and immediately apply the brake.
Restart the engine and shift into REVERSE.
Back slowly down the hill allowing engine
braking to control the descent and apply your
brakes, if necessary, but do not allow the tires
to lock.
WARNING!
Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or
turn around on a steep grade. Driving across
an incline increases the risk of a rollover,
which may result in severe injury.
WARNING!
Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL.
Use vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine
braking. Descending a grade too fast could
cause you to lose control and be seriously
injured or killed.
WARNING!
Driving across an incline increases the risk of
a rollover, which may result in severe injury.
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 STARTING AND OPERATING
Driving Through Water
Extreme care should be taken crossing any type
of water. Water crossings should be avoided, if
possible, and only be attempted when neces-
sary in a safe, responsible manner. Only drive
through areas which are designated and
approved. Tread lightly and avoid damage to the
environment. Know your vehicle's abilities and
be able to recover it if something goes wrong.
Never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing
deep water unless you ingested water into the
engine air intake. If the engine stalls, do not
attempt to restart it. Determine if it has ingested
water first. The key to any crossing is low and
slow. Shift into first gear (manual transmission),
or DRIVE (automatic transmission), with the
transfer case in the 4L (Low) position and
proceed very slowly with a constant slow speed
of {3 to 5 mph (5 to 8 km/h) maximum} and
light throttle. Keep the vehicle moving; do not
try to accelerate through the crossing. After
crossing any water higher than the bottom of
the axle differentials, inspect all of the vehicle
fluids for signs of water ingestion.
Before You Cross Any Type Of Water
As you approach any type of water, you need to
determine if you can cross it safely and respon-
sibly. If necessary, get out and walk through the
water or probe it with a stick. You need to be
sure of its depth, approach angle, current and
bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy
waters; check for hidden obstacles. Make sure
you will not be intruding on any wildlife, and you
can recover the vehicle if necessary. The key to
a safe crossing is the water depth, current and
bottom conditions. On soft bottoms, the vehicle
will sink in, effectively increasing the water level
on the vehicle. Be sure to consider this when
determining the depth and the ability to safely
cross.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or
grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so
may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle,
which may result in severe injury. Always back
carefully straight down a hill in REVERSE.
Never back down a hill in NEUTRAL using only
the vehicle brakes. Never drive diagonally
across a hill, always drive straight up or down.
CAUTION!
Water ingestion into the axles, transmis-
sion, transfer case, engine or vehicle inte-
rior can occur if you drive too fast or
through too deep of water. Water can cause
permanent damage to engine, driveline or
other vehicle components, and your brakes
will be less effective once wet and/or
muddy.
When driving through water, do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth
before entering as a precaution, and check
all fluids afterward. Driving through water
may cause damage that may not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
STARTING AND OPERATING 273
Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or
Other Standing Water
Puddles, pools, flooded or other standing water
areas normally contain murky or muddy waters.
These water types normally contain hidden
obstacles and make it difficult to determine an
accurate water depth, approach angle, and
bottom condition. Murky or muddy water holes
are where you want to hook up tow straps prior
to entering. This makes for a faster, cleaner and
easier vehicle recovery. If you are able to deter-
mine you can safely cross, than proceed using
the low and slow method.
Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or
Other Flowing Water
Flowing water can be extremely dangerous.
Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or
river even in shallow water. Fast moving water
can easily push your vehicle downstream,
sweeping it out of control. Even in very shallow
water, a high current can still wash the dirt out
from around your tires putting you and your
vehicle in jeopardy. There is still a high risk of
personal injury and vehicle damage with slower
water currents in depths greater than the
vehicle's running ground clearance. You should
never attempt to cross flowing water which is
deeper than the vehicle's running ground clear-
ance. Even the slowest current can push the
heaviest vehicle downstream and out of control
if the water is deep enough to push on the large
surface area of the vehicle's body. Before you
proceed, determine the speed of the current,
the water's depth, approach angle, bottom
condition and if there are any obstacles. Then
cross at an angle heading slightly upstream
using the low and slow technique.
CAUTION!
Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system
effectiveness by depositing debris onto the
radiator.
WARNING!
Never drive through fast moving deep water. It
can push your vehicle downstream, sweeping
it out of control. This could put you and your
passengers at risk of injury or drowning.
5
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After
going off-road, it is always a good idea to check
for damage. That way you can get any problems
taken care of right away and have your vehicle
ready when you need it.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness,
particularly on the chassis, drivetrain compo-
nents, steering, and suspension. Retighten
them, if required, and torque to the values
specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They
might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses,
axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand,
water, or similar dirty conditions, have the
radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake
linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
NOTE:
Inspect the clutch vent holes in the manual
transmission bell housing for mud and debris
and clean as required.
If you experience unusual vibration after
driving in mud, slush or similar conditions,
check the wheels for impacted material.
Impacted material can cause a wheel imbal-
ance and freeing the wheels of it will correct
the situation.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the brakes
may cause excessive wear or unpredictable
braking. You might not have full braking
power when you need it to prevent a collision.
If you have been operating your vehicle in
dirty conditions, get your brakes checked and
cleaned as necessary.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
275
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located
on the instrument panel below the climate
controls.
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard
Warning Flashers. When the switch is
activated, all directional turn signals
will flash on and off to warn oncoming
traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a
second time to turn off the Hazard Warning
Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek assis-
tance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning
Flashers may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Buttons
If equipped, the overhead console contains an
ASSIST and an SOS button.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only func-
tion if you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network. Other
Uconnect services will only be operable if
your SiriusXM Guardian™ service is active
and you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
1 — Assist Button
2 — SOS Button
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
6
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you’ll be connected to someone who can
help. Roadside Assistance will know what
vehicle you’re driving and its location. Addi-
tional fees may apply for roadside assis-
tance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care –
In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the overhead
console.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a ten second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To
cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
call button on the overhead console or press
the cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the
green LED light on the overhead console.
2. The LED light located between the ASSIST
and SOS buttons on the overhead console
will turn green once a connection to a SOS
operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and
a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call
system may transmit the following
important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system
to determine if additional help is needed.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open
a voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional help is needed. Once the
SOS operator opens a voice connection with
the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occur-
ring in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call
system will attempt to remain connected
with the SOS operator until the SOS oper-
ator terminates the connection.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 277
(Continued)
(Continued)
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle infor-
mation and GPS coordinates.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in
Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS
system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The light located between the ASSIST and SOS
buttons will continuously be illuminated red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
“Vehicle device requires service. Please
contact an authorized dealer.”
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from an Emergency Services
Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s operable network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable
network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and
GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
aftermarket electrical equipment to the
vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system
to fail, never add aftermarket equipment
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to
fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to help
protect you.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
6
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
Delayed accessories mode is active
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware are damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are
unavailable or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call
system to function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
The Occupant Restraint Control module
turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant
Restraint Control system immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full
responsibility and assume all risks related to
the use of the features and applications in
this vehicle. Only use the features and
applications when it is safe to do so. Failure
to do so may result in an accident involving
serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solution
directly onto the mirror. Apply the solution
onto a clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 279
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Automatic Transmission Indicator Lamp 658
Heater Control Lamps (2) 194
Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp (Rear Window Defogger, and Rear Wash/
Wipe)
**
Soundbar Dome Lamp 912
** Bulbs only available from an authorized dealer.
6
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Name Bulb Number
Headlamps (2) H13
Premium Head Lamps LED – (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Sport Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) 7442NALL
Premium Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) LED – (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Base (Sahara/Rubicon) Turn Lamp 7440NA
Base (Sahara/Rubicon) Park DRL Lamp 7443
Front Side Marker Lamps (2) LED – (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Base Fog Lamps PSX24W
Premium Fog Lamps LED – (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Rear Premium LED Tail Lamps LED – (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Rear Base Tail Lamp Stop/Tail/Turn Bulb 3157
Rear Base Tail Lamp Backup Bulb 7440
Rear Base Tail Lamp Side Marker LED – (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED – (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
License Lamp LED – (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer. If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer
or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 281
Bulb Replacement
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as
atmospheric conditions change to allow the
condensation to change back into a vapor.
Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate the
clearing process.
Halogen Headlamps
1. Open hood and support using prop rod.
2. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers
along the top a quarter turn counterclock-
wise and remove.
3. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting at
one side and working toward the other.
4. Remove the three screws holding the head-
lamp to the vehicle.
5. Remove lamp from the vehicle.
6. Remove the lamp from the collar.
7. Grasp the bulb and rotate a quarter turn
counterclockwise.
8. Pull the bulb from the housing.
9. Push connector locking tab to the unlock
position.
10. Remove connector from bulb.
11. Push connector onto new bulb base, and
push the connector locking tab to the lock
position.
12. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb a
quarter turn clockwise.
Front Park/Turn Signal
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to
access bulb sockets.
Wheel Liner
2. Turn the socket assembly a quarter turn
counterclockwise and remove from
housing. Pull the bulb straight from the
socket to replace.
LED Front Side Marker
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to
access side maker screw and electrical
connector.
2. Remove fastening screw in the back of the
front side maker assembly and disconnect
electrical connector.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.
Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily
surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
6
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Remove and replace LED front side marker
light assembly.
Halogen Front Fog Lamp
1. Reach under the vehicle to access the
back of the front fog lamp.
2. Disconnect the wire harness connector
from the front fog lamp connector recep-
tacle.
3. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latch
features and squeeze them together to
unlock the bulb from the back of the front
fog lamp housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed
opening in the housing and then connect
the replacement bulb.
LED Front Fog Lamp
If your vehicle is equipped with LED fog lamps
they are replaced as an assembly.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And Backup
Lamp
1. Remove interior trim panel cap to access
single retaining screw for tail lamp
assembly.
Trim Cap
2. Remove retaining screw and disconnect
electrical connector, then remove tail lamp
assembly from the vehicle.
NOTE:
If necessary, push in on the assembly tab
located inboard behind the lamp housing.
Retaining Screw
3. Remove the three screws from assembly
bracket to access bulb sockets.
Assembly Bracket
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers.
Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb
life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily
surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 283
4. Rotate the appropriate socket a quarter
turn counterclockwise, then remove it from
the housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to
replace.
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that
extends upward from the swing gate behind the
spare tire. If service is needed, obtain the LED
Assembly from an authorized dealer.
1. Remove the spare tire.
2. Remove the screws holding the tire carrier
cover.
3. Remove two screws from lamp assembly
and disconnect electrical connector.
License Plate Lamps
See an authorized dealer to replace these LED
assemblies.
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery
discharge.
Blade Fuses
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Failure to
use proper fuses may result in serious
personal injury, fire and/or property
damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system,
gearbox system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse ele-
ment.
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse el-
ement (blown fuse).
6
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Power Distribution Center (PDC)
The Power Distribution Center is located in the
engine compartment near the battery. This
center contains cartridge fuses, mini fuses, and
relays. The PDC top cover is labeled with each
serviceable fuse/relay location, function, and
size.
Power Distribution Center
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F01 – – Spare
F02 40 Amp Green – Starter
F03 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F04 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump MTR/FPCM
F05 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
F06 – – Spare
F07 – 15 Amp Blue Low Temp Radiator Cooling Pump (LTR) — If Equipped
F08 – 15 Amp Blue Trans Control Module TCM-8HP CYGNUS
F09 – – Spare
F10 – 15 Amp Blue Key Ignition Node (KIN)/Radio Frequency Hub (RF HUB)/Electric Steering Column
Lock (ESCL)
F11 – 10 Amp Red UCI Port (USB & AUX)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 285
F12 – 25 Amp Clear HIFI Amplifier
F13 – – Spare
F14 – – Spare
F15 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/Switch Bank-Heavy Duty Electrical Pkg (SWITCH
BANK-HD ELEC)
F16 – – Spare
F17 – – Spare
F18 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch (AC CLUTCH)
F19 – – Spare
F20 30 Amp Pink – Central Body Controller (CBC) 1-INTERIOR LIGHTS
F21 – 20 Amp Yellow REAR WIPER
F22 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Motor Generator
Unit (MGU) WAKE UP/Power Pack Unit (PPU) WAKE UP
F23 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Engine Control Module (ECM)
F24 – – Spare
F25 – 10 Amp Red Module Shift By Wire (MOD_SBW)
F26 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 2-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #1
F27 30 Amp Pink – Front Wipers
F28 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 3-POWER LOCKS
F29 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 4-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #2
F30 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
6
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F31 – 10 Amp Red DIAGNOSTIC PORT
F32 – 10 Amp Red Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning Mod (HVAC CTRL MOD)/Steering Column Lock
(SCL)/Occupant Classification Module (OCM)/Driver Presence Detection Module
(DPDM)
F33 – 10 Amp Red ParkTronics System (PTS)/Infrared Camera Module (IRCM)/Airbag Disable Lamps
(AIRBAG DISABLE LMPS)
F34 – 10 Amp Red Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Electric Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS)/Smart
Bar Control Module (SBCM) WAKE UP
F35 30 Amp Pink – BRAKE VAC PMP — If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink – TRAILER TOW MOD — If Equipped
F37 30 Amp Pink – TRAILER TOW CONN 7W — If Equipped
F38 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module ECM
F39 – – Spare
F40 – 15 Amp Blue DriveTrain Control Module (DTCM)/Axle Lock (AXLE LOC) FT_RR
F41 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster (IC)/Security GateWay (SGW) WAKE UP
F42 – 10 Amp Red Power Control Relay Control Feed (Electric Stop/Start)/Spare (Belt Starter
Generator) -- If Equipped
F43 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUTLET (CARGO) BATT
F44 – 10 Amp Red InfraRed Camera (IRCAM) HEATERS
F45 – 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUTLET (CARGO) IGN*
F46 – 10 Amp Red AUTO HDLP LVL MOD/LVL MTR/HDLP SW
F47 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 287
F48 – – Spare
F49 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller ORC
F50 – 10 Amp Red HD ACC — If Equipped
F51 – 10 Amp Red Digital TV (DSRC)/USB/InSide RearView Mirror (ISRVM)/ Compass Module (CSGM)
F52 – 20 Amp Yellow CIGAR LTR
F53 – – Spare
F54 – – Spare
F55 – – Spare
F56 – 10 Amp Red IN-CAR TEMP SENSOR
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Driver Heated Seat
F58 – 20 Amp Yellow Front Pass Heated Seat
F59 – – Spare
F60 – 15 Amp Blue Comfort Steering Wheel Module (CSWM) (HTD STR WHEEL)
F61 – 10 Amp Red Left Blind Spot Sensor (LBSS)/Right Blind Spot Sensor (RBSS)
F62 – – Spare
F63 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
F64 – – Spare
F65 – – Spare
F66 40 Amp Green – HVAC BLOWER MTR Front
F67 – – Spare
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
6
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
F68 – – Spare
F69 – 5 Amp Tan Motor Generator Unit MGU Belt Starter Generator (BSG) — If Equipped
F70 – 25 Amp Clear INJ/IGN COIL (GAS)/GLO PLUG MOD (DSL)
F71 – – Spare
F72 – 10 Amp Red HD ELEC ACC PKG — If Equipped
F73 20 Amp Blue – PWR TOP LT
F74 20 Amp Blue – PWR TOP RT
F75 – 10 Amp Red Power Pack Unit - Battery Pack Control Module & Auxiliary Power Module
(PPU-BPCM & APM) Belt Starter Generator (BSG) — If Equipped
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM (GAS)/PCM (DSL)
F77 – 10 Amp Red HEATED MIRRORS
F78 – 10 Amp Red COMP/INTRUSION/SIREN/INTRUSION SENSORS
F79 – 20 Amp Yellow SMART BAR CTRL MOD
F80 – 15 Amp Blue Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
F81 30 Amp Pink – REAR DEFROSTER (EBL)
F82 30 Amp Pink – FUEL HTR — If Equipped
F83 60 Amp Yellow – GLOW PLUG — If Equipped
F84 30 Amp Pink – UREA HTR CTRL UNIT — If Equipped
F85 – 10 Amp Red PM SENSOR — If Equipped
F86 30 Amp Pink – BRAKE VAC PMP 2 — If Equipped
F87 – 10 Amp Red SUPPLY/PURGING PMP — If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 289
F88 20 Amp Blue – NOx SENSOR #1/ #2 — IF Equipped
F89 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)/ Cruise Control (CRUISE CTL)/Digital TV
(DTV)
F90 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW PARK LMP — If Equipped
F91 – 20 Amp Yellow HORN
F92 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #2 — If Equipped
F93 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #1 — If Equipped
F94 – 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)/RF Hub system (CORAX)
F95 – – Spare
F96 – 10 Amp Red PWR MIRROR SW
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow RADIO/TBM
F98 – 10 Amp Red SW BANK-HD ELEC/OFF ROAD
F99 – – Spare
F100 30 Amp Pink – ESC-ECU & VALVES
F101 30 Amp Pink – DriveTrain Control Module (DTCM)
F102 – 15 Amp Blue DUAL USB PORT
F103 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #3 — If Equipped
F104 – 15 Amp Blue PPU COOL PUMP — If Equipped
F105 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Center Stack (ICS)/Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning (HVAC)
F106 40 Amp Green – Electronic Speed Control (ESC)-PUMP MTR
F107 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN LT — If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
6
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
* Customer can select to switch the Cargo Power Outlet from F43 battery fed power to this position F45 which is fed when the ignition in ON.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
F108 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #4 — If Equipped
F109 – 20 Amp Yellow TRAILER TOW STOP/TURN RT — If Equipped
F110 30 Amp Pink – POWER INVERTER
F111 20 Amp Blue – TRAILER TOW BACKUP — If Equipped
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
CAUTION!
When installing the power distribution
center cover, it is important to ensure the
cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water to
get into the power distribution center and
possibly result in an electrical system
failure.
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important
to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with a
rating other than indicated may result in a
dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must
be corrected.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 291
Jack Location
The jack and lug wrench are located in the rear
cargo area. To remove jack and tools proceed
as follows:
1. Lift the load floor in the cargo area.
Load Floor
NOTE:
The load floor can be removed for easier access
by pulling the load floor directly rearward
2. Remove the hardware storage cover by
pinching the latch on the left side and
pulling upward.
Hardware Storage Cover Latch
3. Turn the plastic wing nut counterclockwise
to loosen the jack from the storage bin.
Plastic Wing Nut Location
4. Remove tool kit and assemble tools.
Spare Tire Removal
1. To remove the spare tire from the carrier,
remove the tire cover, if equipped.
2. Remove the Rear Camera Cover by turning
the lock bolt counterclockwise with the
#T40 Torx head driver and ratchet from the
supplied tool kit.
Unlock Rear Camera Cover
6
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
3. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench
turning them counterclockwise. If equipped,
remove the locking lug nut with the lock key
(located in the glove box) turning it counter-
clockwise.
Removing The Spare Tire
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Shift the automatic transmission into
PARK (P), or a manual transmission into
REVERSE (R).
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Apply the parking brake firmly and shift an
automatic transmission in PARK; a manual
transmission to REVERSE.
Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 293
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from
the stored location.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
nuts by turning them to the left one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools.
Connect the jack handle driver to the exten-
sion, then to the lug wrench.
Assembled Jack And Tools
4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear of
the vehicle. Place the jack under the axle
tube, as shown. Do not raise the vehicle
until you are sure the jack is fully engaged.
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated.
6
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Rear Lifting Point
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw
clockwise. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough
clearance is obtained to install the spare
tire. Minimum tire lift provides maximum
stability.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Mount the spare tire on the axle.
8. Install the lug nuts with the cone-shaped
end toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the lug
nuts clockwise.
9. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw
to the counterclockwise, and remove the
jack.
10. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while tightening for increased
leverage. Alternate nuts until each nut has
been tightened twice. Refer to “Wheel And
Tire Torque Specifications” in “Technical
Specifications” for correct lug nut torque.
11. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all lug nuts are properly seated against the
wheel.
12. Remove the jack assembly and wheel
blocks.
13. Secure the jack and tools in their proper
locations.
14. Secure the damaged wheel/tire on the
spare tire carrier. Torque down lug nuts and
locking lug nut.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 295
15. Return the lock bolt to the lock position on
the camera cover by turning the lock clock-
wise using the provided #40 Torx head
driver and ratchet. Then, reinstall the
camera cover by slipping it over the
camera/tire carrier until it snaps into place.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the cone
shaped end of the nut toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on
the wrench while at the end of the handle
for increased leverage. Tighten the lug nuts
in a star pattern until each nut has been
tightened twice. For the correct lug nut
torque refer to “Wheel And Tire Torque
Specifications” in “Technical Specifica-
tions”. If in doubt about the correct tight-
ness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or service
station.
5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all lug nuts are properly seated against the
wheel.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases
where the transmission will not shift out of
PARK (P) (such as a depleted battery), a Manual
Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park
Release:
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop, could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places
provided.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury.
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully applying
the parking brake before activating the
Manual Park Release. In addition, you should
be seated in the driver’s seat with your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when activating the
Manual Park Release. Activating the Manual
Park Release will allow your vehicle to roll
away if it is not secured by the parking brake,
or by proper connection to a tow vehicle.
Activating the Manual Park Release on an
unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury
or death for those in or around the vehicle.
6
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
remove the manual park release cover,
located above the gear selector, to access
the release tether strap.
Manual Park Release Cover
3. Fish the tether strap up through the opening
in the console base.
Tether Strap
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
5. Pull the tether strap up and to the left until
the release lever locks into place in the
vertical position. The vehicle is now out of
PARK (P) and can be moved. Release the
parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Pull upward on the tether strap, releasing it
from the “locked” position.
2. Lower the Manual Park Release lever down-
ward and to the right, into its original posi-
tion.
3. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the
console, and reinstall the cover.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 297
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
Preparations For Jump Start
Supplemental Battery — If Equipped
The battery in your vehicle is located in the right
rear of the engine compartment.
Positive Battery Post
NOTE:
The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access
to the post.
If your vehicle is equipped with a Stop/Start
system, it will be equipped with two batteries.
Refer to “Stop/Start System — If Equipped” in
“Starting and Operating” for further information.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
WARNING!
Only use the positive battery post on the
main battery to jump start your vehicle.
Serious injury or death could result if you
attempt to jump start using the supple-
mental battery.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting.
6
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the auto-
matic transmission into PARK (P) (manual
transmission in NEUTRAL) and turn the
ignition OFF.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unneces-
sary electrical accessories.
3. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cable’s reach, apply the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF.
Jump Starting Procedure
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other or
either vehicle while making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
Jumper Cable Connections
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive (+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 299
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground
(exposed metal part of the discharged
vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the
jumper cables in the reverse sequence.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the
jumper cable from the engine ground of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable from the negative (-) post of
the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable from the remote positive
(+) post of the discharged vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle you should have the battery and
charging system tested at an authorized dealer.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, shift transmis-
sion into NEUTRAL, but do not increase
engine idle speed.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause the
battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific ground
point, do not use any other exposed metal
parts.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine above
2,000 rpm since it provides no charging
benefit, wastes fuel, and can damage booster
vehicle engine.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s
battery will discharge sufficiently to degrade
battery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
6
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. For vehi-
cles with automatic transmission, push and
hold the lock button on the gear selector. Then,
shift back and forth between DRIVE (D) and
REVERSE (R) (with automatic transmission) or
SECOND GEAR (2) and REVERSE (R) (with
manual transmission), while gently pressing the
accelerator. Use the least amount of acceler-
ator pedal pressure that will maintain the
rocking motion, without spinning the wheels or
racing the engine.
NOTE:
For vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R)
can only be achieved at wheel speeds of
5 mph (8 km/h) or less. Whenever the trans-
mission remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more
than two seconds, you must press the brake
pedal to engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Push the “ESC OFF” switch to place the Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) system in
“Partial Off” mode before rocking the vehicle.
Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System” in
“Safety” for further information. Once the
vehicle has been freed, push the “ESC OFF”
switch again to restore “ESC On” mode.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer
remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous
chimes, turn the engine off immediately and
call for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 301
(Continued)
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission
failure during prolonged efforts to free a
stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE/SECOND GEAR and
REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
CAUTION! (Continued)
6
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the transmission and drivetrain are operable,
disabled vehicles may also be towed as described under “Recreational Towing” in the “Starting And Operating” section.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing device to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
bumpers or associated brackets. State and
local laws regarding vehicles under tow must be
observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC
position.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to
"Manual Park Release" in this chapter for
instructions on shifting the automatic transmis-
sion out of PARK (P) in order to move the
vehicle.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground 4WD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE See instructions under “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And
Operating”.
• Automatic Transmission in PARK (P)
• Manual Transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL)
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL (N)
• Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD
CAUTION!
Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 303
(Continued)
Four Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with all
wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable methods
are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with one
end of the vehicle raised and the opposite end
on a towing dolly.
If flatbed equipment is not available and the
transfer case is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (in the forward direction, with ALL wheels
on the ground), IF the transfer case is in
NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in PARK
(P) (for automatic transmissions) or in gear
(NOT in NEUTRAL, for manual transmissions).
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And
Operating” for detailed instructions.
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, they
are mounted in the front and the rear.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk
of damage to the vehicle. Always use an appro-
priately rated tow strap.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced Acci-
dent Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the
Enhanced Accident Response System (EARS)
function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under certain
crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air
bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information on the Event
Data Recorder (EDR).
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a front or rear
wheel lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious
injury or death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with
tow hooks. Tow straps may become disen-
gaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to
rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use
tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway
towing. You could damage your vehicle. Tow
straps are recommended when towing the
vehicle, chains may cause vehicle damage.
6
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change indi-
cator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate. This
means that service is required for your vehicle.
Operating conditions such as frequent
short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or cold
ambient temperatures will influence when the
“Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” message
is displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can
cause the change oil message to illuminate as
early as 3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last
reset. Have your vehicle serviced as soon as
possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
On vehicles equipped with instrument cluster
display, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed
and a single chime will sound, indicating that an
oil change is necessary.
On non-instrument cluster display equipped
vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash in the instru-
ment cluster odometer and a single chime will
sound, indicating that an oil change is neces-
sary.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the sched-
uled oil change. If a scheduled oil change is
performed by someone other than an autho-
rized dealer, the message can be reset by refer-
ring to the steps described under “Instrument
Cluster Display” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” for further information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off road environment or
is operated predominately at idle or only very
low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check the engine oil level.
Check the windshield washer fluid level.
Check the tire inflation pressures and look
for unusual wear or damage, rotate at the
first sign of irregular wear.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
brake master cylinder, and power steering,
and fill as needed.
Check the function of all interior and exterior
lights.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 305
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance plan on the following pages for the required maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter
Rotate the tires
NOTE:
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required
Inspect the CV/Universal joints
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses and park brake
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
Inspect exhaust system
Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or off-road conditions
Inspect all door latches for presence of grease, reapply if necessary
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first):
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod
ends, rear suspension, and replace
if necessary
X X X X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as
necessary
X X X X X X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four wheel disc
brakes
X X X X X X X
Inspect transfer case fluid X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air
filter
X X X X X X X
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307
Replace Spark Plugs – 2.0L Engine
1
X X
Replace spark plugs – 3.6L Engine
2
X
Flush and replace the engine,
intercooler (if equipped), battery (if
equipped), and Motor Generator Unit
(MGU) (if equipped) coolant at 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km)
whichever comes first
X X
Change the manual transmission
fluid if using your vehicle for any of
the following: trailer towing, snow
plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police,
delivery service (commercial
service), off-road, desert operation
or more than 50% of your driving is
at sustained high speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C)
X X X X X
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first):
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Change transfer case fluid if using
your vehicle for any of the following:
police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer
towing
X X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary
X
Change front and rear axle fluid if
using your vehicle for police, taxi,
fleet, off-road or frequent trailer
towing
X X X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
2. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first):
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 309
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) or
350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle is
operated in a dusty and off road environment or
is operated predominately at idle or only very
low engine RPM. This type of vehicle use is
considered Severe Duty.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an acci-
dent.
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.0L Engine
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Power Pack Unit Pressure Reservoir Cap — If Equipped
2 — Battery 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Intercooler/Motor Generator Unit Coolant Reservoir — If Equipped
4 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 11 — Engine Air Cleaner
6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 311
3.6L Engine
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 7 — Power Pack Unit Pressure Cap — If Equipped
2 — Battery 8 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Motor Generator Unit Coolant Reservoir — If Equipped
4 — Engine Oil Fill 10 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir Cap
5 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 11 — Engine Air Cleaner
6 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Checking Oil Level
To ensure proper lubrication of your vehicle's
engine, the engine oil must be maintained at
the correct level. The engine oil level should be
checked five minutes after a warmed up engine
has been shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings. Always maintain the oil level within
the SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding 1 quart
(0.95 liters) of oil when the reading is at the
bottom of the crosshatch zone will result in a
reading at the top of the crosshatch zone on
these engines.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers
and the rear window washer (if equipped) is
shared. The fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir with
windshield washer solvent only (not radiator
antifreeze). When refilling the washer fluid
reservoir, take some washer fluid and apply it to
a cloth or towel and wipe clean the wiper
blades; this will help blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information
can be found on most washer fluid containers.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a mainte-
nance-free battery. You will never have to add
water, nor is periodic maintenance required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercial windshield washer solvents are
flammable. They could ignite and burn you.
Care must be exercised when filling or
working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump
Starting Procedure” in “In Case Of Emer-
gency” for further information.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 313
(Continued)
Pressure Washing
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main
and the supplemental batteries must be
disconnected to completely de-energize the
12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do
not disconnect both batteries. To learn how
to properly disconnect, see your authorized
dealer.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the nega-
tive cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
WARNING! (Continued)
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main
and the supplemental batteries must be
disconnected to completely de-energize the
12 Volt electrical system.
If the negative battery cables are not
isolated properly it can cause a potential
power spike or surge in the system,
resulting in damage to essential electrical
components.
CAUTION!
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the
pressures generated by these machines is
such that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Engine Oil
Change Engine Oil — Gasoline Engine
Refer to “Scheduled Servicing” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
12 months or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
Engine Oil Selection — 2.0L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommend engine oils that
are API SN PLUS certified and meet the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS-13340. An
equivalent full synthetic engine oil can be used
if it meets API SN PLUS Certification. If SN PLUS
or equivalent oil is unavailable then please
contact your local dealership for recommenda-
tion.
Engine Oil Selection — 3.6L Engine
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer only recommends engine oils
that are API Certified and meet the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American Petro-
leum Institute (API). The manufac-
turer only recommends API Certified
engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 2.0L
Engine
Mopar API SN PLUS Certified SAE 5W-30 Full
Synthetic Engine Oil which meets the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS-13340 is
recommended for all operating temperatures.
This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom-
mended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For
information on engine oil filler cap location,
refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration
in this section.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 3.6L
Engine
Mopar SAE 0W-20 engine oil approved to FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil,
Shell Helix or equivalent is recommended for all
operating temperatures. This engine oil
improves low temperature starting and vehicle
fuel economy.
The engine oil filler cap also shows the recom-
mended engine oil viscosity for your engine. For
information on engine oil filler cap location,
refer to the “Engine Compartment” illustration
in this section.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Failure to use the recommended SN PLUS or
equivalent oil can cause engine damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 315
Lubricants which do not have both the engine
oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against the addition of any additives (other than
leak detection dyes) to the engine oil. Engine oil
is an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact
an authorized dealer, service station or govern-
mental agency for advice on how and where
used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
This manufacturer's engines have a full-flow
type disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type
for replacement. The quality of replacement
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
service. Mopar engine oil filters are high quality
oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner
filters varies considerably. Only high quality
filters should be used to ensure most efficient
service. Mopar engine air cleaner filters are a
high quality filter and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and
Replacement — Gasoline Engine
Follow the recommended maintenance inter-
vals as shown in the Maintenance Schedule in
this section.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction
system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed.
Failure to do so can result in serious personal
injury.
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal
1. Loosen the retainers from the air cleaner
cover using a suitable tool.
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air
cleaner filter.
Air Cleaner Filter Cover
3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from
the housing assembly.
Air Cleaner Filter
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation
NOTE:
Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is
present before replacing the air filter element.
1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the
housing assembly with the air cleaner filter
inspection surface facing downward.
2. Tighten air cleaner cover retainers using a
suitable tool.
Accessory Drive Belt Inspection
1 — Retainers
2 — Air Filter Cover
1 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface
2 — Air Cleaner Filter
WARNING!
Do not attempt to inspect an accessory
drive belt with vehicle running.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time regardless of ignition mode. You could
be injured by the moving fan blades.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 317
When inspecting accessory drive belts, small
cracks that run across the ribbed surface of the
belt, from rib to rib, are considered normal.
These are not a reason to replace a belt.
However, cracks running along a rib (not across)
are not normal. Any belt with cracks running
along a rib must be replaced. Also have the belt
replaced if it has excessive wear, frayed cords,
or severe glazing.
Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)
Conditions that would require replacement:
Rib chunking (one or more ribs has sepa-
rated from belt body)
Rib or belt wear
Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between
two ribs)
Belt slips
“Groove jumping" (belt does not maintain
correct position on pulley)
Belt broken
Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or
rumble is heard or felt while drive belt is in
operation)
NOTE:
Identify and correct problem before new belt is
installed.
Some conditions can be caused by a faulty
component such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys
should be carefully inspected for damage and
proper alignment.
Belt replacement on some models requires the
use of special tools, we recommend having your
vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air condi-
tioner should be checked and serviced by an
authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a compe-
tent mechanic.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R-134a
— If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydro-
fluorocarbon (HFC) that is an ozone-friendly
substance. The manufacturer recommends
that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
Polyalkylene Glycol (PAG) compressor oil and
refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling —
R–1234yf
R–1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. The manufacturer
recommends that air conditioning service be
performed by an authorized dealer using
recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
PAG compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement
(A/C Air Filter)
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air inlet
behind the glove compartment. Perform the
following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove
all contents.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by the manufacturer for
your air conditioning system. Some unap-
proved refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
Refer to Warranty Information Book,
located in your owner’s information kit, for
further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is in
the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the cabin air
filter removed and the blower operating, the
blower can contact hands and may propel dirt
and debris into your eyes, resulting in
personal injury.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 319
2. Push up on the glove compartment travel
stop and lower the door.
Glove Compartment Travel Stop
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that
secure the air filter access door to the HVAC
housing.
Air Filter Retaining Tabs
5. Remove the air filter from the HVAC air inlet
housing. Pull the filter elements out
pinching them to the right for clearance.
Air Filter
6. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter
position indicators pointing in the same
direction as removal.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an arrow
to indicate airflow direction through the filter.
Failure to properly install the filter will result
in the need to replace it more often.
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
7. Close A/C Air Filter access door and secure
retaining tabs.
8. Rotate the glove compartment door back
into position ensuring you have properly
engaged the travel damper.
Travel Dampener
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically with a lithium based grease, such
as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating excess oil
and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch release mechanism, and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Fall and Spring.
Apply a small amount of a high quality lubricant,
such as Mopar Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly
into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield periodically with a sponge or soft
cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will
remove accumulations of salt or road film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry wind-
shield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield. Keep the blade rubber
out of contact with petroleum products such as
engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies
depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. Poor performance of blades may be
present with chattering, marks, water lines or
wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following points:
Wear or uneven edges
Foreign material
Hardening or cracking
Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,
replace the affected wiper arm or blade with a
new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper arm
or blade that is damaged.
1 — Travel Dampener Housing
2 — Travel Dampener Rod
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 321
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the
full up position.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, press the release tab on the wiper
blade and while holding the wiper arm with
one hand, slide the wiper blade down
towards the base of the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove
the wiper blade from the wiper arm.
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on
the tip of the wiper arm.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through
the opening in the wiper blade.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
the wiper arm, latch engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm
3 — Release Tab
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Arm J Hook
3 — J Hook Retainer
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Open swing gate to access the wiper arm.
Rear Wiper Assembly
2. Lift wiper arm off of the glass and rotate
wiper blade outward to disengage the wiper
blade from the wiper arm.
Wiper Blade And Wiper Arm
3. Gently set the arm on the glass.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass.
2. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
opening on the end of the wiper arm and
rotate the wiper in to place.
3. Place with wiper on the glass and close the
tail gate.
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
1 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
2 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 323
(Continued)
(Continued)
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly main-
tained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the under-
side or rear of the vehicle is damaged; have an
authorized technician inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or misposi-
tioned parts. Open seams or loose connections
could permit exhaust fumes to seep into the
passenger compartment. In addition, have the
exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle
is raised for lubrication or oil change. Replace
as required.
Under normal operating conditions, the cata-
lytic converter will not require maintenance.
However, it is important to keep the engine
properly tuned to ensure proper catalyst opera-
tion and prevent possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunc-
tioning engine operation, a scorching odor may
suggest severe and abnormal catalyst over-
heating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn off
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless
and odorless. Breathing it can make you
unconscious and can eventually poison you.
To avoid breathing CO, refer to “Safety Tips”
in “Safety” for further information.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn. Such
materials might be grass or leaves coming
into contact with your exhaust system. Do
not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact
anything that can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri-
ously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
WARNING! (Continued)
Damage to the catalytic converter can
result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
operating condition. In the event of engine
malfunction, particularly involving engine
misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to manufacturer's specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-
mission is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition
components disconnected or removed, such
as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
Cooling System
Coolant Checks
Check the engine, battery (if equipped), inter-
cooler (if equipped), and Motor Generator Unit
(MGU) (if equipped) coolant (antifreeze) protec-
tion every 12 months (before the onset of
freezing weather, where applicable). If the
engine, battery (if equipped), intercooler (if
equipped), and MGU (if equipped) coolant (anti-
freeze) is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check the
front of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or radi-
ator for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If
dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a
garden hose vertically down the face of the A/C
condenser (if equipped) or the back of the radi-
ator core.
Check the engine, battery (if equipped), inter-
cooler (if equipped), and MGU (if equipped)
cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,
cracking, tears, cuts, and tightness of the
connection at the coolant recovery bottle and
radiator. Inspect the entire system for leaks. DO
NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP
WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
NOTE:
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant (anti-
freeze) (conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never open a cooling system pressure
cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is
hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 325
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result
in engine damage and may decrease corro-
sion protection. Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant is different and should
not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible” coolant
(antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine coolant
(antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling
system in an emergency, the cooling system
will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled
with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not
use additional rust inhibitors or antirust prod-
ucts, as they may not be compatible with the
radiator engine coolant and may plug the
radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for
using Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze) that meets the require-
ments of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):
We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,
000 km) Formula OAT (Organic Additive
Technology) that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an
authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/
engine coolant (antifreeze) solution. The use
of lower quality water will reduce the amount
of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
according to the temperatures occurring in
the area where the vehicle is operated.
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact a local autho-
rized dealer.
Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is
not recommended and can result in cooling
system damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are
mixed in an emergency, have a authorized
dealer drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant (antifreeze) will return to
the radiator from the coolant expansion bottle/
recovery tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
is a regulated substance requiring proper
disposal. Check with your local authorities to
determine the disposal rules for your commu-
nity. To prevent ingestion by animals or chil-
dren, do not store ethylene glycol-based coolant
in open containers or allow it to remain in
puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child or
pet, seek emergency assistance immediately.
Clean up any ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual
method for determining that the coolant level is
adequate. With the engine OFF and cold, the
level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the ranges indicated
on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full,
so there is no need to remove the radiator/
coolant pressure cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or
replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle
need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is
needed to maintain the proper level, only OAT
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 should be added
to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 327
Engine Coolant Level — 2.0L
With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the
engine coolant should be within the OK range
between the ADD and FULL range on the
dipstick.
1. Remove the cap with level dipstick from
the engine coolant bottle.
2. Clean off the coolant from the dipstick.
3. Rest the cap on the opening of the coolant
bottle without tightening the cap.
4. Remove the cap with dipstick and check the
coolant level on the dipstick.
The radiator normally remains completely full,
so there is no need to remove the radiator/
coolant pressure cap unless checking for
engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or
replacing coolant. Advise your service attendant
of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle
need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is
needed to maintain the proper level, only OAT
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 should be added
to the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points To Remember
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compart-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the
contents of the coolant expansion bottle
must also be protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) addi-
tions are required, the cooling system should
be pressure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concen-
tration at a minimum of 50% OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) and distilled
water for proper corrosion protection of your
engine which contains aluminum compo-
nents.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever
necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-
mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-
factory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and
increased emissions.
Brake System
In order to ensure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be
inspected periodically. Refer to the “Mainte-
nance Plan” in this section for the proper main-
tenance intervals.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced, or
immediately if the brake system warning light is
on. If necessary, add fluid to bring level within
the designated marks on the side of the reser-
voir of the brake master cylinder. Be sure to
clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing cap. With disc brakes, fluid level can
be expected to fall as the brake pads wear.
Brake fluid level should be checked when pads
are replaced. If the brake fluid is abnormally
low, check the system for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
Front/Rear Axle Fluid
For normal service, periodic fluid level checks
are not required. When the vehicle is serviced
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubri-
cants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information. Using the wrong type of
brake fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reser-
voir.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or
fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container. Keep the master cylinder reser-
voir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from
the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This
may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
hard or prolonged braking, resulting in
sudden brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 329
for other reasons the exterior surfaces of the
axle assembly should be inspected. If gear oil
leakage is suspected inspect the fluid level.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
Lubricant should be approximately 1/8 inch
(3 mm) below the bottom edge of the oil fill hole.
NOTE:
Make sure that the vehicle is level and
supported by the axles
Adding Fluid
Add lubricant only at the fill hole and only to the
level specified above.
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Tech-
nical Specifications” for further information.
Transfer Case
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only the manufacturer's recommended
fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Tech-
nical Specifications” for further information.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of
the fill hole when the vehicle is in a level posi-
tion.
Transfer Case
Drain And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this section
for the proper maintenance intervals.
Manual Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
Use only manufacturer's recommended manual
transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubri-
cants” in “Technical Specifications” for further
information.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug.
The fluid level should be between the bottom of
the fill hole and a point not more than 3/16 of
an inch (4.76 mm) below the bottom of the
hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper
level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will give satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle. If the fluid
becomes contaminated with water, it should be
changed immediately. Otherwise, change the
fluid as recommended in the Maintenance Plan.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper
maintenance intervals.
Automatic Transmission
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission perfor-
mance and life. Use only the manufacturer's
specified transmission fluid. Refer to “Fluids
1 — Fill hole
2 — Drain hole
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications”
for fluid specifications. It is important to main-
tain the transmission fluid at the correct level
using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
Special Additives
The manufacturer strongly recommends
against using any special additives in the trans-
mission. Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) is
an engineered product and its performance
may be impaired by supplemental additives.
Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the
transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers
as they may adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer immedi-
ately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe transmis-
sion damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not
required. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturer’s recommended fluid may
cause deterioration in transmission shift
quality and/or torque converter shudder.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical
Specifications” for fluid specifications.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your
transmission as the chemicals can damage
your transmission components. Such damage
is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An
authorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 331
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service
station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire Identi-
fication Numbers, Tire Terminology and Defini-
tions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the
letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation. Example: P215/65R15
95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have the
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
31x10.5 R15 LT.
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code
(TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 333
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white
sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black
sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Term Definition
B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a
minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per
square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire
placard.
Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity,
the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
EXAMPLE:
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 335
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended pres-
sure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1.
Number of people that can be carried in the
vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation pres-
sures specified on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the
“Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded.
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
For further information on GAWRs, vehicle
loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle
Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of this manual.
To determine the maximum loading conditions
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the avail-
able amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if “XXX” amount
equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five
150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage
load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750
(5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the avail-
able cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples
on how to calculate total load, cargo/
luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table
is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load carry
capacity of your vehicle.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 337
For the following example, the combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfort-
able ride. Overinflation produces a jarring and
uncomfortable ride.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stopping
distance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload
them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 339
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13
to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce this
normal pressure build up or your tire pressure
will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds, main-
taining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced
vehicle loading may be required for high-speed
vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve
stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pres-
sure sensor as well as it is not designed to be
reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a run flat tire is changed after
driving with underinflated tire condition, please
replace the TPM sensor as it is not designed to
be reused when driven under run flat mode
14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice condi-
tions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In Case Of
Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause
tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and
injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle's
wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) for more
than 30 seconds continuously when you are
stuck, and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 341
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equip-
ment tires to help you in determining when your
tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced.
Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for
further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These
abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and perfor-
mance when replacement is needed. Refer to
the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in
this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard or the Vehicle Certification Label
for the size designation of your tire. The Load
Index and Speed Symbol for your tire will be
found on the original equipment tire sidewall.
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in the
“Tire Safety Information” section of this manual
for more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire.
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the orig-
inal wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent replace-
ment tires may adversely affect the safety,
handling, and ride of your vehicle.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedometer
and odometer readings.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice
conditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving too
fast for conditions also creates the possibility
of loss of vehicle control.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 343
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the orig-
inal equipment tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so
may adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to orig-
inal equipment or an authorized tire dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
Refer to the “Towing Requirements - Tires” in
“Starting And Operating” for restrictions when
towing with a spare tire designated for tempo-
rary emergency use.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an autho-
rized tire dealer for the recommended tire rota-
tion pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than
one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with a compact or limited use
temporary spare installed. Damage to the
vehicle may result.
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size
spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the
same as your original equipment tire, replace (or
repair) the original equipment tire and reinstall
on the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emer-
gency use only. This tire is identified by a label
located on the limited use spare wheel. This label
contains the driving limitations for this spare.
This tire may look like the original equipped tire
on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is
not. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same
as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent corro-
sion. Wash wheels with the same soap solution
recommended for the body of the vehicle and
remember to always wash when the surfaces
are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
and equipment to prevent damage to the
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to
the tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the
limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 345
(Continued)
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recom-
mended or select a non-abrasive, non-acidic
cleaner for aluminum or chrome wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from
the brake components. This activity will remove
the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Follow these recommen-
dations to guard against damage.
Traction device must be of proper size for the
tire, as recommended by the traction device
manufacturer.
Install on rear tires only.
All OE equipped tire and wheel sizes are
chainable with an Autosock traction device.
See Autosock.com for the recommended
part or model number for your OE equipped
tire size.
The use of S-class snow chains is permitted
with the use of 245/75R17 tires on size 17 x
7.5 ET44.45 wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds.
They will permanently damage this finish and
such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY
USING MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT
CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this is all that
is required to maintain this finish.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose
control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only trac-
tion devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage.
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device
before further use.
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, handling, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the proper
maintenance intervals. The reasons for any
rapid or unusual wear should be corrected prior
to rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “rear-
ward-cross” shown in the following diagram.
Tire Rotation (Rearward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in addi-
tion to these grades.
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not
require retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference
in tire size can cause damage to the transfer
case. Tire rotation schedule should be
followed to balance tire wear.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 347
(Continued)
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to varia-
tions in driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a speci-
fied indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel, than the minimum
required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
characteristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
under-inflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21
days, we recommend that you take the following
steps to minimize the drain on your vehicle's
battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
If your vehicle is equipped with Stop/Start
system then disconnect both the main and
supplemental negative battery cables.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out
of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or
more, run the air conditioning system at idle
for about five minutes in the fresh air and
high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
If assistance is needed to disconnect the
battery system, see your authorized dealer.
Battery Cable Disconnect
NOTE:
You must isolate the supplemental battery
connection point, as well as the main battery
terminal from the post, as shown in the
image, to fully de-energize both batteries for
storage. If assistance is needed to discon-
nect the battery system, see your authorized
dealer.
Do not disconnect the Intelligent Battery
Sensor (IBS), or your Stop/Start system may
not function for up to 24 hours, due to the IBS
being set into learn mode.
BODYWORK
Protection From Atmospheric Agents
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly corro-
sive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
Vehicles with the Stop/Start system will be
equipped with two batteries. Both the main
and the supplemental batteries must be
disconnected to completely de-energize the
12 Volt electrical system.
Serious injury or death could result if you do
not disconnect both batteries. To learn how
to properly disconnect, see your authorized
dealer.
CAUTION!
If the negative battery cables are not isolated
properly it can cause a potential power spike
or surge in the system, resulting in damage to
essential electrical components.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Supplemental Negative Battery Cable
2 — Main Negative Battery Cable
3 — Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
4 — Main Negative Battery Terminal
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 349
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation
Stone and gravel impact
Insects, tree sap and tar
Salt in the air near seacoast localities
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less suscep-
tible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive mate-
rial to clean the lenses.
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with clear water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Take
care never to scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately. The
cost of such repairs is considered the respon-
sibility of the owner.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs
is considered the responsibility of the owner.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models
To maintain the appearance of your vehicle's
interior trim and top, follow these precautions:
Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with
the top down, as exposure to sun or rain may
damage interior trim.
Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching
agents on top material, as damage may
result.
Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down
and dry on the paint, leaving a streak.
After cleaning your vehicle's fabric top,
always make sure it is completely dry before
lowering.
Be especially careful when washing the
windows by following the directions for “Care
of Fabric Top Windows.”
Washing – Use Mopar Car Wash or equivalent,
or mild soap suds, lukewarm water, and a brush
with soft bristles. If extra cleaning is required,
use Mopar Convertible Cloth Top Cleaner or
equivalent, or a mild foaming cleaner on the
entire top, but support the top from underneath.
Rinsing – Be sure to remove all traces of
cleaner by rinsing the top thoroughly with clean
water. Remember to allow the top to dry before
lowering it.
Care Of Fabric Top Windows
Your vehicle's fabric top has pliable plastic
windows which can be scratched unless special
care is taken by following these directions:
Never use a dry cloth to remove dust.
Instead, use a microfiber towel or soft cotton
cloth moistened with cold or warm, clean
water, and wipe across the window, not up
and down. Mopar Jeep Soft Glass Window
Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all
plastic windows without scratching. It
removes fine scratches to improve visibility
and provides UV protection to help prevent
yellowing.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
interior water damage, stains or mildew on
the top material:
Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they
can damage the top material. Also,
increased water pressure may force past
the weather strips.
It is recommended that the top be free of
water prior to opening it. Operating the top,
opening a door or lowering a window while
the top is wet may allow water to drip into
the vehicle's interior.
Use care when washing the vehicle, water
pressure directed at the weather strip seals
may cause water to leak into the vehicle's
interior.
Careless handling and storage of the remov-
able roof panels may damage the seals,
causing water to leak into the vehicle's
interior.
The front panel(s) must be positioned properly
to ensure sealing. Improper installation can
cause water to leak into the vehicle's interior.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 351
(Continued)
When washing, never use hot water or
anything stronger than a mild soap. Never
use solvents such as alcohol or harsh
cleaning agents.
Always rinse thoroughly with cold water, then
wipe with a soft and slightly moist, clean
cloth.
When removing frost, snow or ice, never use
a scraper or de-icing chemicals. Use warm
water only if you must clean the window
quickly.
Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from
off-road driving will have an impact on plastic
retainer operation. Even normal on-road
driving and vehicle washing will eventually
impact window plastic retainer operation. To
maintain ease of use of the window plastic
retainers, each window plastic retainer
should be cleaned and lubricated regularly.
Clean them with a mild soap solution and a
small brush. Cleaning products are available
through an authorized dealer.
Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any
tape to the windows. Adhesives are hard to
remove and may damage the windows.
INTERIORS
Carpet Safety Information
Always use carpet designed to fit your vehicle.
Only use carpet that does not interfere with the
operation of the pedal assemblies. Only operate
the vehicle when the carpet is securely
attached by the grommets so it cannot slip out
of position and interfere with the pedal assem-
blies or impair safe operation of your vehicle in
other ways.
WARNING!
If operating the vehicle without carpet in
place the floor may become hot, and there
is a risk of burns.
An improperly attached, damaged, folded,
or damaged grommets may cause your
carpet to interfere with the accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals and cause a loss of
vehicle control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY
or DEATH: ALWAYS securely attach your
carpet using the grommets.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the carpet
(e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the carpet and
may cause interference with the acceler-
ator, brake, or clutch pedals.
ONLY install carpet designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install carpet that cannot
be properly attached and secured to your
vehicle. If the carpet needs to be replaced,
only use a FCA approved carpet for the
specific make, model, and year of your
vehicle.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check that the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Carpet Removal
Front Carpets (Two And Four Door Models):
1. Remove the front grommets.
Front Carpet
2. Pull the carpet out from the front to the rear.
Front Carpet Pulled Away
3. Remove the grommets under the front seat.
First for the rear carpet and then the front
carpet.
Front And Rear Carpet Split
4. Under the back of the front seat, open the
carpet split and then pull out the rear edge
and slide the carpet to the front (do not
remove the harness).
Rear Underside Of Front Seat
1 — Grommets 1 — Harness
2 — Carpet Split
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 353
5. Finally open the carpet split around seat
bracket and then remove the last two grom-
mets.
Front Seat And Floor
6. When reinstalling carpet please perform
these steps in reverse order making sure
that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs, B
pillar, console, and refasten grommets.
Rear Carpet (Four Door Models):
1. Remove the grommets under the front seat
(one left and one right).
2. Then pull the carpet out, to the rear and
open the carpet split around the front seats
brackets.
Pull Toward The Rear Of Vehicle
3. Remove the grommets under the rear seat
(one left and one right). First the grommet
for the cargo carpet and then the rear
carpet.
4. Pull the carpet out to the front and open the
carpet split around the rear seats brackets.
Under Rear Seat
5. When reinstalling carpet please perform
these steps in reverse order making sure
that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs, B
pillar, console, and refasten grommets.
1 — Grommets
2 — Carpet Split
1 — Carpet Split
1 — Carpet Split
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Rear Carpet (Two Door Models):
1. Remove the rear seats.
2. Remove the sides grommets (one left and
one right). First the grommet from the side
carpet and then the rear carpet.
Side Carpet
3. Remove the grommets under the front seat
(one left and one right).
4. Then pull the carpet out to the rear and
open the carpet split around the front seats
brackets.
Pull Carpet To The Rear
5. When reinstalling carpet please perform
these steps in reverse order making sure
that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs,
B pillar, console, and refasten grommets.
Cargo Carpet (Four Door Models):
1. Remove the grommets under the rear seat
(one left and one right).
2. Pull the carpet out to the rear and open the
carpet split around the seat belt attach-
ment.
Under Rear Seat
1 — Grommet
1 — Carpet Split
2 — Rear Carpet
1 — Carpet Split
2 — Rear Carpet
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 355
3. Remove the carpet under the load floor and
the side support and then pull the carpet
out.
Rear Load Floor
4. When reinstalling carpet please perform
these steps in reverse order making sure
that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs,
B pillar, console, and refasten grommets.
Cargo Carpet (Four Door Models) With Gap
Hider:
1. Remove the grommets under the rear seat
(one left and one right).
2. Pull the carpet out to the front and open the
carpet split around the seat belt attachment
and under the center seat bracket.
Under Rear Seat
3. When reinstalling carpet please perform
these steps in reverse order making sure
that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs,
B pillar, console, and refasten grommets.
Side Carpet (Four Door Models):
1. Remove the side grommet (one left and
one right).
2. Pull the carpet out starting on the top
flange, then all around the perimeter and
open the carpet split around the seat belt
attachment.
Inside Sidewall
3. When reinstalling carpet please perform
these steps in reverse order making sure
that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs,
B pillar, console, and refasten grommets.
1 — Side Supports
2 — Load Floor
1 — Carpet Split
2 — Grommets
3 — Rear Carpet
1 — Top Flange
2 — Grommet
3 — Side Carpet
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Side Carpet (Two Door Models):
1. Remove the side grommet and then the
lower one (left and right).
2. Pull the carpet out starting on the top
flange, then all around the perimeter and
open the carpet split around the seat belt
attachment.
3. When reinstalling carpet please perform
these steps in reverse order making sure
that the carpet is tucked under the scuffs,
B pillar, console, and refasten grommets.
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric uphol-
stery and carpeting.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chem-
ical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solu-
tion or lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts
from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft
cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap
solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If
soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking
for cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not
disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent
retractor, torn webbing, etc.).
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated
surfaces of the interior may cause perma-
nent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 357
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and should
be removed promptly with a damp cloth. Stub-
born soils can be removed easily with a soft
cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery
with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils,
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner
is not required to maintain the original condi-
tion.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-
mends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied
on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather upholstery, as damage to the
upholstery may result.
7
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found
on the left front corner of the A pillar, visible
from outside of the vehicle through the wind-
shield.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with dual hydraulic
brake systems. If either of the two hydraulic
systems loses normal capability, the remaining
system will still function. However, there will be
some loss of overall braking effectiveness. You
may notice increased pedal travel during appli-
cation, greater pedal force required to slow or
stop, and potential activation of the Brake
Warning Light.
In the event power assist is lost for any reason
(i.e., repeated brake applications with the
engine off) the brakes will still function.
However, the effort required to brake the
vehicle will be much greater than that required
with the power system operating.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
bolts should be torqued using a properly cali-
brated torque wrench using a high quality six
sided (hex) deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
**Use only authorized dealer recommended
lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or
oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Spare Tire Torque Specifications
**Use only authorized dealer recommended
lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or
oil before tightening.
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 Ft-Lbs
(176 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
59 Ft-Lbs
(80 N·m)
M14 x 1.50 22 mm
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 359
Spare tire torque is for the spare tire carrier
located on the swing gate.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/
bolt (do not insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly seated against the wheel.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.0L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all
emission requirements, and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and perfor-
mance, when using high-quality
unleaded “regular” gasoline having an octane
rating of 87, as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of 91 or higher octane
“premium” gasoline will allow these engines to
operate to optimal performance. This increase
in performance is most noticeable in hot
weather or other heavier load conditions, such
as while towing.
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see your dealer immediately.
Use of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and
may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
3.6L Engine
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
satisfactory fuel economy and perfor-
mance when using high-quality
unleaded “Regular” gasoline having an octane
rating of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of higher octane “Premium”
gasoline will not provide any benefit over
“Regular” gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
8
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see your dealer immediately.
Use of gasoline with an octane number lower
than 87 can cause engine failure and may void
or not be covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as “Refor-
mulated Gasoline”. Reformulated gasoline
contains oxygenates and are specifically
blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is recom-
mended. Properly blended reformulated gaso-
line will provide improved performance and
durability of engine and fuel system compo-
nents.
Materials Added To Fuel
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor-
mance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-
line contains a higher level of deter-
gents to further aide in minimizing
engine and fuel system deposits.
When available, the usage of TOP TIER Deter-
gent gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER Deter-
gent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these mate-
rials intended for gum and varnish removal may
contain active solvents or similar ingredients.
These can harm fuel system gasket and
diaphragm materials.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of the manufacturer and may void
or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing
methanol, or gasoline containing more than
15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends may
result in starting and drivability problems,
damage critical fuel system components,
cause emissions to exceed the applicable
standard, and/or cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to illuminate. Please observe
pump labels as they should clearly
communicate if a fuel contains greater than
15% ethanol (E-15).
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 361
Do Not Use E-85 In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Use of gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode
OBD II Malfunction Indicator Light on
Poor engine performance
Poor cold start and cold drivability
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system compo-
nents. Problems that result from running CNG
or LP are not the responsibility of the manufac-
turer and may void or not be covered under the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
MMT In Gasoline
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl
(MMT) is a manganese-containing metallic addi-
tive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. The manufac-
turer recommends that gasoline without MMT
be used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline
pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline
retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
8
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
Fuel System Cautions
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
control system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your
vehicle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a
pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
bility of the manufacturer and may void or
not be covered under the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to
prevent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 363
FLUID CAPACITIES
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Two Door Models 17.5 Gallons 66 Liters
Four Door Models 21.5 Gallons 81 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
2.0L Engine 5 Quarts 4.73 Liters
3.6L Engine 5 Quarts 4.73 Liters
Cooling System *
2.0L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) 10.3 Quarts 9.7 Liters
2.0L Engine Intercooler without Motor Generator Unit (MGU) (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
3.2 Quarts 3.0 Liters
2.0L Engine Intercooler with Motor Generator Unit (MGU) (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant
10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
3.5 Quarts 3.3 Liters
2.0L Battery Coolant (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent)
2.5 Quarts 2.4 Liters
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent) 11.2 Quarts 10.6 Liters
3.6L Motor Generator Unit (MGU) (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile
Formula or equivalent)
1.9 Quarts 1.8 Liters
3.6L Battery Coolant (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or
equivalent)
2.5 Quarts 2.4 Liters
* Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
8
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032.
Intercooler/Motor Generator Unit (if equipped)
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032.
Battery Coolant (if equipped)
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032.
Engine Oil — 2.0L Engine
We recommend you use Mopar API SN PLUS Certified SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which
meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-13340. Equivalent full synthetic SAE
5W-30 engine oil can be used if it meets API SN PLUS Certification. If SN PLUS or equivalent oil is
unavailable then please contact your local dealership for recommendation.
CAUTION!
Failure to use the recommended SN PLUS or equivalent oil can cause engine damage not
covered by the vehicle warranty.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 365
Engine Oil — 3.6L Engine
We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil
filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs
We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection — 2.0L Engine
87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection — 3.6L Engine
87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% Ethanol.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
8
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
CAUTION!
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may
result in engine damage and may decrease
corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-
nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant
(antifreeze) or any “globally compatible”
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032), by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust
products, as they may not be compatible
with the radiator engine coolant and may
plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant
(antifreeze). Use of propylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) is not recom-
mended.
CAUTION! (Continued)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 367
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) or
equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or
performance of your transmission.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped
We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case
We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front Axles)
We recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85)(API
GL-5)
Axle Differential (Rear M200 Sales Code DRZ)
We recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W140)(API
GL-5).
Axle Differential (Rear M220 Sales Codes DRE/DRF)
We recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85)(API
GL-5). Models equipped with Trac-Lok Limited Slip Differential require a
friction modifier additive.
Brake Master Cylinder
We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703.
Power Steering Reservoir
We recommend you use Mopar Electric Steering Pump Fluid.
8
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368
(Continued)
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
4/4C/4C Nav with 8.4-inch Display system,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supple-
ment.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain secu-
rity features to reduce the risk of unauthorized
and unlawful access to vehicle systems and
wireless communications. Vehicle software
technology continues to evolve over time and
FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers, evalu-
ates and takes appropriate steps as needed.
Similar to a computer or other devices, your
vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of unau-
thorized and unlawful access to your vehicle
systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about
available Uconnect software updates.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible
that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or
CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious software,
and if installed in your vehicle, it may
increase the possibility for vehicle systems
to be breached.
As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING! (Continued)
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
MULTIMEDIA 369
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communica-
tions cannot be assured. Third parties may
unlawfully intercept information and private
communications without your consent. For
further information, refer to “Data Collection &
Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel”.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located on the center of the instru-
ment panel. These buttons allow you to access
and change the Customer Programmable
Features. Many features can vary by vehicle.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below
and/or beside the Uconnect system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on
the right side. Turn the control knob to scroll
through menus and change settings. Push the
center of the control knob one or more times to
select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen
Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Push the Back Arrow button to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 3 Settings
Uconnect 3 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons
On The Faceplate
Push the Settings button to display the settings
menu screen. In this mode, the Uconnect
system allows you to access all of the available
programmable features.
NOTE:
When pressing the touchscreen buttons, only
one selection can be made at a time.
When making a setting’s menu selection, press
the button on the touchscreen to enter the
desired menu screen. Once in the desired
menu, select the preferred setting option by
pressing the corresponding button. Once the
setting is complete, either press the Back
Arrow/Done button on the touchscreen.
Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons on the
right side of the screen will allow you to scroll up
or down through the available settings.
NOTE:
All settings should be changed with the ignition
in the “ACC/RUN” position.
The following tables list the settings that may be
found within the Uconnect 3 radio, along with
the selectable options pertaining to each
setting.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369
370 MULTIMEDIA
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Español Français
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Brightness + -
NOTE:
When the Display Mode setting is set to “Auto”, this selection is unavailable as the Uconnect system automatically adjusts the brightness of the
screen. When the Display Mode setting is set to Manual mode, the “Brightness” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale
between the + and - buttons on the touchscreen.
Touchscreen Beep On Off
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370
MULTIMEDIA 371
AUX Switches
After pressing the AUX Switches button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
AUX 1-4 Type Latching Momentary
Power Source Battery Ignition
Recalled Last State
NOTE:
The “Recalled Last State” setting is met when switch type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition. Refer to “Auxiliary Switches — If
Equipped” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 371
372 MULTIMEDIA
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clock & Date
After pressing the Clock & Date button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
The “Metric” option changes the vehicle displays to metric units of measurement.
The “Custom” option allows setting the “Distance” (MPH or hm/h), “Distance” (mi or km), “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100km, or
km/L), and “Pressure” (psi, kPa, or bar) units of measurement independently.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Time and Format 12 hrs 24 hrs
AM PM
NOTE:
Within the “Set Time and Format” setting, press the corresponding Arrow buttons on the touchscreen to adjust to the correct time.
Show Time Status On Off
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 372
MULTIMEDIA 373
Safety/Assistance
After pressing the Safety/Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning — If
Equipped
Off Warning Only Warning & Braking
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
— If Equipped
Near Med Far
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen displays the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to 10
seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay is canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted
into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide
Lines
On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” setting overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate
the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound & Display
Rear ParkSense Volume — If Equipped Low Medium High
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights & Chime
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 373
374 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become
misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned results in the Blind Spot Monitor (BSM)
not operating to specification.
Hill Start Assist On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
Illuminated Approach 0 30
60 90
Automatic High Beam Headlamps — If Equipped On Off
Daytime Running Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. The feature is only available if allowed by
law in the country of the vehicle purchase.
Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped On Off
Interior Ambient Lights + -
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 374
MULTIMEDIA 375
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
The “Interior Ambient Lights” setting can be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the + and - buttons on the touchscreen.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the
driver's door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Horn With Lock On Off
Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped On Off
Remote Door Unlock/Door Unlock Driver All
NOTE:
When “Driver” is programmed, only the driver's door will unlock on the first push of the key fob unlock button; you must push the key fob unlock button
twice to unlock the passengers’ doors. When “All” is programmed, all of the doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If “All” is
programmed, all doors will unlock no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If “Driver” is programmed, only the driver’s door
will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. Touching the handle more than once will only result in the driver’s door opening once. If the driver’s
door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 375
376 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Off Options
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
Doors On Power Delay 0 sec 45 sec
5 min 10 min
Doors On Power Delay 0 sec 45 sec
5 min 10 min
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 376
MULTIMEDIA 377
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble Levels
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons or by selecting any
point on the scale between the + and – buttons. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well
as press directly on the desired setting.
Balance/Fade Up Arrow
Button
Down Arrow
Button
Left Arrow
Button
Right Arrow
Button
Center C Button
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by using the Arrow button on the touchscreen to adjust the sound level from
the front and rear or right and left side speakers. Press the Center C Button on the touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to the factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the Uconnect system’s ability to increase audio volume to compensate for increased speeds and road noise.
Select the desired setting from Off to 3 to increase the audio volume as speeds increase.
Surround Sound — If Equipped On Off
Auto Play On Off
NOTE:
The “Auto Play” feature automatically starts playing audio when a USB device is connected and turned on.
Loudness On Off
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 377
378 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped + -
NOTE:
The “AUX Volume Offset” feature provides the ability to adjust the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Paired Phones List of Paired Phones
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to "Phone Operation" in "Uconnect 3 with
5-inch Display" section.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 378
MULTIMEDIA 379
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Restore Settings
After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Channel Skip List of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while
scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration
of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider
online.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings Yes No
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected, it will reset all settings to their default settings.
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 379
380 MULTIMEDIA
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4 Settings
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Touchscreen and Face-
plate Buttons
Press the Settings button on the bottom bar, or
press the Apps button, then press the
Settings button on the touchscreen to display
the menu settings screen. In this mode, the
Uconnect system allows you to access all of the
available programmable features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired menu.
Once in the desired menu, press and release
the preferred setting “option” until a
check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once
the setting is complete, either press the Back
Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to
the previous menu, or press the X button on the
touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the
right side of the screen will allow you to scroll up
or down through the available settings.
The following tables list the settings that may be
found within the Uconnect 4 with 7-inch display
radio, along with the selectable options
pertaining to each setting.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data Yes No
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 380
MULTIMEDIA 381
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Language English Español Français
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Auto Manual
Display Brightness Headlights On + -
NOTE:
If the Display Mode setting is set to “Auto”, this setting is unavailable. To make changes to the "Display Brightness Headlights ON" setting, the head-
lights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" position.
Display Brightness Headlights Off + -
NOTE:
If the Display Mode setting is set to “Auto”, this setting is unavailable. To make changes to the "Display Brightness Headlights OFF" setting, the head-
lights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" position.
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Control Screen Timeout On Off
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster On Off
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 381
382 MULTIMEDIA
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
The “Metric” option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measurement.
The “Custom” option allows setting the “Distance” [MPH or km/h], Fuel Consumption” (MPG (US), MPG(UK), L/100km, or km/L),“Pressure”
(psi, kPa, or bar) and “Temperature” (C, or F) units of measurement independently.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 382
MULTIMEDIA 383
Time & Date
After pressing the Time & Date button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync with GPS On Off
Set Time Hours + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature allows you to adjust the hours.
Set Time Minutes + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature allows you to adjust the minutes.
Time Format 12 hrs 24 hrs
AM PM
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 383
384 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to
10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission
is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate
the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guide Lines On Off
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 384
MULTIMEDIA 385
Safety/Driving Assistance — If Equipped
After pressing the Safety/Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped Off Warning Only Warning & Braking
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
FCW includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid
a potential frontal collision. When the “Warning Only” option is selected, a chime sounds alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the “Warning and Brake” option is selected, it applies the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of
potential forward collision and sounds an audible chime to alert you.
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — If Equipped Near Med Far
NOTE:
Sets the distance in which a Forward Collision Warning occurs.
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Sound & Display
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
Hill Start Assist On Off
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights & Chime
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 385
386 MULTIMEDIA
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Interior Ambient Lights + -
NOTE:
The “Interior Ambient Lights” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the + and - buttons on the touchscreen.
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When the “Headlight Off Delay” feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
Daytime Running Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the
country of the vehicle purchase.
Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped On Off
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 386
MULTIMEDIA 387
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL position and the
driver's door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Remote Door Unlock Driver Door All Doors
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 387
388 MULTIMEDIA
Engine Off Options — If Equipped
After pressing the Engine Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
AUX Switches
After pressing the AUX Switches button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Doors On Engine Off Power Delay + -
Doors Off Engine Off Power Delay + -
Headlight Off Delay + -
Setting Name Selectable Options
AUX 1-4 Type Latching Momentary
Power Source Battery Ignition
Recalled Last State
NOTE:
The “Recalled Last State” setting is met when switch type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition. Refer to “Auxiliary Switches — If
Equipped” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 388
MULTIMEDIA 389
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance & Fade Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Balance & Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the Speaker icon toward any location in the box.
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble Levels
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons or by selecting any
point on the scale between the + and – buttons. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well
as press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the Uconnect system’s ability to increase audio volume to compensate for increased speeds and road noise.
Select the desired setting from Off to 3 to increase the audio volume as speeds increase.
Loudness Yes No
NOTE:
The “Loudness” feature improves sound quality at lower volumes when enabled.
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped + -
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to adjust the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Auto Play On Off
NOTE:
The “Auto Play” feature automatically starts playing audio when a USB device is connected and turned on.
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 389
390 MULTIMEDIA
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Options
Paired Phones And Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones And Audio Devices
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones and audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the 12 presets, so you
can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background,
so you will not even realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip List Of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while
scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 390
MULTIMEDIA 391
Restore Settings
After pressing the Restore Settings button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clear Personal Data
After pressing the Clear Personal Data button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration
of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider
online.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Restore Settings OK Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Clear Personal Data OK Cancel
NOTE:
When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 391
392 MULTIMEDIA
Customer Programmable Features —
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Settings
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Touchscreen and Faceplate But-
tons
Press the Apps button, then press the
Settings button on the touchscreen to
display the menu setting screen. In this mode,
the Uconnect system allows you to access all of
the available programmable features.
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
When making a selection, press the button on
the touchscreen to enter the desired menu.
Once in the desired menu, press and release
the preferred setting “option” until a
check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. Once
the setting is complete, either press the Back
Arrow button on the touchscreen to return to
the previous menu, or press the X button on the
touchscreen to close out of the settings screen.
Pressing the Up or Down Arrow button on the
right side of the screen will allow you to toggle
up or down through the available settings.
The following tables list the settings that may be
found within the Uconnect 4C/4C NAV radio,
along with the selectable options pertaining to
each setting.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 392
MULTIMEDIA 393
Language
After pressing the Language button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Display
After pressing the Display button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Set Language English Español Français
NOTE:
When the “Set Language” feature is selected, you may select one of multiple languages (English / Français / Español) for all display nomenclature,
including the trip functions and the navigation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language button on the touchscreen, then press the desired
language button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the language, showing that setting has been selected.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Display Mode Manual Auto
Display Brightness With Headlights ON + -
NOTE:
If the Display Mode setting is set to “Auto”, this setting is unavailable. To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights ON" setting, the
headlights must be on and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" position.
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF On Off
NOTE:
If the Display Mode setting is set to “Auto”, this setting is unavailable. To make changes to the "Display Brightness With Headlights OFF" setting, the
headlights must be off and the interior dimmer switch must not be in the "party" or "parade" position.
Theme Set Theme
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 393
394 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
When in this display, you may select the theme for the display screen. To make your selection, press the Set Theme button on the touchscreen, then
select the desired theme option button until a check-mark appears showing that the setting has been selected.
Touchscreen Beep On Off
Control Screen Time-Out On Off
NOTE:
When the “Control Screen Time-Out” feature is selected, the Controls Screen will stay open for five seconds before the screen times out. With the
feature deselected, the screen will stay open until it is manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in
Cluster
On Off
NOTE:
When the “Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster” feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions will appear in the Instrument Cluster
Display as the vehicle approaches a designated turn within a programmed route.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster On
Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 394
MULTIMEDIA 395
Units
After pressing the Units button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Voice
After pressing the Voice button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Clock
After pressing the Clock button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Units US Metric Custom
NOTE:
The “Metric” option changes the instrument cluster display to metric units of measurement.
The “Custom” option allows setting the “Distance” [MPH or km/h] “Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100km, or km/L), “Pressure”
(psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measurement independently.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Voice Response Length Brief Detailed
Show Command List Always With Help Never
Setting Name Selectable Options
Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped On Off
Set Time Hours + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Hours” feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 395
396 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
After pressing the Camera button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Set Time Minutes + -
NOTE:
The “Set Time Minutes” feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The Sync Time With GPS button on the touchscreen must be unchecked.
Time Format 12 hrs 24 hrs
Show Time in Status Bar — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
ParkView Backup Camera Delay On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” setting determines whether or not the screen will display the rear view image with dynamic grid lines for up to
10 seconds after the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE. This delay will be canceled if the vehicle’s speed exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission
is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines On Off
NOTE:
The “ParkView Backup Camera Active Guide Lines” feature overlays the Rear Backup Camera image with active, or dynamic, grid lines to help illustrate
the width of the vehicle and its projected backup path, based on the steering wheel position when the option is checked. A dashed center line overlay
indicates the center of the vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/receiver.
ParkView Backup Camera Fixed Guide Lines On Off
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 396
MULTIMEDIA 397
Safety & Driving Assistance
After pressing the Safety & Driving Assistance button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Forward Collision Warning — If Equipped Off Warning Only Warning & Braking
NOTE:
Changing the FCW status to “Off” prevents the system from warning you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front of you.
The FCW system state is kept in memory from one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is turned OFF, it will remain off when the vehicle is restarted.
FCW includes Advanced Brake Assist (ABA). The ABA applies additional brake pressure when the driver requests insufficient brake pressure to avoid
a potential frontal collision. When the “Warning Only” option is selected, a chime sounds alerting you of a possible collision with the vehicle in front
of you and more brake pressure is needed. When the “Warning and Brake” option is selected, it applies the brakes to slow your vehicle in case of
potential forward collision and sounds an audible chime to alert you.
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity — If Equipped Near Med Far
NOTE:
Sets the distance in which a Forward Collision Warning occurs.
ParkSense — If Equipped Sound Only Sound & Display
Rear ParkSense Volume Low Medium High
Blind Spot Alert — If Equipped Off Lights Lights & Chime
NOTE:
If your vehicle has experienced any damage in the area where the sensor is located, even if the fascia is not damaged, the sensor may have become
misaligned. Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer to verify sensor alignment. A sensor that is misaligned will result in the BSM not operating to
specification.
Hill Start Assist On Off
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 397
398 MULTIMEDIA
Mirrors and Wipers
After pressing the Mirrors and Wipers button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Lights
After pressing the Lights button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped On Off
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Headlight Off Delay 0 sec 30 sec
60 sec 90 sec
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of the amount of time the headlights remain on after the engine is shut off.
Daytime Running Lights On Off
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned On or Off. This feature is only allowed by law in the
country of the vehicle purchase.
Flash Lights With Lock — If Equipped On Off
Interior Ambient Lights — If Equipped + -
NOTE:
The “Interior Ambient Lights” setting can also be adjusted by selecting any point on the scale between the + and - buttons on the touchscreen.
Headlight Illumination On 0 seconds 30 seconds
60 seconds 90 seconds
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 398
MULTIMEDIA 399
Doors & Locks
After pressing the Doors & Locks button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped On Off
Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Dim High Beams” feature is selected, the high beam headlights activate/deactivate automatically under certain conditions.
Setting Name
Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto Door Locks — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automatically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 12 mph (20 km/h).
Auto Unlock On Exit On Off
NOTE:
When the “Auto Unlock On Exit” feature is selected, all doors will unlock when the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position, and the driver's door is opened.
Flash Lights With Lock On Off
Sound Horn With Lock — If Equipped Off 1st Press 2nd Press
Sound Horn With Remote Start — If Equipped On Off
1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks Driver Door All Doors
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 399
400 MULTIMEDIA
Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped
After pressing the Auto-On Comfort Systems button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
When "Driver Door" is programmed with 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks, only the driver's door will unlock with the first press of the key fob unlock button.
You must press the key fob unlock button twice to unlock the passengers’ doors. When "All Doors" is programmed for 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks,
all doors will unlock on the first press of the key fob unlock button. If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “All Doors,” all doors
will unlock, no matter which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, only the
driver’s door will unlock when the driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed, touching
the handle more than once will result in only the driver’s door opening. If “Driver Door” is selected, once the driver door is opened, the interior door
lock/unlock switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use key fob).
Passive Entry — If Equipped On Off
NOTE:
The “Passive Entry” feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key fob lock or unlock buttons. To make
your selection, press the Passive Entry button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the setting has been
selected.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Auto-On Driver Heated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle
Start — If Equipped
Off Remote Start All Starts
NOTE:
When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and heated steering wheel will automatically turn on when temperatures are below 40°F
(4.4°C). When temperatures are above 80°F (26.7°C) the driver vented seat will turn on.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 400
MULTIMEDIA 401
AUX Switches — If Equipped
After pressing the AUX Switches button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Key Off Options
After pressing the Key Off Options button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
AUX 1-4 Type Latching Momentary
Power Source Battery Ignition
Recalled Last State
NOTE:
The “Recalled Last State” setting is met when switch type is set to latching and power source is set to ignition. Refer to “Auxiliary Switches — If
Equipped” in “Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further information.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Doors On Engine Off Power Delay + -
Doors Off Engine Off Power Delay + -
Headlight Off Delay + -
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 401
402 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
After pressing the Audio button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Balance/Fade Speaker Icon
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Balance/Fade” of the audio by pressing and dragging the Speaker icon toward any location in the box.
Equalizer Bass Mid Treble Levels
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” settings. Adjust the settings with the + and – setting buttons or by selecting any
point on the scale between the + and – buttons. Bass/Mid/Treble also allow you to simply slide your finger up or down to change the setting as well
as press directly on the desired setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume Off 1 2 3
NOTE:
When in this display, you may adjust the Uconnect system’s ability to increase audio volume to compensate for increased speeds and road noise.
Select the desired setting from Off to 3 to increase the audio volume as speeds increase.
AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped + -
NOTE:
This feature provides the ability to adjust the audio level for portable devices connected through the AUX input.
Auto Play On Off
NOTE:
The “Auto Play” feature automatically starts playing audio when a USB device is connected and turned on.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 402
MULTIMEDIA 403
Phone/Bluetooth®
After pressing the Phone/Bluetooth® button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
After pressing the SiriusXM® Setup button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Setting Name Selectable Options
Do Not Disturb Do Not Disturb Options
Paired Phones And Audio Devices List Of Paired Phones And Audio Devices
NOTE:
This feature shows which phones and audio devices are paired to the Phone/Bluetooth® system. For further information, refer to the Uconnect
Owner’s Manual Supplement.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster On Off
Setting Name Selectable Options
Tune Start On Off
NOTE:
The “Tune Start” feature begins playing the current song from the beginning when you tune to a music channel using one of the 12 presets, so you
can enjoy the complete song. This feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that current song. Tune Start works in the background,
so you will not even realize it's on, except that you will miss the experience of joining your favorite song with only a few seconds left to play.
Channel Skip List Of Channels
NOTE:
SiriusXM® can be programmed to designate a group of channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to exclude undesirable channels while
scanning. This feature allows you to select the channels you would like to skip.
Subscription Info Sirius ID
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 403
404 MULTIMEDIA
Reset
After pressing the Reset button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
NOTE:
New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free limited time subscription to SiriusXM® Satellite Radio with your radio. Following the expiration
of the free services, it will be necessary to access the information on the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.
1. Press the Subscription Info button on the touchscreen to access the Subscription Information screen.
2. Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To reactivate your service, either call the number listed on the screen or visit the provider
online.
SiriusXM® Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Setting Name Selectable Options
Reset App Drawer To Default Order OK Cancel
Restore Apps Back Next
NOTE:
Restoring Apps will delete all installed apps. This feature is used if there is an issue using or installing apps. To restore apps, press the Next button
in the pop-up screen. Then press Yes on the confirmation screen. To keep installed apps, press Cancel.
Restore Settings OK Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Restore Settings” feature is selected it will reset all settings to their default settings.
Clear Personal Data Yes Cancel
NOTE:
When the “Clear Personal Data” feature is selected it will remove all personal data including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 404
MULTIMEDIA 405
System Information — If Equipped
After pressing the System Information button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Ensure that all persons read this manual care-
fully before using the system. It contains
instructions on how to use the system in a safe
and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the touch-
screen.
Please read and follow these safety precau-
tions. Failure to do so may result in injury or
property damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage
to the product. Return it to an authorized
dealer for repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set
to a level that still allows you to hear outside
traffic and emergency vehicles.
Setting Name Selectable Options
Software Licenses Software Information Screen
NOTE:
When this feature is selected, a “Licensing Information” screen will appear, displaying a licensing information website for the radio.
Map Update Download System Information To USB Generate Request Code
NOTE:
The “Download System Information To USB” will create a special USB required for Map updates of the radio. Whereas the “Generate Request Code”
will display a code for the user to input online when downloading the maps.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 405
406 MULTIMEDIA
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
Read all instructions in this manual carefully
before using your system to ensure proper
usage.
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use
the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or the system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on
the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-
ture away from the system. Besides damage
to the system, moisture can cause electric
shocks as with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed depen-
dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
Exposure To Radio Frequency Radiation
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety stan-
dards and recommendations, which reflect the
consensus of the scientific community. The
radio manufacturer believes the internal wire-
less radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the elec-
tromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices
such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situa-
tions or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio.
Care And Maintenance
Touchscreen
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard
or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry,
etc.), which could scratch the touchscreen
surface!
Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals
directly on the screen! Use a clean and dry
microfiber lens cleaning cloth in order to
clean the touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water
solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the
solvent manufacturer's precautions and
directions.
UCONNECT 3 WITH 5-INCH DISPLAY
Introduction
Uconnect 3 With 5-Inch Display
1 — RADIO
Push the RADIO button on the faceplate to enter
Radio Mode. The different tuner modes; FM/
AM/SXM (if equipped), can be selected by
pressing the corresponding buttons on the
touchscreen in Radio Mode.
2 — COMPASS
Push the COMPASS button on the faceplate to
display the current direction of the vehicle.
3 — SETTINGS
Push the SETTINGS button on the faceplate to
display the customer programmable features.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 406
MULTIMEDIA 407
4 — MORE
Push the MORE button on the faceplate to
access additional options.
5 — ENTER/BROWSE & TUNE/SCROLL
Push the ENTER/BROWSE button to accept a
highlighted selection on the screen. Rotate the
TUNE/SCROLL rotary knob to scroll through a
list or tune to a radio station.
6 — SCREEN OFF
Push the SCREEN OFF button to turn the touch-
screen off. To turn the touchscreen back on,
press the screen.
7 — MUTE
Push the MUTE button to turn off the audio of
the radio system. Press it again to turn the
audio back on.
8 — VOLUME/POWER
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the Volume.
Push the VOLUME/POWER button to turn the
system ON or OFF.
9 — PHONE
Push the PHONE button on the faceplate to
access the Uconnect Phone feature.
10 — MEDIA
Pushing the MEDIA button on the faceplate will
allow you to switch to Media mode: CD (if
equipped), USB, AUX, and Bluetooth®.
Radio Mode
Operating Radio Mode
Radio Mode
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
FM
AM
SiriusXM® Radio – If Equipped
Push the RADIO button on the faceplate, to
enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner
modes – FM/AM/SXM (if equipped) – can then
be selected by pressing the corresponding
buttons on the touchscreen in the Radio mode.
VOLUME/POWER Knob
Rotate the VOLUME/POWER rotary knob to
adjust the Volume. When the audio system is
turned on, the sound will be set at the same
volume level as last played.
Push the VOLUME/POWER button to turn the
system on or off.
MUTE Button
Push the MUTE button to mute the system.
Push the MUTE button again to unmute the
system.
TUNE/SCROLL Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
1 — Station Presets
2 — All Presets
3 — Seek Up
4 — Audio
5 — Info
6 — Tune
7 — AM/FM/SXM
8 — Seek Down
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 407
408 MULTIMEDIA
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
ENTER/BROWSE button to choose a selection.
Seek Functions
Seek Up
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listen-
able station or channel.
During a Seek Up function, if the radio reaches
the starting station after passing through the
entire band two times, the radio will stop at the
station where it began.
Fast Seek Up
Press and hold the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen to advance the radio through the
available stations or channels at a faster rate.
The radio stops at the next available station or
channel when the button on the touchscreen is
released.
Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listen-
able station or channel.
During a Seek Down function, if the radio
reaches the starting station after passing
through the entire band two times, the radio will
stop at the station where it began.
Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to advance the radio through the
available stations or channels at a faster rate.
The radio stops at the next available station or
channel when the button on the touchscreen is
released.
Direct Tune Functions
Press the Tune button on the touchscreen to
directly tune to a specific radio station. A
keypad will appear. On the keypad, enter in your
desired radio station, and the system will auto-
matically tune to it.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If
Equipped
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satel-
lite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast to coast radio content. Siri-
usXM® is a subscription based service.
Get over 160 channels on your satellite radio,
and enjoy all you want, all in one place. Hear
commercial-free music, sports, news, talk, and
entertainment. Get all the premium program-
ming, including Howard Stern, every NFL®
game, every MLB®, every NHL® game, every
NASCAR® race, Martha Stewart, Oprah Radio,
and more. Get 20+ extra channels, including
SiriusXM® Latino, offering 20 channels of
commercial-free music, news, talk, comedy,
sports, and more dedicated to Spanish
language programming.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and
bill at then-current rates until you call Siri-
usXM® at 1-866-635-2349 to cancel. See Siri-
usXM® Customer Agreement for complete
terms at www.siriusxm.com (US Residents) or
www.siriusxm.ca (Canadian Residents). All fees
and programming subject to change. Our satel-
lite service is available only to those at least 18
and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C.
Our Sirius satellite service is also available in
Puerto Rico (with coverage limitations). Our
Internet radio service is available throughout
our satellite service area and in Alaska and
Hawai. © 2019 SiriusXM® Radio Inc. Siri-
usXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. To receive
satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be outside
with a clear view to the sky.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 408
MULTIMEDIA 409
If the screen displays Acquiring Signal, you may
need to change the vehicle’s position to receive
a signal. In most cases, the satellite radio does
not receive a signal in underground parking
garages or tunnels.
Setting Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes
and are activated by pressing any of the four
Preset buttons on the touchscreen, located at
the top of the screen.
When you are receiving a station that you wish
to commit into memory, press and hold the
desired numbered button on the touchscreen
for more than two seconds or until you hear a
confirmation beep.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio modes. Four presets are visible at the top
of the radio screen.
Audio Settings
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the right side
of the radio faceplate. If the settings button
is not present, push the MORE button on
the faceplate, then the Settings button on
the touchscreen.
2. Scroll down and press the Audio button on
the touchscreen to open the Audio menu.
3. The Audio Menu shows the following
options for you to customize your audio
settings:
Auto Play — Press the Auto Play button on
the touchscreen to select between ON or
OFF. This feature determines if music
automatically starts playing from a device
when it is first connected to the Media
hub’s USB port.
Equalizer — Press the Equalizer button on
the touchscreen to adjust the Bass, Mid
and Treble. Use the + or – buttons on the
touchscreen to adjust the equalizer to
your desired settings. Press the Back
Arrow button on the touchscreen when
done.
Balance/Fade — Press the Balance/Fade
button on the touchscreen to adjust the
sound from the speakers. Use the arrow
button on the touchscreen to adjust the
sound level from the front and rear or
right and left side speakers. Press the
Center C button on the touchscreen to
reset the balance and fade to the factory
setting. Press the Back Arrow button on
the touchscreen when done.
Speed Adjust Volume — Press the Speed
Adjusted Volume button on the touch-
screen to select between OFF, 1, 2 or 3.
This will decrease the radio volume rela-
tive to a decrease in vehicle speed. Press
the Back Arrow button on the touch-
screen when done.
Loudness — Press the Loudness button
on the touchscreen to select the Loud-
ness feature. When this feature is acti-
vated, it improves sound quality at lower
volumes.
Clock Settings
1. Push the SETTINGS button on the face-
plate, or push the MORE button on the
faceplate, and then the SETTINGS button
on the touchscreen.
2. Select the Clock and Date button on the
touchscreen.
3. Next, select Set Time to change the time.
4. Select Set Date to change the date.
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 409
410 MULTIMEDIA
5. To set the time, select the Seek Up or Seek
Down arrows as appropriate. Select “12 hrs
vs 24 hrs”, “AM” or “PM” or select the “Time
Zones” (if equipped).
6. Select the Done button when complete.
Media Mode
Operating Media Mode
Media Mode
Media Mode is entered by pushing the MEDIA
button located on the faceplate.
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source button
on the touchscreen and the desired mode
button on the touchscreen. Disc (if equipped),
USB, SD Card (if equipped), AUX and Blue-
tooth® (if equipped), are the Media sources
available. When available, you can select the
Browse button on the touchscreen to be given
these options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the
Info button on the touchscreen for artist infor-
mation on the current song playing.
Seek Up/Seek Down Functions
Seek Up /Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection. Press and
release the Seek Down button on the touch-
screen to return to the beginning of the current
selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the track is within the first
few seconds of the current selection.
Fast Seek Up
Press and hold the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen and the desired mode will begin to
fast forward through the current track until the
button on the touchscreen is released.
Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen and the desired mode will begin to
rewind through the current track until the
button on the touchscreen is released.
Track Selection (Browse)
Rotate the Browse button on the touchscreen to
scroll through and select a desired track on the
iPod®, MP3 player, phone, or USB. Press the
Exit button on the touchscreen if you wish to
cancel the Browse function.
1 — Seek Down
2 — Seek Up
3 — Additional Functions
4 — Info
5 — Pause/Play
6 — Source
7 — Browse
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 410
MULTIMEDIA 411
Repeat
Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to
repeat the song selection. To cancel Repeat,
press the Repeat button on the touchscreen a
second time.
Shuffle
Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to
play the selections on the USB/iPod® or Blue-
tooth® device in random order to provide an
interesting change of pace. Press the Shuffle
button on the touchscreen a second time to
turn this feature off.
Track Info
Press the Info button on the touchscreen to
display the current track information. Press the
X button on the touchscreen to cancel this
feature.
Audio
Refer to “Audio Settings” for the adjustable
audio settings.
USB/iPod® Mode
USB/iPod® Mode is entered by either inserting
a USB Jump Drive or iPod® cable into the USB
port, or by pushing the MEDIA button located on
the faceplate. Once in Media Mode, press the
Source button on the touchscreen, and select
the USB/iPod® button.
Inserting USB/iPod® Device
Gently insert the USB/iPod® device into the
USB Port. If you insert a USB/iPod® device with
the ignition ON, the unit will switch to USB/
iPod® mode and begin to play when you insert
the device. The display will show the track
number and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
Browse
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
select Artist, Albums, Genres, Songs, Playlists or
Folders from the USB/iPod® device. Once the
desired selection is made you can chose from
the available media by pressing the button on
the touchscreen. Press the Exit button on the
touchscreen if you wish to cancel the Browse
function.
Bluetooth® Mode
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) or Blue-
tooth® Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth®
device containing music to the Uconnect
system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must
be paired with the Uconnect Phone to communi-
cate with the Uconnect system.
Refer to Phone Mode section for pairing proce-
dure.
Once the Bluetooth® device is paired to the
Uconnect system, push the MEDIA button
located on the faceplate. Once in Media Mode,
press the Source button on the touchscreen
and select the Bluetooth® button.
NOTE:
For mobile phone compatibility and pairing
instructions, please visit UconnectPhone.com.
AUX Mode
AUX Mode is entered by inserting a AUX device
using a stereo cable with a 3.5 mm audio jack
into the AUX port or by pushing the MEDIA
button located on the faceplate. Once in Media
Mode, press the Source button on the touch-
screen, and select the AUX button.
Inserting Auxiliary Device
Gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into the
AUX Port. If you insert an Auxiliary device with
the ignition on, the unit will switch to AUX mode
and begin to play when you insert the device
cable.
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 411
412 MULTIMEDIA
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g.,
selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.)
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
VOLUME rotary knob or with the volume of the
attached device.
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if
the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set
too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for
the radio unit to play the music on the device.
Phone Mode
Operating Phone Mode
Phone Mode
The Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system
with voice command capability. Refer to Voice
Recognition (VR) within this publication for
further information.
The Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone
number with your mobile phone using simple
voice commands.
NOTE:
The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile phone
equipped with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Profile. To check mobile phone compatibility,
please visit UconnectPhone.com.
For Uconnect customer support:
US residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or
call 1-877-855-8400
Canadian residents - visit Uconnect-
Phone.com or call 1-800-465-2001 (English)
or 1-800-387-9983 (French)
Phone Mode Activation
Press the PHONE button on the front panel to
activate the Phone mode.
1 — Call/Redial/Hold
2 — Phone Signal Strength
3 — Paired Phone
4 — Phone Battery Life
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Uconnect Phone Settings
8 — Text Messaging
9 — Direct Dial Pad
10 — Recent Call Log
11 — Browse Phone Book
12 — End Call
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 412
MULTIMEDIA 413
Main Functions
The buttons on the display can be used to:
Compose phone numbers using the graphic
keypad on the display.
Display and call the contacts in the mobile
phone phonebook.
Display and call contacts from the Recent
Calls menu.
Pair up to 10 phones/audio devices to make
access and connection easier and quicker.
Transfer calls from the system to the mobile
phone and vice versa.
Deactivate the microphone audio for privacy.
The mobile phone audio is transmitted through
the vehicle’s audio system. The system auto-
matically mutes the radio when the Phone func-
tion is used.
Connecting/Disconnecting A Mobile Phone
Or Bluetooth® Device
Pairing A Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must
pair your compatible Bluetooth®-enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the
process of establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the Uconnect
system.
To complete the pairing process, you need to
reference your mobile phone Owner's Manual.
Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete
mobile phone compatibility information.
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK.
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Push the PHONE button on the faceplate.
If there are no phones currently
connected with the system, a pop-up
appears asking if you would like to pair a
mobile phone.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for Bluetooth®
connections.
Pairing A Phone
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 413
414 MULTIMEDIA
If No is selected and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Settings but-
ton from the Uconnect Phone main screen.
Select the Paired Phones button, and
then press the Add Device button on the
touchscreen.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the
connection request.
5. Uconnect Phone will display an in progress
screen while the system is connecting.
6. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”
7. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect Phone.
Some mobile phones will require you to
enter the PIN.
8. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting the Yes button will make
this phone the highest priority. This phone
will take precedence over other paired
phones within range and will connect to the
Uconnect system automatically when
entering the vehicle. Only one mobile phone
and/or one Bluetooth® audio device can be
connected to the Uconnect system at a
time. If the No button is selected, simply
select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/
audio device Bluetooth® screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the Blue-
tooth® device.
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the
Uconnect system may interfere with the Blue-
tooth® connection. If this happens, simply
repeat the pairing process. However, first, make
sure to delete the device from the list of phones
on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to
remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
Storing Names/Numbers in The Mobile Phone
Before pairing your mobile phone, you must
make sure you have stored the names you want
to contact in the phonebook on your mobile
phone, so you can call them using the vehicle's
hands-free system.
If your phonebook does not contain any names,
enter new names for the most frequently used
numbers.
For further details, consult your mobile phone
owner's handbook.
NOTE:
The names in the phonebook which do not
contain phone numbers or where both fields
(name and surname) are empty will not be
displayed.
Connection
The system connects automatically to the
paired mobile phone with the highest priority.
To choose a specific mobile phone or
Bluetooth® audio device, proceed as follows:
1. Access the Settings menu.
2. Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button.
3. Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
list using the corresponding button on the
display.
4. Select the specific device (mobile phone or
Bluetooth® device).
5. Press the Connect button.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 414
MULTIMEDIA 415
6. During the connection stage, a screen is
displayed showing the progress of the oper-
ation.
7. The device connected is highlighted in the
list.
Disconnection
To disconnect a specific mobile phone or Blue-
tooth® audio device, proceed as follows:
1. Access the Settings menu.
2. Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button.
3. Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
list using the corresponding button on the
display.
4. Select the specific device (mobile phone or
Bluetooth® device).
5. Press the Disconnect button.
Deletion Of A Mobile Phone Or A Bluetooth®
Audio Device
To delete a mobile phone or Bluetooth® audio
device from a list, proceed as follows:
1. Access the Settings menu.
2. Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button.
3. Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
list using the corresponding button on the
display.
4. Select the device (mobile phone or
Bluetooth® device).
5. Press the Delete Device button.
6. A confirmation screen will appear on the
display:
Press the Yes button to delete the device.
Press the No button to cancel the opera-
tion.
Setting A Mobile Phone Or A Bluetooth®
Audio Device As A Favorite
To set a mobile phone or Bluetooth® audio
device as a favorite, proceed as follows:
1. Access the Settings menu.
2. Select the Phone/Bluetooth® button.
3. Select the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
list using the corresponding button on the
display.
4. Select the specific device (mobile phone or
Bluetooth® device).
5. Press the Make Favorite button.
6. The device selected is moved to the top of
the list.
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 415
416 MULTIMEDIA
Downloading A Phonebook From Your Mobile
Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your
phone, Uconnect Phone asks you if you want to
download names (text names) and number
entries from your mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth® enabled phones with
Phonebook Access Profile may support this
feature. See UconnectPhone.com for supported
phones.
If equipped and specifically supported by your
phone, Uconnect Phone asks you if you want to
download names (text names) and number
entries from your mobile phone’s phonebook.
Specific Bluetooth®-enabled phones with
Phonebook Access Profile may support this
feature.
NOTE:
If supported, the download and update
begins as soon as the Bluetooth® wireless
phone connection is made to the Uconnect
Phone. For example, after you start the
vehicle. You may be asked for permission to
initiate the phonebook download.
A maximum of 2,000 contact names with six
numbers per contact will be downloaded and
updated every time a phone is connected to
the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of
entries downloaded, there may be a short
delay before the latest downloaded names
can be used. Until then, if available, the previ-
ously downloaded phonebook is available for
use.
Only the phonebook of the currently
connected mobile phone is accessible.
Only the mobile phone’s phonebook is down-
loaded. SIM card phonebook is not part of
the mobile phonebook.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be
edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile
phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
Deletion Of Phone Data (Phonebook And
Recent Calls)
Select "Delete Phone Data" on the display to
delete the list of recent calls and the phonebook
copy.
Making A Phone Call
Dialing The Phone Number Using The
"Keyboard" Icon On The Display
Enter the phone number using the graphic
keypad displayed.
Proceed as follows:
1. Press the Keyboard icon on the display and
use the number buttons to enter the
number.
2. Press the Call button to make a call.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name Or Phone
Number
1. Push the PHONE button on the steering
wheel.
2. After the beep, say “dial” (or “call” a full
name or phone number).
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 416
MULTIMEDIA 417
Recent Calls
The list of the last calls made for each of the
following call types can be displayed:
Calls received
Calls made
Calls without a reply
All calls
To access these types of calls, press the Recent
Calls button on the Phone menu main screen.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
When a phone conversation is active, a second
phone call can be made as follows:
Select the number/contact from the list of
recent calls.
Select the contact from the phonebook.
Press the Hold button and dial the number
using the graphic keyboard of the display.
Redial
To call the number/contact of last call made,
press the Redial button.
Answering An Incoming Call
Call Controls
The buttons on the display allow the following
phone call functions to be managed:
Answer
End
Ignore
Put on hold/resume
Deactivate/activate the microphone
Transfer the call
Switch from one call to the other
Conference/merge two active calls
Answering Or Ignoring A Call With No Call
Currently In Progress
When an incoming call rings or is announced on
the Uconnect system, push the Answer button
on the touchscreen, or push the PHONE button
on the steering wheel.
Answering Or Ignoring An Incoming Call With A
Call Currently In Progress
When an incoming call rings or is announced on
the Uconnect system, push the Answer button
on the touchscreen, or push the PHONE button
on the steering wheel to answer the call and put
the ongoing call on hold.
NOTE:
Not all mobile phones may support the manage-
ment of an incoming call when another phone
conversation is active.
Managing Two Phone Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), it is possible to switch between them
pressing the Call On Hold button or to merge the
two calls in a conference pressing the Merge
Calls button.
NOTE:
Check whether the mobile phone in use
supports the management of a second call and
the "Conference" mode.
Transferring/Call Continuation
Transferring
The ongoing calls can be transferred from the
mobile phone to the system and vice versa
without ending the call.
To transfer the call, press the Transfer button.
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 417
418 MULTIMEDIA
Call Continuation
After the engine is switched off, it is still possible
to continue a phone call.
The call continues until it is ended manually or
for a maximum period of about 20 minutes.
When the system is switched off, the call is
transferred to the mobile phone.
Ending A Call
Press the End button on the touchscreen or the
PHONE button on the steering wheel controls to
end a call in progress.
Only the ongoing call is ended and any call on
hold becomes the new active call.
Depending on the type of mobile phone, if the
ongoing call is ended by the caller, the call on
hold may not be activated automatically.
Uconnect Phone Features
Mute/Unmute
1. During a call, push the VOICE COMMAND
button on the steering wheel.
2. After the beep, say “mute” or “mute off”.
Reading Messages
The system can read the messages received by
the mobile phone.
To use this function, the mobile phone must
support the SMS exchange function via Blue-
tooth®.
If this function is not supported by the phone,
the corresponding message button is deacti-
vated (greyed out) or may only accept incoming
messages.
When a text message is received, the display
will show a screen where the options "Listen",
"Call" or "Ignore" can be selected.
Press the Message button to access the list of
SMS messages received by the mobile phone.
The list displays a maximum of 60 messages
received.
Browsing SMS
Using the steering wheel commands, you can
view and manage the last 10 SMS messages
received on the instrument panel. To use this
function, the mobile phone must support the
SMS exchange function through Bluetooth®.
Select the PHONE button on the instrument
panel menu, and then select “SMS Reader”
using the arrow keys on the steering wheel
controls.
The “SMS Reader” submenu allows the last
10 SMS messages to be displayed.
UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DISPLAY
Introduction
Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
1. Radio
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen
to enter Radio Mode. The different tuner
modes; AM, FM, and SXM can be selected
by pressing the corresponding buttons on
the touchscreen in Radio Mode.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 418
MULTIMEDIA 419
2. Media
Press the Media button on the touchscreen
to access media sources such as USB De-
vice, AUX, and Bluetooth® as long as the re-
quested media is present.
3. Climate
Refer to “Climate Controls” in “Getting To
Know Your Vehicle” for further details.
4. Apps
Press the Apps button on the touchscreen
to access Smartphone and Connected vehi-
cle options.
5. Controls
Press the Controls button on the touch-
screen to adjust the heated and vented
seats or heated steering wheel (If
Equipped).
6. Phone
Press the Phone button on the touchscreen
to access the Uconnect Phone feature.
7. Settings
Press the Settings button on the touch-
screen to access the Uconnect Settings
menu.
Drag & Drop Menu Bar
The Uconnect features and services in the main
menu bar are easily changed for your conve-
nience. Simply follow these steps:
Uconnect 4 Main Menu
1. Press the Apps button to open the App
screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App
to replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged down
onto the main menu bar, will now be an active
App/shortcut.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
Radio Mode
Radio Controls
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio – If Equipped
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen,
bottom left corner, to enter the Radio Mode. The
different tuner modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can
then be selected by pressing the corresponding
buttons in the Radio mode.
Volume/Power Control
Push the Volume/Power control knob to turn off
the screen and mute the radio. Push the
Volume/Power control knob a second time to
turn the screen back on and unmute the radio.
The electronic volume control turns continu-
ously (360 degrees) in either direction, without
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 419
420 MULTIMEDIA
stopping. Turning the Volume/Power control
knob clockwise increases the volume, and
counterclockwise decreases it.
Tune/Scroll Control
When the audio system is turned on, the sound
will be set at the same volume level as last
played.
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob clock-
wise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
Enter/Browse button to choose a selection.
Screen Close
The X button on the touchscreen at the top right,
provides a means to close the Direct Tune
Screen. The Direct Tune Screen also auto
closes if no activity occurs within a few seconds.
Seek And Direct Tune Functions
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated
by pressing the double arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio
station display or by pressing the left Steering
Wheel Audio Control up or down.
Seek Up
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listen-
able station or channel. During a Seek Up func-
tion, if the radio reaches the starting station
after passing through the entire band two times,
the radio will stop at the station where it began.
Fast Seek Up
Press and hold the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen to advance the radio through the
available stations or channels at a faster rate.
The radio stops at the next available station or
channel when the button on the touchscreen is
released.
Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to tune the radio to the next listen-
able station or channel. During a Seek Down
function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band
two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Down
Press and hold the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to advance the radio through the
available stations or channel at a faster rate.
The radio stops at the next available station or
channel when the button on the touchscreen is
released.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button on the touchscreen
located at the bottom of the radio screen. The
Direct Tune button on the touchscreen is avail-
able in AM, FM, and SXM radio modes and can
be used to direct tune the radio to a desired
station or channel.
Press the available number button on the
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired
station. Once a number has been entered, any
numbers that are no longer possible (stations
that cannot be reached) will become deacti-
vated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
bottom left on the touchscreen.
OK
Once the last digit of a station has been
entered, press the OK button, and the Direct
Tune screen will close. The system will automat-
ically tune to that station.
The selected Station or Channel number is
displayed in the Direct Tune text box.
Setting Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
and are activated by pressing any of the six
Preset buttons on the touchscreen, located at
the top of the screen.
When you are receiving a station that you wish
to commit into memory, press and hold the
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 420
MULTIMEDIA 421
desired numbered button on the touchscreen
for more than two seconds or until you hear a
confirmation beep.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio modes. A set of six presets are visible at
the top of the radio screen.
You can switch between the two radio presets
by pressing the Arrow button located in the
upper right of the radio touchscreen.
Browse In AM/FM
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen
provides a means to edit the Presets List and is
entered by pushing the ENTER/BROWSE
button.
Scrolling Preset List
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can
scroll the preset list by rotation of the TUNE/
SCROLL knob, or by pressing the Up and Down
arrow keys, located on the right of the screen.
Preset Selection From List
A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets or by pushing the ENTER/
BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
select the currently highlighted Preset.
When selected, the radio tunes to the station
stored in the Preset and returns to the main
radio screen.
Deleting Presets
A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding Preset.
Return To Main Radio Screen
You can return to the Main Radio Screen, by
pressing the X button on the touchscreen when
in the Browse Presets screen.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If
Equipped
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct satel-
lite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast to coast radio content. Siri-
usXM® is a subscription based service.
SiriusXM® All Access Package
All satellite radio equipped vehicles come with a
one year trial to the SiriusXM® All Access
package, providing over 160 channels of the
best programming for all the places life takes
you.
In your vehicle — You’ll get every channel
available on your radio, including all the
premium programming like Howard Stern,
every NFL® game, every MLB® game, every
NASCAR® race, Oprah Radio, and more.
On the go — With a SiriusXM® Internet Radio
subscription included with the All Access trial,
you’ll get SiriusXM® on your computer,
smartphone, or tablet. Including:
A huge On Demand catalog
Xtra Channels featuring SiriusXM®
Latino – a collection of Spanish-language
channels
MySXM – allowing you to personalize
your favorite music channels
Go to siriusxm.com/getallaccess for more infor-
mation
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the 12-month trial included
with the new vehicle purchase. If you decide to
continue your service at the end of your trial
subscription, the plan you choose will automat-
ically renew and bill at then-current rates until
you call SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel.
See SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for
complete terms at www.siriusxm.com. All fees
and programming subject to change. Our satel-
lite service is available only to those at least 18
and older in the 48 contiguous USA and D.C.
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 421
422 MULTIMEDIA
Our SiriusXM® satellite service is also available
in PR (with coverage limitations). Our Internet
radio service is available throughout our satel-
lite service area and in AK. © 2019 SiriusXM®
Radio Inc. Sirius, XM and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Service available in Canada; see www.siri-
usxm.ca.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite
radio does not receive a signal in underground
parking garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver,
require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service.
When the Radio does not have the necessary
subscription, the Radio is able to receive the
Pre-View channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US residents call:
1-800-643-2112
Canadian residents call:
1-877-438-9677
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the
top of the screen.
The Genre is displayed below the Presets
Bar.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed
in the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are
displayed below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands, see
Presets, browse, Tune Knob, and Direct Tune.
In addition to the tuning Operation functions
common to all Radio modes, the replay, Traffic/
Weather Jump, and fav button functions are
available in SiriusXM® Mode.
Replay
The replay function provides a means to store
and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and
48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is
switched, content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen.
The play/pause, rewind/forward and live
buttons will display at the top of the screen,
along with the replay time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on
the touchscreen, any time during the Replay
mode.
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touch-
screen to pause the playing of live or rewound
content at any time. Play can be resumed again
by pressing of the Pause/Play button on the
touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the RW button on the touchscreen to
rewind the content in steps of five seconds.
Pressing the RW button on the touchscreen for
more than two seconds rewinds the content.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 422
MULTIMEDIA 423
The Radio begins playing the content at the
point at which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the FW button on the touchscreen
forwards the content in steps of five seconds.
Forwarding of the content can only be done
when the content is previously rewound, and
therefore, can not be done for live content. A
continuous press of the FW button on the touch-
screen also forwards the content. The Radio
begins playing the content at the point at which
the press is released.
Live
Press the Live button on the touchscreen to
resume playing of Live content.
Favorites
Press the Fav button on the touchscreen to acti-
vate the favorites menu, which will time out in
five seconds in absence of user interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of
the X in the top right corner.
The favorites feature enables you to set a
favorite artist, or song that is currently playing.
The Radio then uses this information to alert
you when either the favorite song, or favorite
artist are being played at any time by any of the
SiriusXM® Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50.
Fav. Artist: While the song is playing to set a
Favorite Artist, press the Fav button on the
touchscreen and then the Fav. Artist button on
the touchscreen.
Fav. Song: While the song is playing to set a
Favorite Song, press the Fav button on the
touchscreen and then the Fav Song button on
the touchscreen.
Browse In SXM
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can
exit a sub menu to return to a parent menu by
pressing the Back Arrow.
All
Press the All button at the left of the Browse
Screen.
Channel List
Press the Channel List, or Genre, to display all
the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can
scroll the Channel list by pressing the Up and
Down arrows, located on the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the TUNE/SCROLL knob.
Genre
Press the Genre button on the touchscreen to
display a list of Genres. You can select any
desired Genre by pressing the Genre list, the
Radio tunes to a channel with the content in the
selected Genre.
Presets
Press the Presets button located at the left of
the Browse screen.
You can scroll the Presets list pressing the up
and down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
Preset Selection
A Preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the ENTER/
BROWSE button on the TUNE/SCROLL knob to
select the currently highlighted Preset. When
selected, the Radio tunes to the station stored
in the Preset, and returns to the main Radio
screen.
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 423
424 MULTIMEDIA
Deleting A Preset
A Preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can Icon for the
corresponding Preset.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button located at the left of
the Browse screen.
The Favorites menu provides a means to Edit
the Favorites list and to configure the Alert
Settings, along with providing a list of Channels
currently airing any of the items in the Favorites
list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the
Up and Down arrows located at the right side of
the screen. Scrolling can also be done by oper-
ating the TUNE/SCROLL knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the touch-
screen to delete all of the Favorites or press the
Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to be
deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from a Visual alert or Audible and Visual
alert when one of your favorites is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left
of the Browse screen. This feature provides you
with the ability to select teams, edit the selec-
tion, and set alerts.
On Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the
radio to that channel.
Select Teams
Press the Select Teams button on the touch-
screen to activate the League Scroll list. Press
the chosen league and a scroll list of all teams
within the league will appear, then you can
select a team by pressing the corresponding
box. A check mark appears for all teams that
are chosen.
Remove Selection
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the touch-
screen to delete all of the Selections or press
the Trash Can Icon next to the Selection to be
deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from “Alert me to on-air games upon
start” or “Alert upon score update” or both when
one or more of your selections is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
Featured
Press the Featured button, located on the left of
the Browse screen. This feature provides a list
of your featured favorite stations.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button on the Satellite Radio
main menu or within the Settings main menu, to
activate the Audio settings screen for adjusting
Balance & Fade, Equalizer, Speed Adjusted
Volume, Loudness, AUX Volume Offset, Auto
Play, and Radio Off With Door.
You can return to the Radio screen by pressing
the X located at the top right.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 424
MULTIMEDIA 425
Balance & Fade
Balance & Fade
Press the Balance & Fade button on the touch-
screen to Balance audio between the front
speakers or fade the audio between the rear
and front speakers.
Pressing the Front, Rear, Left, or Right buttons
or press and drag the red Speaker Icon to adjust
the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Equalizer
Press the Equalizer button on the touchscreen
to activate the Equalizer screen.
Press the + or – buttons, or by pressing and
dragging over the level bar for each of the equal-
izer bands. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the
bottom of each of the Bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
Speed Adjusted Volume
Press the Speed Adjusted Volume button on the
touchscreen to activate the Speed Adjusted
Volume screen.
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by
selecting from Off, 1, 2, or 3. This alters the
automatic adjustment of the audio volume with
variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases
automatically as speed increase to compensate
for normal road noise.
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 425
426 MULTIMEDIA
Surround Sound — If Equipped
Press the On button on the touchscreen to acti-
vate Surround Sound. Press Off to deactivate
this feature.
When Surround Sound is On, you can hear
audio coming from every direction as in a movie
theatre or home theatre system.
Surround Sound
Loudness
Loudness
Press the On button on the touchscreen to acti-
vate Loudness. Press Off to deactivate this
feature.
When Loudness is On, the sound quality at
lower volumes improves.
AUX Volume Offset
AUX Volume Offset
Press the AUX Volume Offset button on the
touchscreen to activate the AUX Volume Offset
screen.
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing
of the + and – buttons. This alters the AUX input
audio volume. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus three, is displayed above
the adjustment bar.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 426
MULTIMEDIA 427
Auto Play
Auto Play
Press the Auto Play button on the touchscreen
to activate the Auto Play screen.
The Auto Play feature has two settings On and
Off. With Auto Play on, music will begin to play
from a connected device, immediately after it is
connect to the radio.
Radio Off With Door
Radio Off With Door
Press the Radio Off With Door button on the
touchscreen to activate the Radio Off With Door
screen.
The Radio Off With Door feature, when acti-
vated, keeps the radio on until the driver or
passenger door is opened, or when the Radio
Off Delay selected time has expired.
Media Mode
USB/iPod® Mode
Overview
USB/iPod® Mode is entered by either inserting
a USB device or iPod® and cable into the USB
Port or by pressing the Select Source button on
the left side of the display, and then selecting
USB 1, or USB 2 (if equipped).
Seek Up /Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
device/iPod®. Press and release the Seek
Down button on the touchscreen to return to the
beginning of the current selection or to return to
the beginning of the previous selection if the
USB device/iPod® is within the first three
seconds of the current selection.
Browse
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
display the browse window. The left side of the
browse window displays a list of ways you can
browse through the contents of the USB device/
iPod®. If supported by the device, you can
browse by Folders, Artists, Playlists, Albums,
Songs, etc. Press the desired button on the left
side of the screen. The center of the browse
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 427
428 MULTIMEDIA
window shows items and its sub-functions,
which can be scrolled by pressing the Up and
Down buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob
can also be used to scroll.
Media Mode
Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
select the desired audio source: USB.
Repeat
Press the Repeat button on the touchscreen to
toggle the repeat functionality. The Repeat
button on the touchscreen is highlighted when
active. The Radio will continue to play the
current track, repeatedly, as long as the repeat
is active. Press the Repeat button on the touch-
screen a second time to turn this feature off.
Shuffle
Press the Shuffle button on the touchscreen to
play the selections on the USB/iPod® device in
random order to provide an interesting change
of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the touch-
screen a second time to turn this feature off.
Info
Press the Info button on the touchscreen to
display the current track information. Press the
Info button on the touchscreen a second time to
cancel this feature.
Tracks
Press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to
display a pop-up with the Song List. The
currently playing song is indicated by an arrow
and lines above and below the song title. When
in the Tracks List screen, you can rotate the
Tune/Scroll knob to highlight a track (indicated
by the line above and below the track name)
and then push the Enter/Browse knob to start
playing that track.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the
pop-up.
Audio
Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio
settings.
AUX Mode
Overview
AUX (Auxiliary Mode) is entered by inserting an
AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio
jack into the AUX port or by pressing the AUX
button on the left side of the display.
Inserting Auxiliary Device
Gently insert the Auxiliary device cable into the
AUX Port. If you insert an Auxiliary device with
the ignition and the radio on, the unit will switch
to AUX mode and begin to play when you insert
the device cable.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the auxiliary device (e.g.,
selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.)
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
Volume/Mute rotary knob, or with the volume of
the attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if
the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set
too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for
the radio unit to play the music on the device.
Media Mode
Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
select the desired audio source: AUX.
Audio
Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio
settings.
BLUETOOTH® MODE
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio (BTSA) or Blue-
tooth® Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth®
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 428
MULTIMEDIA 429
device, containing music, to the Uconnect
System.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must
be paired to the Uconnect Phone to communi-
cate with the Uconnect System.
NOTE:
See the pairing procedure in the Uconnect
Phone section for more details.
To access Bluetooth® mode, press the Select
Source button on the left side of the display,
and then select Bluetooth®.
Bluetooth® Mode
Seek Up /Down
Press and release the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the Blue-
tooth® device. Press and release the Seek
Down button on the touchscreen to return to
the beginning of the current selection, or return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the
Bluetooth® device is within the first second of
the current selection.
Media Mode
Press the Media button on the touchscreen to
select the desired audio source: Bluetooth®.
Tracks
If the Bluetooth® device supports this feature,
press the Tracks button on the touchscreen to
display a pop-up with the Song List. The
currently playing song is indicated by a red
arrow and lines above and below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the
pop-up.
Audio
Refer to Radio Mode for adjusting the audio
settings.
Android Auto™ & Apple CarPlay® — If
Equipped
Android Auto™
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ is a feature of your Uconnect
system, and your Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or
higher powered smartphone with a data plan,
that allows you to project your smartphone and
a number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
display. Android Auto™ automatically brings you
useful information, and organizes it into simple
cards that appear just when they are needed.
Android Auto™ can be used with Google's
best-in-class speech technology, the steering
wheel controls, the knobs and buttons on your
radio faceplate, and the radio display’s touch-
screen to control many of your apps. To use
Android Auto™, follow the following procedure:
1. Download the Android Auto™ app from
the Google Play store on your
Android™-powered smartphone.
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 429
430 MULTIMEDIA
2. Connect your Android™-powered smart-
phone to one of the media USB ports in your
vehicle. If the Android Auto™ app was not
downloaded, the first time you plug your
device in, the app will begin to download.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable
that came with your phone, as aftermarket
cables may not work.
Android Auto™
3. Once the device is connected and recog-
nized, the “Phone” icon on the drag & drop
menu bar changes to the Android Auto™
Icon. Android Auto™ should launch, but if it
does not, refer to “Android Auto™ And Apple
CarPlay® Tips And Tricks” in this section for
the procedure to enable the feature “Auto-
Show”. You can also launch it by touching
the Android Auto™ icon on the touchscreen.
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
Google Maps™ for navigation
Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc.
for music
Handsfree Calling, and Texting for communi-
cation
Hundred of compatible apps
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may
use cellular data and your cellular coverage is
shown in the upper right corner of the radio
screen.
Signal Strength
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and download
app on Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™
and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Android Auto™ Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel or tap the microphone icon to ask Google
to take you to a desired destination by voice.
You can also touch the Navigation icon in
Android Auto™ to access Google Maps™.
NOTE:
If the VR button is not held, and is only pushed,
the built-in Uconnect VR prompts you and any
navigation command said launches the built-in
Uconnect navigation system.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 430
MULTIMEDIA 431
While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™
provides voice-guided:
Navigation
Live traffic information
Lane guidance
Android Auto™ Maps
For further information, refer to
www.android.com/auto/ (US Residents) https:/
/www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto (Canadian
Residents).
For further information on the navigation func-
tion, please refer to https://
support.google.com/android or https://
support.google.com/androidauto/.
Android Auto™ Music
Android Auto™ allows you to access and stream
your favorite music with apps like Google Play
Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your
smartphone’s data plan, you can stream
endless music on the road.
NOTE:
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set
up on your smartphone prior to using Android
Auto™, for them to work with Android Auto™.
Android Auto™ Music
NOTE:
To see the metadata for the music playing
through Android Auto™, select the Uconnect
System’s media screen.
For further information refer to https://
support.google.com/androidauto.
Android Auto™ Communication
With Android Auto™ connected, press and hold
the VR button on the steering wheel to activate
voice recognition specific to the Android Auto™.
This will allow you to send and reply to text
messages, have incoming text messages read
out loud, and place and receive hands-free
calls.
Contacts
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 431
432 MULTIMEDIA
Call In Progress
Android Auto™ Apps
The Android Auto™ App will display all the
compatible apps that are available to use with
Android Auto™, every time it is launched. You
must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed in to the app for it to
work with Android Auto™.
Refer to g.co/androidauto to see the latest list
of available apps for Android Auto™.
Apple CarPlay® Integration
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple
CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure way to use
your iPhone® in the car, and stay focused on
the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen
display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and
your voice with Siri to get access to Apple
Music®, Maps, Messages, and more.
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are
using iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in
Settings, ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for
the very first connection only, and then use the
following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning
cable that came with your phone, as after-
market cables may not work.
2. Once the device is connected and
recognized, the “Phone” icon on the drag &
drop menu bar changes to the Apple
CarPlay® Icon. Apple CarPlay® should
launch, but if not, refer to “Android Auto™
And Apple CarPlay® Tips And Tricks” in this
section for the procedure to enable the
feature “AutoShow”. You can also touch the
Apple CarPlay® icon on the touchscreen to
launch it.
Apple CarPlay®
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your iPhone’s® data plan:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
NOTE:
To use Apple CarPlay® make sure that cellular
data is turned on, and that you are in an area
with cellular coverage. Your data and cellular
coverage is shown on the left side of the radio
screen.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 432
MULTIMEDIA 433
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®.
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
Apple CarPlay® Phone
With Apple CarPlay®, press and hold the VR
button on the steering wheel to activate a Siri
voice recognition session. You can also press
and hold the Home button within Apple
CarPlay® to start talking to Siri. This allows you
to make calls or listen to voice mail as you
normally would using Siri on your iPhone®.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the
steering wheel launches a built-in VR session,
not a Siri session, and it will not function with
Apple CarPlay®.
Apple CarPlay® Music
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access all your
artists, playlists, and music from iTunes®.
Using your iPhone’s® data plan, you can also
use select third party audio apps including
music, news, sports, podcasts and more.
Apple CarPlay® Messages
Just like Phone, Apple CarPlay® allows you to
use Siri to send or reply to text messages. Siri
can also read incoming text messages, but
driver’s will not be able to read messages, as
everything is done via voice.
Apple CarPlay® Maps
To use your Apple Maps® for navigation on your
Uconnect system, launch Apple CarPlay®, and
push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel to use Siri to set your desired destination.
Alternatively, choose a nearby destination by
pressing Destinations and selecting a category,
by launching Siri from the destinations page, or
even by typing in a destination.
Apple CarPlay® Maps
NOTE:
If the Voice Recognition (VR) button is not held,
and is only pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR
prompts you and any navigation command said
launches the built-in Uconnect navigation
system.
Apple CarPlay® Apps
To use a compatible app with Apple CarPlay®,
you must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed in to the app.
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/
(US Residents) or https://www.apple.com/ca/
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 433
434 MULTIMEDIA
ios/carplay/ (Canadian Residents) to see the
latest list of available apps for Apple CarPlay®.
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips And
Tricks
AutoPlay
AutoPlay is a feature of the Uconnect system
that automatically begins playing music off of
the connected device, as soon as it is
connected. This feature can be turned on or off
in the Uconnect Settings, within the Audio
Settings category. It’s default setting is on.
NOTE:
AutoPlay® is not supported by Android Auto™.
AutoShow
AutoShow is a feature of the Uconnect system
that automatically launches and displays
Android Auto™/Apple CarPlay® when the
phone is initially connected to the USB media
port. This feature can be turned on and off in
the Uconnect Settings, within the Display
Settings category. The default setting is on.
Android Auto™ Automatic Bluetooth® Pairing
After connecting to Android Auto™ for the first
time and undergoing the setup procedure, the
smartphone will automatically pair to the
Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any
setup required every time it is within range, if
Bluetooth® is turned on.
NOTE:
Android Auto™ features cannot be used with
Bluetooth®, a USB connection is required for its
use. Android Auto™ uses both Bluetooth® and
USB connections to function, and the
connected device will be unavailable to other
devices when connected using Android Auto™.
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect
System
It is possible to have multiple devices
connected to the Uconnect system. For
example, if using Android Auto™/Apple
CarPlay®, the connected device will be the one
that will be used to place hands-free phone calls
or send hands-free text messages. However,
another device can also be paired to the
Uconnect system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio
source, so the passenger can stream music.
NOTE:
If using a Samsung device, every time it is
connected to a media USB, and there is
another device plugged in, you will need to
manually change the configuration of the
USB connection in order for the Samsung
device to send data.
The Uconnect 4 built-in media functions will
be unavailable when Android Auto™/Apple
CarPlay® are in use.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 434
MULTIMEDIA 435
Phone Mode
Overview
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Phone Menu
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system.
Uconnect Phone allows you to dial a phone
number with your mobile phone.
Uconnect Phone supports the following
features:
Voice Activated Features:
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John
Smith Mobile” or, “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text to speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
Hands-free text message reply. (Forward one
of 18 pre-defined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages).
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
View call logs on screen (“Show incoming
calls,” “Show Outgoing calls,” “Show missed
Calls,” “Show Recent Calls”).
Searching contacts phone number (“Search
for John Smith Mobile”).
NOTE:
Examples of Voice Commands are provided
throughout this manual. For quick use, go to the
Voice Command Quick Reference Section.
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and calling contacts from phone-
books displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting favorite contact phone numbers so
they are easily accessible on the main phone
screen.
Viewing and calling contacts from recent call
logs.
Reviewing your recent incoming SMS.
Listen to music on your Bluetooth® device
via the touchscreen.
1 — Favorite Contacts
2 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
4 — Siri
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Conference Call*
8 — Phone Settings
9 — Text Messaging**
10 — Direct Dial Pad
11 — Recent Call Log
12 — Browse Phone Book Entries
13 — End Call
14 — Call/Redial/Hold
15 — Do Not Disturb
16 — Reply With Text Message
* — Conference Call feature only available on
Global System Mobile (GSM) mobile devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all
mobile phones [requires Bluetooth® Message
Access Profile (MAP) profile]
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 435
436 MULTIMEDIA
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for
easy access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted
through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
automatically mutes your radio when using the
Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or
call:
877-855-8400
Canadian residents - (English) call:
800-465-2001
or (French) call:
800-387-9983
Visit UconnectPhone.com
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as
you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to
mute the system's microphone for private
conversation.
The Uconnect Phone is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology - the
global standard that enables different elec-
tronic devices to connect to each other without
wires or a docking station, so Uconnect Phone
works no matter where you stow your mobile
phone (be it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as
long as your phone is turned on and has been
paired to the vehicle's Uconnect Phone. The
Uconnect Phone allows up to 10 mobile phones
or audio devices to be linked to the system. Only
one linked (or paired) mobile phone and one
audio device can be used with the system at a
time.
Uconnect Phone Button
The Uconnect Phone button on your steering
wheel is used to get into the phone mode and
make calls, show recent, incoming, outgoing
calls, view phonebook etc.
Uconnect Voice Command Button
The Uconnect Voice Command button on your
steering wheel is only used for “barge in” and
when you are already in a call and you want to
send tones or make another call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used
to access the Voice Commands for the
Uconnect Voice Command features if your
vehicle is equipped. Please see the Uconnect
Voice Command section for direction on how to
use the button.
The Uconnect Phone is fully integrated with the
vehicle's audio system. The volume of the
Uconnect Phone can be adjusted either from
the radio volume control knob or from the
steering wheel radio control.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 436
MULTIMEDIA 437
Phone Operation
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate through the
Uconnect Phone menu structure. Voice
commands are required after most Uconnect
Phone prompts. There are two general methods
for how Voice Command works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command
and then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must
wait for the beep, which follows the “Listen”
prompt or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound
commands can be used. For example,
instead of saying “Call” and then “John
Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said: “Call John
Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound command form of the
voice command is given. You can also break
the commands into parts and say each part
of the command when you are asked for it.
For example, you can use the compound
command form voice command “Search for
John Smith,” or you can break the compound
command form into two voice commands:
“Search Contact” and when asked “John
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect
Phone works best when you talk in a normal
conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a
Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR)
engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences.
The system filters out certain non-word utter-
ances and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.” The
system handles fill-in words such as “I would
like to.”
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone
call” and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in
the same phrase or sentence, the system iden-
tifies the topic or context and provides the asso-
ciated follow-up prompt such as “Who do you
want to call?” in the case where a phone call
was requested but the specific name was not
recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog; when the
system requires more information from the user
it will ask a question to which the user can
respond without pushing the Voice Command
button on your steering wheel.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you
want to know your options at any prompt, say
“Help” following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle,
simply push the Phone button (if active) on your
steering wheel and say a command or say
“help.” All Uconnect Phone sessions begin with
a push of the VR button or the Phone button (if
active) on the radio control head.
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 437
438 MULTIMEDIA
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say
“Cancel” and you will be returned to the main
menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone
button (if active) on your steering wheel when
the system is listening for a command and be
returned to the main or previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
To begin using your Uconnect Phone, you must
pair your compatible Bluetooth® enabled
mobile phone. Mobile phone pairing is the
process of establishing a wireless connection
between a cellular phone and the Uconnect
system.
To complete the pairing process, you need to
reference your mobile phone Owner's Manual.
Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete
mobile phone compatibility information.
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK.
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position.
2. Press the Phone button in the Menu Bar on
the touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear asking if you
would like to pair a mobile phone.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your Blue-
tooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select Bluetooth® and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for Bluetooth®
connections.
Pairing A Phone
If No is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the “Phone Set-
tings” button from the Uconnect Phone
main screen.
Select “Paired Phones”, and then press
the Add Device button on the touch-
screen.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the
connection request.
5. Uconnect Phone will display an in progress
screen while the system is connecting.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 438
MULTIMEDIA 439
6. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”
7. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect Phone.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to enter
the PIN number.
8. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect
system automatically when entering the
vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected
to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is
selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth®
screen, and the Uconnect system will recon-
nect to the Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the
Uconnect system may interfere with the
Bluetooth® connection. If this happens, simply
repeat the pairing process. However, first, make
sure to delete the device from the list of phones
on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to
remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
Pair Additional Mobile Phones
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen from the Phone main screen.
2. Press the Add Device button on the touch-
screen.
3. Search for available devices on your Blue-
tooth®-enabled mobile phone. When
prompted on the phone, enter the name
and PIN shown on the Uconnect screen.
4. Uconnect Phone will display an in process
screen while the system is connecting.
5. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The latest phone paired will
have the higher priority.
You can also use the following VR commands to
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any
screen on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones” or
“Connect My Phone”
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
1. Press the Media button on the touch-
screen to begin.
2. Change the Source to Bluetooth®.
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the touch-
screen to display the Paired Audio Devices
screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the touch-
screen.
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 439
440 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear.
5. Search for available devices on your Blue-
tooth®-enabled audio device. When
prompted on the device, enter the PIN
shown on the Uconnect screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in process
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device
the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices
within range.
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The latest device paired will
have the higher priority.
You can also use a following VR command to
bring up a list of paired audio devices:
“Show Paired Phones” or
“Connect My Phone”
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to
the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio
Device within range. If you need to choose a
particular phone or Audio Device follow these
steps:
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
Sources button on the touchscreen.
3. Press to select the particular Phone or the
particular Audio Device. A pop-up menu will
appear, press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
Devices button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device button on the
touchscreen.
6. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Pair Phones or Paired Audio
Devices button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name for a different
Phone or Audio Device than the currently
connected device.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Delete Device button on the
touchscreen.
6. Press the X button to exit out of the Settings
screen.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 440
MULTIMEDIA 441
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. Press the Phone Settings button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones or Paired Audio
Devices button on the touchscreen.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name.
4. The options pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If equipped and specifically supported by your
phone, Uconnect Phone automatically down-
loads names (text names) and number entries
from the mobile phone’s phonebook. Specific
Bluetooth® Phones with Phonebook Access
Profile may support this feature.
See Uconnect website, UconnectPhone.com,
for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phone book, follow the procedure in the
“Uconnect Voice Recognition Quick Tips”
section.
Automatic download and update of a phone
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect Phone, for example,
after you start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with
four numbers per contact will be downloaded
and updated every time a phone is
connected to the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of
entries downloaded, there may be a short
delay before the latest downloaded names
can be used. Until then, if available, the previ-
ously downloaded phonebook is available for
use.
Only the phonebook of the currently
connected mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be
edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile
phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
Managing Your Favorites
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
Favorites.
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen,
and then press one of the +Add favorite
Contact buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
Contacts from the Phone main screen, and
then select the appropriate number. Press
the down arrow symbol button next to the
selected number to display the options
pop-up. In the pop-up select Add to Favor-
ites.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
To Remove A Favorite
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites”
from the Phone main screen.
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 441
442 MULTIMEDIA
2. Next select the down arrow icon next to the
contact you want to remove from your favor-
ites. This will bring up the options for that
favorite contact.
3. Press Remove from Favs.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are avail-
able and supported by Bluetooth® on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile
service plan provides three-way calling, this
feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
for the features that you have.
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call
Listed below are all the ways you can initiate a
phone call with Uconnect Phone.
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name,
Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or
Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
Dial By Saying A Number
1. Push the VR button on your steering wheel
to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the
following beep, say “Dial 151-123-4444.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number
151-123-4444.
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
1. Push the VR button on your steering wheel
to begin.
2. After the “Listening” prompt and the
following beep, say “Call John Doe Mobile.”
3. The Uconnect Phone will dial the number
associated with John Doe, or if there are
multiple numbers it will ask which number
you want to call for John Doe.
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the
following call features:
Answer
End
Ignore
Hold/unhold
Mute/unmute
Transfer the call to/from the phone
Swap two active calls
Join two active calls together
Touch-Tone Number Entry
1. Press the Phone button on the touch-
screen.
2. Press the Dial button on the touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the touch-
screens to enter the number and press Call.
If your vehicle has two or three buttons on the
steering wheel (VR, Phone Send, and Phone
End) press the VR button to send a touch-tone
and say “Send 1234#” or you can say “Send
Voicemail Password” if Voicemail password is
stored in your mobile phonebook.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 442
MULTIMEDIA 443
Recent Calls
You may browse a list of the most recent of each
of the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls
Outgoing Calls
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the recent
calls button on the Phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your
steering wheel and say “Show my incoming
calls” from any screen and the incoming calls
will be displayed.
NOTE:
Incoming can also be replaced with “Outgoing,”
“Recent”, or “Missed.”
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone,
the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle
audio system. Push the Phone button on the
steering wheel to accept the call. You can also
press the Answer button on the touchscreen or
press the caller ID box.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Press the
Uconnect Phone button on the steering wheel,
answer button on the touchscreen or caller ID
box to place the current call on hold and answer
the incoming call.
NOTE:
The Uconnect Phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an
incoming call when another call is in progress.
Therefore, the user can only answer an
incoming call or ignore it.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifica-
tions from incoming calls and texts, allowing
you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on
the wheel. For your convenience, there is a
counter display to keep track of your missed
calls and text messages while you were using
Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly.”
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth® MAP.
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 443
444 MULTIMEDIA
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
During an active call, press the Hold button on
the Phone main screen.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
You can place a call on hold by pressing the
Hold button on the Phone main screen, then
dial a number from the dialpad, recent calls,
SMS Inbox or from the phonebooks. To go back
to the first call, refer to “Toggling Between Calls”
in this section. To combine two calls, refer to
“Join Calls” in this section.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Swap button on the Phone
main screen. Only one call can be placed on
hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and
one on hold), press the Join Calls button on the
Phone main screen to combine all calls into a
Conference Call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
Phone End button on the touchscreen or the
Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only
the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
is a call on hold, it will become the new active
call.
Redial
Press the Redial button on the touchscreen, or
push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number
that was dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone
call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle
ignition has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range
for the Bluetooth® connection. It is recom-
mended to press the Transfer button on the
touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
Browsing SMS
Using the steering wheel commands, you can
view and manage the last 10 SMS messages
received on the instrument panel. To use this
function, the mobile phone must support the
SMS exchange function through Bluetooth®.
Select the PHONE button on the instrument
panel menu, and then select “SMS Reader”
using the arrow keys on the steering wheel
controls.
The “SMS Reader” submenu allows the last
10 SMS messages to be displayed.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone without terminating the call. To
transfer an ongoing call from your connected
mobile phone to the Uconnect Phone or vice
versa, press the Transfer button on the Phone
main screen.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 444
MULTIMEDIA 445
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone
If you would like to connect or disconnect the
Bluetooth® connection between a Uconnect
Phone paired mobile phone and the Uconnect
Phone, follow the instructions described in your
mobile phone User's Manual.
Things You Should Know About Your
Uconnect Phone
Voice Command
For the best performance:
Adjust the rearview mirror to provide at least
½ inch (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
Always wait for the beep before speaking.
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you.
Ensure that no one other than you is
speaking during a voice command period.
Performance is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Condition
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not
always work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names
in your favorites phonebook while the vehicle is
in motion.
Phonebook (Mobile and Favorites) name recog-
nition rate is optimized when the entries are not
similar. You can say “O” (letter “O”) for “0”
(zero).
Even though international dialing for most
number combinations is supported, some
shortcut dialing number combinations may not
be supported.
Far End Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone
and network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 445
446 MULTIMEDIA
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones have been found to lose connec-
tion to the Uconnect Phone. When this
happens, the connection can generally be
re-established by switching the mobile phone
OFF/ON. Your mobile phone is recommended to
remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to
either the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a
language change, you must wait at least 15
seconds prior to using the system.
OFF-ROAD PAGES — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with Off-Road Pages,
which provides the vehicle status while oper-
ating on off-road conditions. It supplies informa-
tion relating to the vehicle ride height, the
status of the transfer case, the pitch and roll of
the vehicle (if equipped).
To access Off-Road Pages, press the Apps
button on the touchscreen, and then select
“Off-Road Pages”.
Main Menu
Off-Road Pages has the following selectable
pages:
Drivetrain
Pitch & Roll
Accessory Gauge
Off-Road Pages Status Bar
The Off-Road Pages Status Bar is located along
the bottom of Off-Road Pages and is present in
each of the three selectable page options. It
provides continually updating information for
the following items:
Current Transfer Case Status
Current Latitude/Longitude
Current Altitude of the vehicle
Status of Hill Descent/Selec-Speed Control
and Selected Speed in MPH (km/h)
Status Bar 2WD/4WD
1 — Off-Road Pages App
2 — Uconnect Apps Button
1 — Transfer Case Status
2 — Current Latitude/Longitude
3 — Current Altitude
4 — Hill Descent Control
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 446
MULTIMEDIA 447
Drivetrain
The Drivetrain page displays information
concerning the vehicle’s drivetrain.
The following information is displayed:
Steering angle in degrees
Status of Transfer Case
Status of the Rear Axles — If Equipped
Drivetrain Menu 2WD/4WD
Pitch & Roll
The Pitch & Roll page displays the vehicle’s
current pitch (angle up and down) and roll
(angle side to side) in degrees. The pitch and roll
gauges provide a visualization of the current
vehicle angle.
Pitch & Roll Menu 2WD/4WD
Accessory Gauge
The Accessory Gauge page displays the current
status of the vehicle’s Coolant Temperature, Oil
Temperature, Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only),
Transmission Temperature, and Battery
Voltage.
Accessory Gauges Menu 2WD/4WD
1 — Steering Angle
2 — Sway Bar
3 — Front Axle Locker Status
4 — Rear Axle Locker Status
1 — Current Pitch
2 — Current Roll
1 — Coolant Temperature
2 — Oil Temperature
3 — Oil Pressure (Gas Vehicles Only)
4 — Battery Voltage
5 — Transmission Temperature (Automatic Trans-
missions Only)
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 447
448 MULTIMEDIA
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel. Reach
behind the wheel to access the switches.
Audio Controls (Back View Of Steering Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
with a push-button in the center and controls
the volume and mode of the sound system.
Pushing the top of the rocker switch increases
the volume, and pushing the bottom of the
rocker switch decreases the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SAT/CD/USB/AUX, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push-button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for
the next listenable station and pushing the
bottom of the switch will Seek Down for the next
listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio preset
button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to the
next track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the bottom of the switch
once goes to the beginning of the current track,
or to the beginning of the previous track if it is
within eight seconds after the current track
begins to play.
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL
The Media Hub is located on the instrument
panel, below the climate controls. Behind the
media hub access door, the Media Hub
contains one AUX port, a Type C USB Port and
one standard USB Port. Both USB Ports allow
you to play music from MP3 players /smart-
phones or USB devices through the vehicle’s
sound system.
Plugging in a smartphone device to a USB Port
may activate Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®
features, if equipped. For further information,
refer to "Android Auto™" or "Apple Carplay®" in
"Media Mode" in "Uconnect 4 with 7-inch
Display" or in the Owner's Manual Supplement.
The Smart Charging USB ports provide power to
your device up to an hour after the vehicle is
turned off.
NOTE:
Two devices can be plugged in at the same
time and both ports will provide charging
capabilities. Only one port can transfer data
to the system at a time. A pop-up will appear
and allow you to select the device transfer-
ring data.
Both ports share a single data connection.
The user cannot switch between Type A or
Type C.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 448
MULTIMEDIA 449
For example, if a device is plugged into the Type
A USB port and another device is plugged into
the Type C USB port, a message will appear and
allow you to select which device to use.
USB Connection
Media Hub
Located inside the center console, a second
USB Port allows you to play music from iPod®/
MP3 players or USB devices through your
vehicle’s sound system.
Center Console USB
1 — Type A Plugged In
2 — Type C Plugged In
3 — Type A And Type C Plugged In
1 — AUX Port
2 — Type C USB Port
3 — Type A USB Port
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 449
450 MULTIMEDIA
A third and fourth USB Ports (if equipped) are
located behind the center console, above the
power inverter. One is a charge only port, and
can only charge USB devices. The other USB
Port allows you to play music from iPod®/MP3
players or USB devices through your vehicle’s
sound system.
USB On The Back Of The Center Console
When a new device or smartphone is plugged
into the USB ports, the following message may
display depending on the device being utilized:
“A new device is now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“(Phone Name) now connected. Previous
connection was lost”.
“Another device is in use through the same
USB port. Please disconnect the first device
to use the second device”.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This condi-
tion may be lessened or eliminated by relo-
cating the mobile phone antenna. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your
radio performance does not satisfactorily
“clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation
when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
Regulatory And Safety Information
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal wire-
less radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 in (20 cm) or further from the
human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety stan-
dards and recommendations, which reflect the
consensus of the scientific community.
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the elec-
tromagnetic energy emitted by wireless devices
such as mobile phones. However, the use of
wireless radios may be restricted in some situa-
tions or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio.
1 - Type C And Standard USB USB Ports
2 - Type C and Standard Charge Only USB Ports
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove any external device
while driving. Failure to follow this warning
could result in a collision.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 450
MULTIMEDIA 451
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reason-
able protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guar-
antee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful inter-
ference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one
or more of the following measures:
a. Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
b. Consult an authorized dealer or an expe-
rienced radio technician for help.
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 451
452 MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR)
with these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your Uconnect 3, Uconnect 4, or
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV system.
Uconnect 3
Uconnect 4
Uconnect 4C NAV
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or in
the Apps menus of your 8.4-inch touchscreen,
you have the Uconnect 4C NAV system. If not,
you have a Uconnect 4C with 8.4-inch display
system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system
with your voice are the buttons on your steering
wheel.
1. Visit
UconnectPhone.com
to check mobile
device and feature compatibility and to
find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead. The micro-
phone is positioned in the middle console
above the rearview mirror and aimed at the
driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first push either the Voice Recognition
(VR) or Phone button, wait until after the
beep, then say your Voice Command.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 452
MULTIMEDIA 453
5. You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR or Phone
button and saying a Voice Command from
current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons — If Equipped
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
voice recognition system’s status. Cues appear
on the touchscreen for Uconnect 3 radio and
above the main menu bar for Uconnect 4/4C/
4C Nav radios.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included Siri-
usXM® Satellite Radio trial required).
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP:
At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or
want to learn a Voice Command, push the VR
button and say “Help”. The system provides
you with a list of commands.
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB, Blue-
tooth® and auxiliary ports (if equipped). Voice
operation is only available for connected USB
and AUX devices. (Remote CD player optional
and not available on all vehicles).
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say one of the following commands
and follow the prompts to switch your media
source or choose an artist/album/song/genre.
“Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album
Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight
Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
TIP:
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
see all of the music on your iPod® or USB
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call,
Send Or Receive A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin Radio Or Media
Functions. For 8.4-inch Displays Only: Push To Be-
gin Navigation, Apps And Climate Functions.
3 — Push To End Call
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 453
454 MULTIMEDIA
device. Your Voice Command must match
exactly how the artist, album, song and genre
information is displayed.
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone calls
is easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook
button is illuminated on your touchscreen, your
system is ready to make a phone call. You may
have to wait for a few more moments to issue a
Voice Command for hands-free calling. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone compat-
ibility and pairing instructions.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel or
Phone button . After the beep, say one of the
following commands:
“Call John Smith”
“Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system
prompts”
“Redial (call previous outgoing phone
number)”
“Call back (call previous incoming phone
number)”
TIP:
When providing a Voice Command, push the VR
button on the steering wheel or Phone button
and say “Call”, then pronounce the name
exactly as it appears in your phone book. When
a contact has multiple phone numbers, you can
say “Call John Smith work/home/cell/ect.”
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect announces incoming text messages.
Push the VR button or Phone button (if
enabled) and say “Listen”. (Must have compat-
ible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system).
1. Once an incoming text message is read to
you, push the VR button
or Phone button
(if enabled). After the beep, say: “Reply
”.
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the pre-defined
messages and follow the system prompts.
TIP:
Your mobile phone must have the full imple-
mentation of the Message Access Profile (MAP)
to take advantage of this feature. For details
about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further infor-
mation on how to enable this feature on your
Apple® iPhone®, refer to your mobile phone’s
“User manual”.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes. Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No. Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay. Where are
you?
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
Call me. Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number>
minutes.
I’m on my
way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 454
MULTIMEDIA 455
TIP:
Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
iPhone®, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send
a text message.
Climate — If Equipped
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and
keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say one of the following commands:
“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP:
Voice Command for climate may only be used to
adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle.
Voice Command will not work to adjust the
heated seats or steering wheel (if equipped).
Navigation (4C NAV) — If Equipped
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save
time and become more productive when the
system shows you exactly how to get to where
you want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
on the steering wheel. After the beep, say:
“
Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn
Hills, Michigan” or enter State.
2. Then follow the system prompts.
TIP:
To start a Point of Interest (POI) search, push
the VR button . After the beep, say: “Find
nearest coffee shop”.
Siri® Eyes Free
Available on iPhone® 4s and later
Siri lets you use your voice to send text
messages, schedule meetings, select media,
place phone calls and much more. Siri uses
your natural language to understand what you
mean and responds back to confirm your
requests. The system is designed to keep your
eyes on the road and your hands on the wheel
by letting Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To begin, ensure Siri is enabled on your
iPhone®. Pair your Siri-enabled device to your
Uconnect System. Push and hold, then release
the Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on
the steering wheel. After you hear a double
beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and
music, get directions, read text messages, and
many other useful requests.
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifica-
tions from incoming calls and texts, allowing
you to keep your eyes on the road and hands on
the wheel. For your convenience, there is a
counter display to keep track of your missed
calls and text messages while you were using
Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call, or both, when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Only the beginning of your custom message
will be seen on the touchscreen.
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 455
456 MULTIMEDIA
Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth® MAP.
Android Auto™ — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to
interact with Android’s™ best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’s voice recogni-
tion system, and use your smartphone’s data
plan to project your Android™-powered smart-
phone and a number of its apps onto your
Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android™
5.0 (Lollipop) or higher to one of the media USB
ports, using the factory-provided USB cable, and
press the new Android Auto™ icon that replaces
your “Phone” icon on the main menu bar to
begin Android Auto™. Push and hold the VR
button on the steering wheel, or press and hold
the Microphone icon within Android Auto™, to
activate Android’s™ VR, which recognizes
natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
Phone
Text Messages
Additional Apps
Refer to "Android Auto™" in "Media Mode" in
"Uconnect 4 with 7-inch Display" section or in
the Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement for
further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 (Lollipop) or higher and download
app on Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™,
and Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
Apple CarPlay® — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your iPhone® and a
number of its apps onto your Uconnect touch-
screen. Connect your iPhone® 5 or higher to
one of the media USB ports, using the
factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the
new Apple CarPlay® icon that replaces your
Phone icon on the main menu bar to begin
Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR button
on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
Home button within Apple CarPlay®, to activate
Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands
to use a list of your iPhone’s® features:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
Additional Apps
Refer to "Apple Carplay®" in "Media Mode" in
"Uconnect 4 with 7-inch Display" section or in
the Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement for
further information.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 456
MULTIMEDIA 457
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone®. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple®.
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science, and
Economic Canada license-exempt RSS stan-
dard(s). Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interfer-
ence.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic Develop-
ment applicables aux appareils radio exempts
de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux
conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouil-
lage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en comprom-
ettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cual-
quier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
Additional Information
© 2019 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc. Siri-
usXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
US residents visit www.DriveUconnect.com
or call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7
days a week)
Canadian residents visit www.DriveUcon-
nect.ca or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian™ services support:
US residents visit www.siriusxm.com/
guardian or call: 1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit www.siriusxm.ca/
guardian or call: 1-877-324-9091
9
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 457
458
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you are having warranty work done, be sure to
have the right papers with you. Take your
warranty folder. All work to be performed may
not be covered by the warranty. Discuss addi-
tional charges with the service manager. Keep a
maintenance log of your vehicle's service
history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is
advisable to make these arrangements when
you call for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers
are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We
want you to be happy with our products and
services.
Warranty service must be done by an autho-
rized dealer. We strongly recommend that you
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They
know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. The manufacturer's authorized dealers
have the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an autho-
rized dealer service manager first. Most matters
can be resolved with this process.
If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
talk to the general manager or owner of the
authorized dealer. They want to know if you
need assistance.
If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve
the concern, you may contact the manufac-
turer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's
customer center should include the following
information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (mobile, home
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 458
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 459
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficul-
ties, the manufacturer has installed special
Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf (TDD)
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing
or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after the manufacturer's
New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The
manufacturer stands behind only the manufac-
turer's service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer's service contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identifica-
tion Card in the mail within three weeks of the
vehicle delivery date. If you have any questions
about the service contract, call the manufac-
turer's Service Contract National Customer
Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian resi-
dents, call (800) 465-2001 English / (800)
387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any
service contract that is not the manufacturer's
service contract. It is not responsible for any
service contract other than the manufacturer's
service contract. If you purchased a service
contract that is not a manufacturer's service
contract, and you require service after the
manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those docu-
ments.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major invest-
ment in facilities, tools, and training to assure
that you are absolutely delighted with the
ownership experience. You will be pleased with
their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty
issues or related concerns.
10
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 459
460 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® fluids, lubricants, parts, and accesso-
ries are available from an authorized dealer.
They are recommended for your vehicle in order
to help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addi-
tion to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer, or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Adminis-
trator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue,
SE., West Building, Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other infor-
mation about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department immedi-
ately. Canadian customers who wish to
report a safety defect to the Canadian
government should contact Transport
Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investiga-
tions and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or
go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit,
chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids
contained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other
reproductive harm.
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 460
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 461
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
the information that students and professional
technicians need in diagnosing/trouble-
shooting, problem solving, maintaining,
servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A
complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These practical manuals make it easy for
students and technicians to find and fix prob-
lems on computer-controlled vehicle systems
and features. They show exactly how to find and
correct problems the first time, using
step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests, and a
complete list of all tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
LLC vehicles. Included are starting, operating,
emergency and maintenance procedures, as
well as specifications, capabilities, and safety
tips.
Call toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
www.techauthority.com (US)
10
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 461
462
INDEX
A
About Your Brakes .................................358
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
(Cruise Control) .....................................236
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ............325
Adding Fuel ..........................................255
Additives, Fuel ......................................360
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation ................................. 176
Air Bag Warning Light ................... 173 , 176
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 186 , 303
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .................... 303
Front Air Bag ............................... 174 , 176
If Deployment Occurs ........................... 185
Knee Impact Bolsters ........................... 183
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ............. 187
Maintenance ...................................... 187
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ............ 174
Transporting Pets ................................ 201
Air Bag Light .........................132 , 173, 202
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter) ..................................................315
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................317
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ...............317 , 318
Air Conditioner System ............................317
Air Conditioning .......................................57
Air Conditioning Filter ....................... 59 , 318
Air Conditioning System ............................ 58
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ..................58
Air Filter ..............................................315
Air Pressure
Tires
................................................. 339
Alarm
Arm The System
.................................... 21
Disarm The System ................................ 21
Security Alarm ...............................21 , 135
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle
............................................... 10
Android Auto ........................................ 456
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) .............. 325 , 363
Disposal ............................................ 326
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................... 144
Anti-Lock Warning Light ........................... 135
Apple CarPlay .......................................456
Assist, Hill Start .....................................150
Audio Settings ...................................... 424
Audio Systems (Radio) ............................ 368
Auto Down Power Windows ........................ 60
Automatic Dimming Mirror .........................41
Automatic Door Locks ............................... 27
Automatic Headlights ............................... 43
Automatic High Beams .............................43
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......... 58
Automatic Transmission ......................... 215
Adding Fluid .......................................330
Fluid And Filter Change .........................330
Fluid Change ...................................... 330
Fluid Level Check ......................... 329 , 330
Fluid Type .................................. 329 , 367
Gear Ranges .......................................216
Special Additives .................................330
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode .. 219
Aux Mode ............................................ 428
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ...... 117
Auxiliary Power Outlet ............................. 117
Auxiliary Switches .................................. 119
Axle Fluid ............................................ 367
Axle Lock............................................. 225
B
Battery
....................................... 133 , 312
Charging System Light ..........................133
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ..................13
Belts, Seat ........................................... 202
Blind Spot Monitoring ............................. 152
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 462
463
Bluetooth
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between the
Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone
...... 445
Connecting To A Particular Mobile
Phone Or Audio Device After Pairing
..... 440
Bluetooth Mode .....................................428
Body Mechanism Lubrication ....................320
B-Pillar Location ....................................335
Brake Assist System ...............................145
Brake Control System .............................145
Brake Fluid...................................328 , 367
Brake System ...............................328 , 358
Anti-Lock (ABS) .................................... 358
Fluid Check ........................................ 328
Master Cylinder ................................... 328
Parking ............................................. 209
Warning Light ..................................... 132
Brake/Transmission Interlock ...................215
Bulb Replacement .........................279 , 281
Bulbs, Light ..................................204 , 279
Bumper End Cap Removal .......................267
C
Camera, Rear
.......................................254
Capacities, Fluid ....................................363
Caps, Filler
Fuel
.................................................. 255
Oil (Engine) ........................................ 310
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ................... 326
Car Washes ..........................................349
Carbon Monoxide Warning ............... 201 , 362
Cargo Area Cover ................................... 110
Cargo Load Floor ................................... 110
Cargo Tie-Downs ................................... 110
Carpeting ............................................ 352
Cellular Phone ...................................... 450
Center High Mounted Stop Light ............... 283
Certification Label ................................. 256
Chains, Tire .......................................... 345
Changing A Flat Tire ............................... 331
Chart, Tire Sizing ................................... 332
Check Engine Light (Malfunction
Indicator Light)
...................................... 142
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety .............. 201
Checks, Safety ...................................... 201
Child Restraint ...................................... 188
Child Restraints
Booster Seats
..................................... 190
Child Seat Installation .......................... 199
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt ..... 196
Infant And Child Restraints .................... 189
Locating The LATCH Anchorages ............. 194
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ... 192
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 190
Seating Positions ................................ 191
Clean Air Gasoline ................................. 360
Cleaning
Wheels
............................................. 344
Climate Control
Automatic ............................................51
Manual ................................................47
Cold Weather Operation .......................... 208
Compact Spare Tire ............................... 343
Connector
UCI ...................................................448
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI) ..........448
Console .............................................. 116
Floor .................................................116
Contract, Service ................................... 459
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ......... 326
Cooling System ..................................... 324
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ....................325
Coolant Level .............................. 326 , 327
Cooling Capacity .................................. 363
Disposal Of Used Coolant .......................326
Drain, Flush, And Refill .......................... 324
Inspection .......................... 324 , 326 , 327
Points To Remember ............................327
Pressure Cap ...................................... 326
Radiator Cap ......................................326
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) ..................... 325 , 363 , 364
Corrosion Protection .............................. 348
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ................. 236
Cruise Light ................................. 140 , 141
Customer Assistance ............................. 458
Customer Programmable
Features
............................. 369 , 380, 392
11
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 463
464
Cybersecurity
........................................368
D
Daytime Running Lights ............................42
Dealer Service ......................................313
Defroster, Windshield .............................202
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers ........................46
Diagnostic System, Onboard .....................141
Dimmer Switch
Headlight ............................................. 43
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine)
........................................ 312
Disable Vehicle Towing ............................302
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)
.................... 326
Disturb ................................................443
Do Not Disturb ......................................455
Door Ajar .....................................133 , 135
Door Ajar Light ..............................133 , 135
Door Frame ............................................70
Installation ........................................... 70
Removal .............................................. 70
Door Locks
Automatic
............................................ 27
Door Opener, Garage ..............................111
Doors....................................................22
Removal ........................................ 27 , 29
Removal, Front ...................................... 27
Removal, Rear ...................................... 29
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt .........................31 , 32
Driving ................................................266
Dual Top ............................................... 61
E
Electric Brake Control System
................... 145
Anti-Lock Brake System ........................ 144
Electronic Roll Mitigation ................146 , 152
Electric Remote Mirrors ............................ 41
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary (Power Outlet) ..... 117
Electrical Power Outlets .......................... 117
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) .... 233
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............... 146
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light ..... 134
Emergency
In Case Of
......................................... 275
SOS Emergency Call ............................. 275
Emergency Brake .................................. 209
Emergency, In Case Of
Jacking ......................................290 , 331
Jump Starting ..................................... 296
Tow Hooks ......................................... 303
Emission Control System Maintenance ....... 142
Engine ................................................ 310
Air Cleaner ......................................... 315
Block Heater ...................................... 209
Break-In Recommendations ................... 209
Compartment ..............................310 , 311
Compartment Identification ............310 , 311
Coolant (Antifreeze) ............................. 364
Cooling ............................................. 324
Exhaust Gas Caution .................... 201 , 362
Fails To Start ...................................... 208
Flooded, Starting ................................. 208
Fuel Requirements ....................... 359 , 363
Jump Starting ..................................... 296
Oil .................................... 314 , 363 , 364
Oil Filler Cap .......................................310
Oil Filter ............................................. 315
Oil Reset ............................................126
Oil Selection ............................... 314 , 363
Oil Synthetic .......................................315
Overheating ........................................ 299
Starting ............................................. 205
Engine Oil Viscosity ................................ 314
Engine Oil Viscosity Chart ........................ 314
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature....................................... 186 , 303
Ethanol ............................................... 360
Exhaust Gas Caution .............................. 201
Exhaust Gas Cautions ............................ 362
Exhaust System ............................ 201 , 323
Exterior Lights ................................ 42 , 204
F
Fabric Care
.......................................... 350
Fabric Top ........................................... 350
Filters
Air Cleaner ......................................... 315
Air Conditioning ............................. 59 , 318
Engine Oil .................................. 315 , 364
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 464
465
Engine Oil Disposal
.............................. 315
Flashers
Hazard Warning
................................... 275
Turn Signal ......................................... 204
Turn Signals ....................... 140 , 281 , 282
Flash-To-Pass .........................................43
Flat Tire Changing ..........................331 , 343
Flat Tire Stowage ...........................331 , 343
Flooded Engine Starting ..........................208
Fluid Capacities .....................................363
Fluid Leaks ..........................................204
Fluid Level
Manual Transmission
........................... 329
Fluid Level Checks .................................329
Brake ................................................ 328
Engine Oil .......................................... 312
Fluid, Brake ..........................................367
Fluids And Lubricants .............................364
Fog Lights ............................................282
Fog Lights, Service .................................282
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat ........................35
Fold-Flat Seats ........................................31
Folding Rear Seats ...................................34
Folding Windshield .................................105
Forward Collision Warning ........................157
Four Wheel Drive ...................................220
Operation .......................................... 220
Shifting ............................................. 220
System .............................................. 220
Four Wheel Drive Operation ......................222
Four-Way Hazard Flasher .........................275
Freedom Panels ................................ 65 , 66
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ........................... 300
Front Axle (Differential) ........................... 328
Fuel ................................................... 359
Adding .............................................. 255
Additives ........................................... 360
Clean Air ........................................... 360
Ethanol ............................................. 360
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ............................. 255
Gasoline ........................................... 359
Materials Added .................................. 360
Methanol .......................................... 360
Octane Rating .............................359 , 364
Requirements .................................... 363
Specifications ..................................... 364
Tank Capacity ..................................... 363
Fueling................................................ 255
Fuses ................................................. 283
G
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)
............... 111
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ................. 255 , 256
Gasoline, (Fuel) ..................................... 359
Gasoline, Clean Air ................................. 360
Gasoline, Reformulated .......................... 360
Gear Ranges ................................ 212 , 216
Glass Cleaning ...................................... 357
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ....................258
GVWR ................................................. 256
H
Hard Top ............................................... 65
Hazard Warning Flashers ........................ 275
Head Restraints ...................................... 37
Headlights
Automatic
............................................43
Bulb Replacement ...............................281
Cleaning ............................................349
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........43
Lights On Reminder ................................ 44
Passing ............................................... 43
Replacing ...........................................281
Heated Mirrors ....................................... 42
Heated Steering Wheel ............................. 40
High Beam/Low Beam Select
(Dimmer) Switch
..................................... 43
Hill Descent Control ............................... 149
Hill Descent Control Indicator ................... 149
Hill Start Assist ..................................... 150
Hitches
Trailer Towing
.....................................260
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) .............. 111
Hood Prop ........................................... 109
Hood Release ....................................... 109
I
Ignition
................................................. 15
Switch .................................................15
In Case Of Emergency ............................ 275
11
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 465
466
In Vehicle Help
Vehicle User Guide
................................. 11
Inside Rearview Mirror ..............................40
Installation .............................................65
Instrument Cluster .................................122
Descriptions ....................................... 140
Display .............................................. 125
Engine Oil Reset .................................. 126
Menu Items ........................................ 127
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................356
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) ..............284
Interior And Instrument Lights .....................44
Interior Appearance Care .........................351
Interior Lights .........................................44
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ...............46
Inverter
Power ............................................... 118
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ...........................427
J
Jack Location ........................................291
Jack Operation ..............................292 , 331
Jacking Instructions ................................292
Jump Starting .......................................296
K
Key Fob
Arm The System
.................................... 21
Disarm The System ................................ 21
Programming Additional Key Fobs .............. 14
Key Fob Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) ............................. 13
Key Fob Programming (Remote
Keyless Entry) .........................................14
Key-In Reminder ...................................... 16
Keyless Enter-N-Go .................................. 23
Passive Entry ........................................ 23
Keys ..................................................... 12
Replacement ...................................14 , 20
L
Lane Change Assist
..................................44
Lap/Shoulder Belts ................................167
Latches ............................................... 204
Hood ................................................ 109
Leaks, Fluid ......................................... 204
Life Of Tires .......................................... 341
Light Bulbs................................... 204 , 279
Lights ................................................. 204
Air Bag ...............................132 , 173 , 202
Automatic Headlights ............................. 43
Brake Assist Warning ........................... 148
Brake Warning .................................... 132
Bulb Replacement ........................279 , 281
Center Mounted Stop ........................... 283
Cruise ........................................140 , 141
Daytime Running ................................... 42
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ....................... 43
Electronic Stability Program(ESP)
Indicator
........................................ 134
Exterior ....................................... 42 , 204
Fog ...................................................282
Hazard Warning Flasher ........................ 275
Headlights ..........................................281
High Beam ...........................................43
High Beam/Low Beam Select ...................43
Hill Descent Control Indicator .................149
Interior ................................................44
Lights On Reminder ................................ 44
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ....... 136
Park ................................................. 140
Passing ............................................... 43
Rear Servicing ..................................... 282
Rear Tail Lamps ..................................282
Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 135
Security Alarm ..................................... 135
Service ...................................... 279 , 281
Side Marker ........................................282
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ..............160
Traction Control ...................................148
Turn Signal .........................................204
Turn Signals ....................... 140 , 281 , 282
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions ............................ 134 , 140
Load Floor, Cargo .................................. 110
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode ................ 131
Load Shed Battery Saver On .................... 131
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ......... 131
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ......... 131
Loading Vehicle .................................... 256
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 466
467
Tires
................................................. 335
Locking
Axle
.................................................. 225
Locks
Automatic Door
..................................... 27
Child Protection ..................................... 26
Power Door .......................................... 23
Low Tire Pressure System ........................160
Lowering..........................................73 , 88
Lubrication, Body ...................................320
Lug Nuts/Bolts ......................................358
Luggage Carrier .....................................121
M
Maintenance
........................................101
Maintenance Free Battery ........................312
Maintenance Schedule ...........................304
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check
Engine)........................................136 , 142
Manual
Park Release ...................................... 295
Service .............................................. 461
Manual Transmission .....................211 , 329
Fluid Level Check ................................. 329
Lubricant Selection ...................... 329 , 367
Shift Speeds ....................................... 212
Methanol .............................................360
Mirrors .................................................. 40
Automatic Dimming ............................... 41
Electric Powered ................................... 41
Electric Remote .................................... 41
Heated ............................................... 42
Outside ............................................... 41
Rearview ............................................. 40
Vanity ................................................. 42
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle
............................................... 10
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ..................160
Mopar Parts .........................................460
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period
.................... 209
O
Occupant Restraints ............................... 165
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) .......... 359, 364
Off Road Pages
Accessory Gauges ............................... 447
Drivetrain .......................................... 447
Pitch And Roll ..................................... 447
Status Bar ......................................... 446
Off-Road Pages .....................................446
Oil Filter, Change ................................... 315
Oil Filter, Selection ................................. 315
Oil Pressure Light .................................. 134
Oil Reset ............................................. 126
Oil, Engine ................................... 314 , 364
Capacity ............................................363
Change Interval ...................................314
Dipstick ............................................. 312
Disposal ............................................ 315
Filter ......................................... 315 , 364
Filter Disposal .....................................315
Identification Logo ...............................314
Materials Added To .............................. 315
Pressure Warning Light .........................134
Recommendation ........................ 314 , 363
Synthetic ...........................................315
Viscosity .................................... 314 , 363
Onboard Diagnostic System ..................... 141
Opener, Garage Door (Homelink) .............. 111
Operating Precautions ............................ 141
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual
............................... 9 , 461
Outside Rearview Mirrors .......................... 41
Overheating, Engine ............................... 299
P
Paddle Shifters ..................................... 219
Paint Care ........................................... 348
Parking Brake ...................................... 209
ParkSense System, Rear ......................... 249
Passive Entry ......................................... 23
Pets ................................................... 201
Placard, Tire And Loading Information ........ 335
11
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 467
468
Power
Brakes
.............................................. 358
Door Locks ........................................... 23
Inverter ............................................. 118
Mirrors ................................................ 41
Steering ............................................ 227
Windows .............................................. 60
Power Sliding Top ..................................101
Operation .......................................... 101
Pinch Protect ...................................... 101
Quarter Window Removal ...................... 103
Power Steering Fluid ...............................367
Power Top Quarter Windows .....................103
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts ...............171
Preparation For Jacking ...........................292
Pretensioners
Seat Belts .......................................... 171
R
Radial Ply Tires
......................................339
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ..........326
Radio
Presets ............................................. 420
Radio Operation ............................419 , 450
Raising ............................................73 , 88
Rear Axle (Differential) ............................328
Rear Camera ........................................254
Rear Cross Path ....................................155
Rear ParkSense System ..........................249
Rear Swing Gate ....................................109
Rear Wiper/Washer ................................. 47
Recreational Towing ............................... 264
Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) ..... 265
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) .. 266
Reformulated Gasoline ........................... 360
Refrigerant .......................................... 318
Release, Hood ...................................... 109
Reminder, Seat Belt ............................... 166
Remote Control
Starting System
.................................... 17
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm ...................................... 21
Disarm The Alarm .................................. 21
Programming Additional Key Fobs ............. 14
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control ....... 448
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .......................... 18
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features .......................................... 19
Uconnect Settings ................................. 19
Remote Starting System ............................ 17
Removable Doors .............................. 27 , 29
Front .................................................. 27
Rear ................................................... 29
Removable Top .....................................101
Removal ................................................ 65
Removing ..............................................61
Replacement Bulbs ................................ 279
Replacement Keys ............................. 14 , 20
Replacement Tires ................................. 341
Reporting Safety Defects ........................ 460
Restraints, Child ................................... 188
Restraints, Head ..................................... 37
Roll Over Warning ...................................... 9
Roof Type Carrier .................................. 121
Rotation, Tires ...................................... 346
S
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .................... 202
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ................. 204
Safety Defects, Reporting ........................ 460
Safety Information, Tire .......................... 331
Safety Tips .......................................... 201
Safety, Exhaust Gas ............................... 201
Schedule, Maintenance .......................... 304
Seat Belt Reminder ............................... 135
Seat Belts ................................... 166 , 202
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................170
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ......170
Adjustable Upper Shoulder
Belt Anchorage ................................ 170
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) ........... 172
Child Restraints ...................................188
Energy Management Feature ..................171
Extender ............................................170
Front Seat .......................... 166 , 167 , 168
Inspection ..........................................202
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation ..................168
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................. 169
Lap/Shoulder Belts .............................. 167
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 468
469
Operating Instructions
.......................... 168
Pregnant Women ................................. 171
Pretensioners ..................................... 171
Rear Seat .......................................... 167
Reminder ........................................... 166
Seat Belt Extender ............................... 170
Seat Belt Pretensioner .......................... 171
Untwisting Procedure ............................ 169
Seat Belts Maintenance ..........................356
Seats ....................................................31
Adjustment .......................................... 31
Fold And Tumble Rear ............................. 35
Height Adjustment ................................. 32
Rear Folding ......................................... 31
Tilting ................................................. 31
Security Alarm .................................21 , 135
Arm The System .................................... 21
Disarm The System ................................ 21
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............364
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ............................19
Sentry Key Replacement .....................14 , 20
Service Assistance .................................458
Service Contract ....................................459
Service Manuals ....................................461
Shifting ...............................................214
Automatic Transmission ................ 214 , 215
Manual Transmission ........................... 211
Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer
Case Neutral (N) .............................. 265
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of
Transfer Case Neutral (N) .................. 266
Shoulder Belts ...................................... 167
Side Step Removal ................................ 267
Signals, Turn ................ 140 , 204, 281, 282
Siri ..................................................... 455
Sirius Satellite Radio .............................. 421
Favorites ........................................... 423
Replay .............................................. 422
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM
................................... 423
Favorites ........................................... 423
Replay .............................................. 422
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .......................345
Snow Tires ........................................... 343
Soft Top .............................. 61 , 73, 82, 88
Soft Top Windows ....................................82
Spare Tires .......................... 291 , 343, 344
Spark Plugs .......................................... 364
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline)
................................... 364
Oil ................................................... 364
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ....................................... 235
Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ......................... 239
Cancel .............................................. 235
Resume ............................................ 235
Speed Control (Cruise Control) .......... 233, 236
Starting ............................................... 205
Automatic Transmission ........................ 205
Button .................................................15
Cold Weather ......................................208
Engine Block Heater ............................. 209
Engine Fails To Start .............................208
Manual Transmission ............................ 205
Remote ...............................................17
Starting And Operating ........................... 205
Starting Procedures ............................... 205
Steering ................................................ 39
Power ...............................................227
Tilt Column ...........................................39
Wheel, Heated ......................................40
Wheel, Tilt ............................................39
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ................. 448
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System
Controls
.............................................. 448
Stop/Start ................................... 227 , 230
Storage............................66 , 82, 103, 115
Behind the Seat ...................................116
Storage, Vehicle .............................. 59 , 347
Store Radio Presets ............................... 420
Storing Your Vehicle ............................... 347
Stuck, Freeing ...................................... 300
Sun Roof ............................................. 101
Sway Bar Disconnect
Electronic
...........................................226
Sway Control, Trailer .............................. 152
Swing Gate, Rear .................................. 109
Synthetic Engine Oil ............................... 315
System, Remote Starting .......................... 17
11
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 469
470
T
Telescoping Steering Column
......................39
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) ..........58
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ...........................110
Tilt Steering Column .................................39
Tire And Loading Information Placard .........335
Tire Markings ........................................331
Tire Safety Information ............................331
Tires ........................... 204 , 338, 343, 346
Aging (Life Of Tires) .............................. 341
Air Pressure ........................................ 338
Chains .............................................. 345
Changing ................................... 290 , 331
Compact Spare ................................... 343
General Information ..................... 338 , 343
High Speed ........................................ 339
Inflation Pressure ................................ 339
Jacking .............................................. 331
Life Of Tires ........................................ 341
Load Capacity ..................................... 335
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) .................................. 137 , 160
Quality Grading ................................... 346
Radial ............................................... 339
Replacement ...................................... 341
Rotation ............................................ 346
Safety ....................................... 331 , 338
Sizes ................................................ 332
Snow Tires ......................................... 343
Spare Tires ......................... 291 , 343 , 344
Spinning ........................................... 340
Tread Wear Indicators .......................... 341
Wheel Nut Torque ............................... 358
To Open Hood .......................................109
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight .................. 261
Top
Dual ................................................... 61
Freedom ............................................. 65
Hard................................................... 65
Power Sliding ..................................... 101
Removable ........................................ 101
Soft...............................................73 , 88
Tow Hooks
Emergency ........................................ 303
Towing ................................ 257 , 261, 302
Disabled Vehicle ................................. 302
Recreational ...................................... 264
Weight .............................................. 261
Towing Behind A Motorhome .................... 264
Trac-Lok
Rear Axle
........................................... 225
Traction Control .................................... 152
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ........................ 152
Trailer Towing ....................................... 257
Cooling System Tips ............................. 264
Hitches ............................................. 260
Trailer And Tongue Weight ..................... 261
Wiring ............................................... 262
Trailer Towing Guide ............................... 261
Trailer Weight ....................................... 261
Transfer Case ....................................... 329
Fluid .................................................367
Four-Wheel-Drive-Operation ............ 220 , 222
Maintenance ...................................... 329
Transmission ....................................... 215
Automatic .................................. 215 , 329
Fluid .................................................367
Maintenance ...................................... 329
Manual ..............................................211
Shifting ............................................. 214
Transmitter, Garage Door
Opener (Homelink) ................................ 111
Transporting Pets .................................. 201
Tread Wear Indicators ............................ 341
Turn Signals ......................... 140 , 281, 282
U
UCI Connector
...................................... 448
Uconnect
Advanced Phone Connectivity
.................444
Phone Call Features .............................442
Things You Should Know About
Your Uconnect Phone ........................445
Uconnect Settings ..................................19
Uconnect Phone ............437 , 438, 439, 440
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming
Call — Call Currently In Progress
...........443
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call —
No Call Currently In Progress
...............443
Bluetooth Communication Link ...............446
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 470
471
Call By Saying A Phonebook Name
........... 442
Call Continuation ......................... 418 , 444
Call Controls ....................................... 442
Call Termination .................................. 444
Cancel Command ................................ 438
Connect Or Disconnect Link Between The
Uconnect Phone And Mobile Phone ...... 445
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing .................. 440
Deleting A Phone Or Audio Device ............ 440
Dial By Saying A Number ....................... 442
Disconnecting A Phone Or Audio Device .... 440
Far End Audio Performance .................... 445
Help Command ................................... 437
Join Calls ........................................... 444
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A
Favorite ......................................... 441
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress ........................................ 444
Managing Your Favorites ....................... 441
Natural Speech ................................... 437
Operation .......................................... 437
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone ........................................... 438
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio Device ... 439
Pair Additional Mobile Phones ................ 439
Phonebook Download ........................... 441
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold .............. 444
Power-Up ........................................... 446
Recent Calls ....................................... 443
Redial ............................................... 444
To Remove A Favorite ........................... 441
Toggling Between Calls ......................... 444
Touch-Tone Number Entry ..................... 442
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone ... 444
Voice Command .................................. 445
Ways To Initiate A Phone Call ................. 442
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable
Features
............. 19 , 23, 369 , 380 , 392
Passive Entry Programming ..................... 23
Uniform Tire Quality Grades ..................... 346
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Connector ............................................ 448
Universal Transmitter ............................. 111
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt ................169
V
Vanity Mirrors .........................................42
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ............ 358
Vehicle Loading ............................. 256 , 335
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ................ 10
Vehicle Storage ............................... 59 , 347
Vehicle User Guide
In Vehicle Help
..................................... 11
Navigation ........................................... 11
Operating Instructions ............................ 11
Searching User Guide ............................. 11
Viscosity, Engine Oil ............................... 314
Voice Command .................................... 452
Voice Recognition System (VR) ................. 452
W
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions)
........................................ 136
Warnings And Cautions ............................. 10
Warnings, Roll Over ................................... 9
Warranty Information ............................. 460
Washers, Windshield ............................. 312
Washing Vehicle ................................... 349
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...................... 344
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ...................... 344
Wind Buffeting ................................ 61 , 102
Window Fogging ...................................... 59
Window Storage ...................................... 82
Windows ............................................... 60
Power .................................................60
Windshield
Folding ..............................................105
Windshield Defroster ............................. 202
Windshield Washers ........................ 45 , 312
Fluid .................................................312
Windshield Wiper Blades ........................ 320
Windshield Wipers ................................... 45
Wipers Blade Replacement ..................... 320
Wipers, Rear .......................................... 47
11
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 471
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 472
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves
the right to make changes in design and specifications, and⁄or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s
Manual, Navigation⁄Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S.
residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement
kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using
any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a
convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-highway
motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can
be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or
use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your
reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know
you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store®
or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
OWNER’S MANUAL
20_JL_OM_EN_USC_N
Second Edition
© 2019 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
2020 WRANGLER
2020 WRANGLER
